SA Master Lab+

6HUYLFH0DQXDO
0DVWHU/DE0DVWHU/DE
98.22.56 Edition 3

(TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ
,QVWDOODWLRQ
6HUYLFHPHQX
0DLQWHQDQFH
3RZHUVXSSO\
3ULQWHUHOHFWURQLFV
0DVWHU/DE 2SWLFDOV\VWHP
0DVWHU/DE
6HUYLFH0DQXDO 0HDVXULQJV\VWHP
)LOPSDWK
3DSHUSDWK
)LOPSURFHVVRU
3DSHUSURFHVVRUDQG$76
:HWSDUWHOHFWURQLFV
2SWLRQV
98.22.56 %LEOLRJUDSK\JORVVDU\DQGLQGH[
Edition 3
This document contains information proprietary to GRETAG IMAGING AG, and may be used solely
for the purpose of operating and maintaining the equipment for which it is provided.
© 2000 by GREATG IMAGING AG, CH—8105 Regensdorf, Switzerland all rights reserved.
Reproduction of this manual in any form, in whole or in part, without written permission, is prohibited
by law.
Printed in Switzerland
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
98.22.56 Edition 3
(TXLSPHQW'HVFULSWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ

1.1.1 About this documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.1.2 Conventions used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6DIHW\LQIRUPDWLRQ
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Symbols used on or inside the machine and in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Symbols on transport boxes, crates and other packing material . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.2 Safe handling of photographic chemicals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.3 Sealed screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
(TXLSPHQWRYHUYLHZ

1.3.1 The Master Lab+ family of products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Master Lab+ 520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Master Lab+ 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Master Lab+120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Master Lab+ 340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Master Lab+ 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Master Lab+ 740 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Master Lab+ 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Master Lab+ 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Film processor side (ML+ 320, ML+ 340, ML+ 520 and ML+ 740) . . . . . . . . 26
Film processor side (ML+ 120, ML+ 140, ML+ 220 and ML+ 240) . . . . . . . . 26
Front view: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Paper processor side (ML+ 320, ML+ 340, ML+ 520 and ML+ 740) . . . . . . . 27
Paper processor side (ML+ 120, ML+ 140, ML+ 220 and ML+ 240) . . . . . . . 28
Master Lab / Master Lab+
1.3.3 Labels on the Master Lab+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.3.4 Safety and operating overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7HFKQLFDOVSHFLILFDWLRQV
1.4.1 Master Lab+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.4.2 Printer part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.4.3 Wet part, film processor (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.4.4 Wet part, paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Service Manual 1
6KLSSLQJNLW
1.5.1 Printer part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5.2 Wet part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
98.22.56 Edition 3
$YDLODEOHRSWLRQV
Film cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Remote control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Passport and wallet lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
External replenishment console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Line printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Greeting card attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Various conversion kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
,QVWDOODWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
3UH,QVWDOODWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWV
2.2.1 Floor space requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.2 Room height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.3 Floor load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.4 Site illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.5 Room temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.6 Air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.7 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.8 Room aeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.2.9 Mains socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
8QSDFNLQJWKH0DVWHU/DE
2.3.1 Checking for shipping damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.3.2 Transport to installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.3 Tools required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2.3.4 Unpacking the Master Lab+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
,QVWDOODWLRQ

2.4.1 Film processor tanks (not valid for ML+120 to ML+240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.4.2 Filling the paper processor tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4.3 Mechanical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.4 Voltage setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4.5 Mains cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2.4.6 Preparing the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2 Service Manual
2.4.7 Connecting the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Voltage / current ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
&KHFNLQJWKHV\VWHP

98.22.56 Edition 3
2.5.1 Check the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2.5.2 Check the film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.5.3 Checking the paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.5.4 Concluding checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.5.5 Setting the wake-up times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.5.6 Setting time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.5.7 Master setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.5.8 Saving the data of the initial setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6HUYLFHPHQX
7KHV\VWHP
0DLQWHQDQFH0HQXIRUWKH3ULQWHU

3.2.1 Maintenance menu for the paper processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.2.2 Maintenance menu for the film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.2.3 Maintenance menu for the other system parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.2.4 Maintenance menu for optical index printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.2.5 Maintenance menu for Customizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.2.6 Debug menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.2.7 Maintenance functions on the ALMLPLUS board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3UHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
6WDQGDUGSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
*HQHUDO3URFHGXUHV
3ULQWHUSDUW

4.3.1 Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.3.2 Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.3.3 Paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Service Manual 3
:HWSDUW
4.4.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.4.2 Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
98.22.56 Edition 3
4.4.3 Paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.4.4 Concluding procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3RZHUVXSSO\
2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ
3RZHUVXSSO\ZHWSDUW

5.2.1 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.2.2 Backup batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.2.3 Fuses in the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Old version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
New version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
3RZHUVXSSO\SULQWHUSDUW

5.3.1 Electronic power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.2 Lamp power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.3 34V Terminal regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.3.4 Fuses in the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rack with old PODIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rack with new PODIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fuse board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.5 Indicators in the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6HUYLFLQJ

5.4.1 Wet part power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.4.2 Checking the backup batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.4.3 Printer part power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

5.4.4 Electronic power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.4.5 Supply for the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6FKHPDWLFV

5.5.1 Wet part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.5.2 Printer part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4 Service Manual
3ULQWHUHOHFWURQLFV
2YHUYLHZ

98.22.56 Edition 3
0DLQSURFHVVRUERDUG&38

6.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.2.2 The processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.2.3 Reset circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.2.4 Code memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.5 Data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.6 Backup supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.7 Serial communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.2.8 Parallel interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.2.9 A/D Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.2.10 Memory card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2.11 General purpose input port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2.12 General purpose output port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2.13 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2.14 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&38ERDUG
/LVWRI',3VZLWFKHVDQGMXPSHUV

6.4.1 Software version below 3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.4.2 Software version 3.0 and higher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3LQDVVLJQPHQWRQSRZHUVXSSO\SOXJ-
&RQWURO%RDUG&%2DQG&%2

6.6.1 Overview CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.6.2 Overview CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.6.3 Block diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.6.4 Fuses on CBO and CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fuses on CBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fuses on the CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.6.5 Indicators on the CBO and the CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Service Manual 5
.H\ERDUG
6.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.7.2 Special connection of keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
98.22.56 Edition 3
6.7.3 Special key combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.7.4 Block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.7.5 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.7.6 LED’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.7.7 Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
0HPRU\FDUG

6.8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.8.2 Restoring data from the memory card.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Restoring a film channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Restoring all data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
$GMXVWPHQWVUHSODFHPHQWV

6.9.1 Adjustments on the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.9.2 Replacing the CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.9.3 Replacing the backup battery on the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.9.4 Clearing the RAM’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.9.5 Adjusting the CBO / CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.9.6 Replacing the CBO / CBO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.9.7 Contrast adjustment for the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.9.8 Replacing the backup battery in the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6FKHPDWLFV
2SWLFDOV\VWHP

7.1.1 Lamp house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

7.1.2 Filter wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.1.3 Block diagram and timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.1.4 Light attenuator, testfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.1.5 Light shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.1.6 Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.1.7 Lens turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.1.8 Lens code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.1.9 Calculation of focal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.1.10 Zoom drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6 Service Manual
5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWV
7.2.1 Replacing the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.2.2 Adjusting the lamp voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
98.22.56 Edition 3
7.2.3 Adjusting filter wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

7.2.4 Adjusting the lens turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7.2.5 Lens code reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7.2.6 Zoom lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Preparing the focus adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adjusting with grain finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adjusting without grain finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.2.7 Setting the home position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.2.8 Focusing a fixed-focus lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.2.9 Adjusting the optical axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.2.10 Automatic Densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6FKHPDWLFV
0HDVXULQJV\VWHP

8.1.1 Optic box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.1.2 Measuring box with measuring board (scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.1.3 Film positioning and DX-Code detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.1.4 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.1.5 Measuring board (MESY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5HSODFLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
&KHFNLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP

8.3.1 135 film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.3.2 120 film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6FDQQHUFDOLEUDWLRQIRUVWDWXVµ0¶

8.4.1 Special tools required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.4.2 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6HWWLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ

8.5.1 Reason . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.5.2 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6FKHPDWLFV
Service Manual 7
)LOPSDWK
98.22.56 Edition 3
9.1.1 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.1.2 Positioning diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.1.3 Viewing position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.1.4 Scanning position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.1.5 Exposure position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
)LOPGHFNFRGLQJ
%ORFNGLDJUDPVRIILOPGHFNV

9.3.1 Automatic 135 film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.3.2 Automatic 135 film deck for Fuji code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.3.3 Automatic 110 film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.3.4 Universal film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7KHDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFNV

9.4.1 135 film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9.4.2 110 film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7KHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN

9.5.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.5.2 Inserts coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
&KHFNVDGMXVWPHQWVIRUDQGILOPGHFNV

9.6.1 Checking and positioning the DX-Code diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.6.2 Adjusting exposure / viewing position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.6.3 Adjusting the pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9.6.4 Adjusting the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
$GMXVWPHQWVRQWKHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN

9.7.1 Adjusting home position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

9.7.2 Adjusting the exposure position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
/LVWRIVFKHPDWLFV
8 Service Manual
3DSHUSDWK

98.22.56 Edition 3
10.1.1 Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

10.1.2 Paper extractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.1.3 Knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
10.1.4 Backprinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.1.5 Paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.1.6 Feeder / Panorama feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
10.1.7 Distributor (ML X40 models only!) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
10.1.8 Timing diagrams of paper path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6HQVRURYHUYLHZ
5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWVDQGFKHFNV

10.3.1 Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.3.2 Coding the paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
10.3.3 Adjusting the paper cassette to different paper widths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
10.3.4 Checking the sensors of the paper extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.3.5 Removing the paper extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.3.6 Checking the knife function and its sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.3.7 Replacing the lower knife blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
10.3.8 Replacing the rolling knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.3.9 Removing the paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.3.10 Adjusting the tension of the transport belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
10.3.11 Adjusting the sidewise paper position (Y-axis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
10.3.12 Adjusting the longitudinal paper position (X-axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.3.13 Changing the type of feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.3.14 Adjusting the sensors in the panorama feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.3.15 Checking the sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
10.3.16 Manually moving the feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

10.3.17 Removing the distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.3.18 Checking the distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Checking the light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Mechanical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6FKHPDWLFV
Service Manual 9
)LOPSURFHVVRU
98.22.56 Edition 3
11.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
+HDWLQJV\VWHP

11.2.1 Film processor heating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11.2.2 Temperature / level sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
11.2.3 Dryer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
11.2.4 Heating management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP

11.3.1 Flow sensor / vacuum sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11.3.2 Replenishment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP

11.4.1 Recirculation management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP

11.5.1 Principle of speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Block diagram of speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
11.5.2 Motor energizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
)LOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ

11.6.1 M805 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Old version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
New version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5DFNV

11.8.1 Heating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Manually switching the heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Viewing the temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Checking / calibrating the tank temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Calibrating the dryer temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Changing the temperature setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Checking temperature sensors / level sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Replacing a temperature / level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10 Service Manual
11.8.2 Replenishment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Manually switching the replenishment pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Checking the replenishment rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing the replenishment rate for all chemistries together . . . . . . . . . . . 256
98.22.56 Edition 3
Changing the replenishment rate for one tank only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Replacing a bellow of the replenishment pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
11.8.3 Transport system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Manually switching the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Checking the belt tension of the transport motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Removing the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Installing and aligning the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing the transport speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
11.8.4 Film loading station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Removing the film loading station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Replacing the knife. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Replacing the rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Replacing the sensor boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
11.8.5 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Racks in the processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Dryer rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Opening a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Reassembling a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Aligning the gears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
6FKHPDWLFV
3DSHUSURFHVVRUDQG$76

12.1.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
+HDWLQJV\VWHP

12.2.1 Paper processor heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

12.2.2 Temperature and level sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12.2.3 Dryer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
12.2.4 Heating management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP

12.3.1 Flow sensor / vacuum sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
12.3.2 Replenishment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP

12.4.1 Recirculation management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Service Manual 11
$XWRPDWLFWRSRIIV\VWHP
12.5.1 Automatic top-off management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
12.5.2 Water quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
98.22.56 Edition 3
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP
12.6.1 Principle of speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Block diagram of speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
12.6.2 Motor energizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5DFNV
6RUWHU
5HSODFHPHQWVDQGDGMXVWPHQWV

12.9.1 Heating system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Manually switching the heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Viewing the temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Checking / calibrating the tank temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Calibrating the dryer temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing the setting of the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Checking temperature sensor / level sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Replacing the temperature / level sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
12.9.2 Replenishment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Manually switching the replenishment pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Checking the replenishment rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Changing the replenishing rate for all chemistries together . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Changing the replenishing rate for one tank only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Replacing a bellow of the replenishment pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.9.3 Transport system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Manually switching the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Checking / adjusing the belt tension of the transport motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Removing the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Installing and aligning the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Changing the transport speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.9.4 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Racks in the processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Dryer rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Opening a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Reassembling the rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
12.9.5 Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Checking the belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
6FKHPDWLFV
12 Service Manual
:HWSDUWFRPSXWHUV\VWHP
2YHUYLHZ

98.22.56 Edition 3
0&%ERDUG

13.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
13.2.2 Functional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Code memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Backup supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Analog to digital converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Timers interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Power and reset logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
13.2.3 Rotary switch positions and jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Rotary switch positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
13.2.4 Test points and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
0ERDUG

13.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Input circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Solenoid drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Heater drivers (220Vac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Motor drivers (220Vac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Transport motor driver (24V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13.3.3 Fuses on the M802 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
13.3.4 Indicators on the M802 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
0ERDUG

13.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Input circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sorter driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Heater drivers (220Vac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Motor drivers (220Vac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Printer supply (220Vac) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Transport motor driver (24V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
13.4.3 Fuses on the M803 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
13.4.4 Indicators on the M803 board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Service Manual 13
$/0/3/86ERDUG
13.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
13.5.2 Pump driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
98.22.56 Edition 3
13.5.3 Fuses on the ALMLPLUS board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13.5.4 Indicators on the ALMLPLUS board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
6&6%ERDUG
$FFHVVLQJ$GMXVWLQJUHSODFLQJWKHZHWSDUWHOHFWURQLFERDUGV

13.7.1 The MCB, M802, M803, RCB or ALMLPLUS boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
13.7.2 Replacing the battery on the MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
13.7.3 The SCSB board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6FKHPDWLFV
2SWLRQV
&XVWRPL]HU
)LOPFOHDQHU

14.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
14.2.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
5HPRWHFRQWUROLQWHUIDFH

14.3.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
14.3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Master Lab+ directly connected to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Master Lab+ connection via modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
5HSOHQLVKPHQWFRQVROH

14.4.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
14.4.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
/LQHSULQWHU

14.5.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
14.5.2 Setting up the line printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
DIP switch DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
DIP switch DS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Recommended switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
14 Service Manual
14.5.3 Setting the serial / parallel converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
DIP switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Jumpers (DTE selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
14.5.4 Connection cable line printer - Master Lab/Master Lab+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
98.22.56 Edition 3
3DVVSRUWOHQV:DOOHWOHQV

14.6.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
14.6.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
14.6.3 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Aligning the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Centering the prints on the paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
*UHHWLQJFDUGDWWDFKPHQW

14.7.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
14.7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
&RQYHUVLRQDQGXSJUDGHNLWV

14.8.1 Enlargement kit E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
14.8.2 Speedup kit I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.8.3 Speedup kit II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.8.4 Digital upkit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.8.5 Film processor upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
14.8.6 Upgrading the processor to KODAK - SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

14.8.7 Automatic Densitometer (ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
14.8.8 Lamp house upgrade kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
14.8.9 APS / Index kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
.LWGHVFULSWLRQV
Service Manual 15
%LEOLRJUDSK\JORVVDU\DQGLQGH[
%LEOLRJUDSK\
98.22.56 Edition 3
*ORVVDU\
,QGH[
16 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
(TXLSPHQW'HVFULSWLRQ 1
7KHLQVWUXFWLRQVJLYHQLQWKLVPDQXDODUHPHDQWWRKHOSVHUYLFHHQJLQHHUV
WRGRUHSDLUDQGPDLQWDLQWKH0DVWHU/DEWRHQDEOHLWWRSHUIRUPWRLWV
RSWLPXPSHUIRUPDQFH
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This manual is part of the service training and given to trained service engineers
only!
1RWH 'HWDLOHGLQIRUPDWLRQRQGDLO\ZHHNO\DQGPRQWKO\PDLQWHQDQFH
SURFHGXUHVDUHSURYLGHGLQWKH2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDODQGWKH6HWXS
0DQXDO
Please read and observe the safety rules provided later in this chapter.
$ERXWWKLVGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
Please read the following hints carefully; they will help you to use this manual
efficiently.
This manual enables you to carry out adjustments and service procedures. Fur-
thermore, this manual contains the Master Lab+ specifications and information
about available options.
It is assumed, that you are familiar with Master Lab+ operation. You should at
least be able to master all procedures outlined in the Operating Manual.
Service Manual 17
Equipment Description
The Master Lab+ documentation includes four manuals:

o Operating Manual
o Operating Manual Program 3 SETUP (further called Setup Manual)
o Service Manual (the manual your are reading now)
98.22.56 Edition 3
o Spare parts list
This separating support easy access to the required information and avoids
dealing with large volumes.
For detailed information about the content of each manual, please refer to the
respective table of contents.
&RQYHQWLRQVXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDO
&RQYHQWLRQV The following convention apply throughout this manual:
q Actions to be carried out are proceeded by a number indicating the step of

the work.
q All key designations are bracketed and printed in boldface e.g. 25'(5!
q All softkeys (keys with different meanings depending on the menu) are
printed in boldface e.g. 3352&
6DIHW\LQIRUPDWLRQ
)RU\RXUVDIHW\ Please observe the following rules for safe operation of the Master Lab+:
q The Master Lab+ may only be operated, maintained and serviced by

sufficiently qualified persons who are familiar with the machine.
q In case there should still be any questions after reading this manual, please
contact your local GRETAG IMAGING distributor, they will be glad to help
you.
q Observe all relevant local, national and/or international safety regulations

regarding the handling of electric/electronic equipment and chemicals.
(QYLURQPHQWDO q Always FROOHFWFKHPLFDOVLQVDIHFRQWDLQHUV and dispose of according to

JXLGHOLQHV the instructions of the manufacturer of chemicals and legal environmental
guidelines and procedures.
q 1HYHUHYHUGLVSRVHRIFKHPLFDOVLQWRDQ\VHZDJHV\VWHPVXFKDVWRL
OHWWHVHWF
q Keep new and used chemicals out of the reach of unauthorized persons.
Store chemicals in a lockable room.
18 Service Manual
q Always wear protective cloth (gloves, goggles, apron) when handling

chemicals.
q Ask the supplier of the chemicals for the relevant MSDS (0aterial 6afety
98.22.56 Edition 3
'ata 6heet) explaining the characteristics, possible risks under defined

conditions, protection and first aid measures.
q Avoid any contact with skin and eyes. Remove spilt chemicals by rinsing
thoroughly with water. Avoid inhaling chemical vapors. If necessary contact
your local doctor in due courses.
q The Master Lab+ must be connected to a ground socket. Do not disable

protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding. Inter-
ruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the machine, or discon-
necting protective earthing can endanger your live!
q Do not open the Master Lab+ while an order is processed.
q Trip the power switch on the right hand side of the Master Lab+ to switch
off the unit before you open any covers.
saml01001a
POWER
AT S
q Never carry out any working steps if you are uncertain about the effect. If in
doubt, consult your local GRETAG representative
Service Manual 19
6\PEROVXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDORQO\
98.22.56 Edition 3
:$51,1*
If instructions marked with this sign are not carried out correctly, mal-
function of the machine may result or personnel may be hurt.
/,9(3$576
This sign is used in the manual only! Always switch off the machine
before working on electrical parts. Not following the instruction endan-
gers your life!
+($9<3$576
This sign is used in the manual only. It indicates that you are handling
a heavy part. If you are not careful you may hurt your back!
',6326(2)%$77(5,(63523(5/<
Batteries should be exchanged by trained specialists only. Used bat-
teries must be disposed of properly in accordance with the local reg-
ulations for the protection of the environment. They should be treated
as special refuse and must not just be thrown into wastepaper baskets
or dust bins.
6\PEROVXVHGRQRULQVLGHWKHPDFKLQHDQGLQWKLVPDQXDO
/,9(3$576,16,'(
Always switch off the machine before opening or removing a cover!
+($7
Wait until the part marked with the heat sign has cooled down other
wise you may burn your fingers!
(/(&75267$7,&',6&+$5*(
Don’t touch such parts with bare fingers or ungrounded tools! Electro-
static discharges can destroy delicate electronic circuits or compo-

nents!
527$7,1*3$576
Wait until all rotating parts (fan, motor, etc.) stops turning otherwise
injury on your fingers may result!
:($53527(&7,9(*/29(6
Whenever you work with chemicals, wear protective gloves. Also,
wear soft gloves, when cleaning or replacing mirrors, lenses, and
color filters, in order not to scratch them!
20 Service Manual
:($5*2**/(6
Whenever you work with chemistry, wear goggles. Splashes in your
eyes must be washed out immediately with water!
Immediately get medical advice!
98.22.56 Edition 3
.((3+$1'62))
Be careful not to hurt your hands when you close a part (e.g. a heavy
lid or cover)
6+$53%/$'(
Take special care when you are working with parts marked with this
C A U T I O N sign. You may get hurt if you disregard this sign!
S H A R P
B L A D E
6\PEROVRQWUDQVSRUWER[HVFUDWHVDQGRWKHUSDFNLQJPDWHULDO
.HHSGU\
Store the equipment in a dry place (storage temperature not lower
than 0° centigrade)!
7KLVVLGHXS
Always place transport boxes such that the arrows point upwards.
Don’t overturn the boxes when transporting, loading, unloading, stor-
ing, packing or unpacking.
)UDJLOH
The transport box contains delicate electronic, mechanical and optical
equipment and must be handled with care. During transport, the box
must not be shaken or dropped!
Service Manual 21
6DIHKDQGOLQJRISKRWRJUDSKLFFKHPLFDOV
98.22.56 Edition 3
:$51,1*
.HHSLQPLQGWKDWWKHFKHPLFDOVXVHGLQWKH0DVWHU/DEIRU
GHYHORSLQJEOHDFKLQJDQGIL[LQJDUHWR[LFVXEVWDQFHVWKDW
PXVWEHKDQGOHGFRUUHFWO\2EVHUYHWKHVDIHW\LQVWUXFWLRQV
SURYLGHGE\WKHVXSSOLHURIWKHFKHPLFDOV6SHFLDODWWHQWLRQ
PXVWEHSDLGWRWKHIROORZLQJSRLQWV
&RUUHFWKDQGOLQJRIVXFKFKHPLFDOV
6DIHW\SUHFDXWLRQVHJSURWHFWLYHJORYHVDSURQJRJ
JOHV
0HDVXUHVWREHWDNHQLIDSHUVRQVSLOOVVXFKFKHPLFDOV
RYHUFORWKHVRUSDUWVRIWKHERG\
6DIHVWRUDJHHJRXWRIUHDFKRIFKLOGUHQQRWWRJHWKHU
ZLWKIRRG
9HQWLODWLRQGLVFKDUJHRIH[KDXVWIXPHV
&RUUHFWGLVSRVDORIFKHPLFDOZDVWHDFFRUGLQJWRWKHUHJX
ODWLRQVFRQFHUQLQJWKHSURWHFWLRQRIWKHHQYLURQPHQW
9(5<,03257$17
,QIRUPSHUVRQQHORISRVVLEOHGDQJHUVLQVWUXFWWKHPWKRU
RXJKO\KRZWRUHDFWLQFDVHVRPHWKLQJRFFXUV$OZD\VNHHS
WKHVXSSOLHU¶VDFFRPSDQ\LQJGRFXPHQWDWLRQKDQG\
6HDOHGVFUHZV
,03257$17
&HUWDLQVFUHZVDUHVHDOHGZLWK&2/25('ODFTXHU8VXDOO\WKHVH
VFUHZVVHUYHIRUPHFKDQLFDORUHOHFWULFDODGMXVWPHQWRUFDOLEUDWLRQ
7KH\ZHUHVHWFRUUHFWO\DWWKHIDFWRU\DQG0867127%(/226(1('
816&5(:('RURWKHUZLVH$'-867(',17+(),(/'
,I\RXIDLOWRREVHUYHWKLVZDUQLQJPLVDGMXVWPHQWPDOIXQFWLRQRUORVV
RITXDOLW\PD\UHVXOW
22 Service Manual
(TXLSPHQWRYHUYLHZ
$ERXWWKH0/IDPLO\ The Master Lab+ processes all standard film and paper sizes.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Requiring a floor area of less than one square meter (80 x 120cm, approx.
10.8sq.ft.) the Master Lab+ housing incorporates the wet part and the printer
part.
The wet part comprises of film and paper developing units together with the cor-
responding dryers and the sorter on the paper side. The wet part is an indepen-
dent assembly, i.e. the commands received from the printer will be executed
independently.
The wet part also accommodates the power supply for the whole machine. The
printer part is powered from the wet part.
The printer part consists of paper extracting, knife to cut the paper, backprinter
(option), paper deck, film deck, lens, lamp house and control panel. The whole
machine is controlled via the printer part, i.e. printing, setup and triggering spe-
cial functions in operation or in service mode.
7KH0DVWHU/DEIDPLO\RISURGXFWV
The Master Lab+ family comprises the eight models:

o Master Lab+ 120
o Master Lab+ 320
o Master Lab+ 140
o Master Lab+ 340
o Master Lab+ 520
o Master Lab+ 740
o Master Lab+ 220
o Master Lab+ 240
The basic layout is the same for all machines. However, they differ in that single
assemblies will be added or omitted.
0DVWHU/DE
The Master Lab+ 520 is a basic model of the family.
Film processor
Film sizes 110,126,135,120 and APS
Capacity 21 film per hour (based on 135 film with 24 exposures)
Paper processor
Paper width 3.5” to 8.25”
Capacity 200 Prints per hour (based on 10 x 15cm /4” x 6” prints)
All interchangeable parts of the printer part, such as film deck, paper cassette,
light shaft and lenses provided are coded. Upon installation of the film deck and
Service Manual 23
the paper cassette the format is defined and the computer checks whether the
remaining parts of the configuration are correct.
0DVWHU/DE
98.22.56 Edition 3
The Master Lab+ 320 provides the same layout as the Master Lab+ 520.
It uses an automatic film deck and handles 135 film and 4” paper only! Only one
film size and one paper size will be handled. Therefore the lens is fixed part of
the machine and cannot be interchanged. The lens has no code.
The capacities are the same as for the Master Lab+ 520.
0DVWHU/DE
It has no film processor, instead it has larger replenishment and recovery tanks
installed.
It uses an automatic film deck and handles 135 film and 4” paper only! Only one
film size and one paper size will be handled. Therefore the lens is fixed part of
the machine and cannot be interchanged. The lens has no code.
0DVWHU/DE
The Master Lab+ 340 provides the same layout as the Master Lab+ 320 but has
twice the processing capacity.
To achieve this capacity it features a shutter and a paper distributor.
The paper distributor feeds two tracks in the paper processor. The shutter is
used to protect the previously exposed print on the paper deck whilst the scan-
ner measures the next frame. The paper sorter collects the prints from both
paper tracks and separates consecutive orders.
Paper processor
Paper width 3.5” to 8.25”

Capacity 400 Prints per hour (based on 10 x 15cm /4” x 6” prints)
0DVWHU/DE
It has no film processor.
24 Service Manual
To achieve this capacity it features a shutter and a paper distributor.
0DVWHU/DE
98.22.56 Edition 3
The Master Lab+ 740 features all the possibilities of the Master Lab+ 520 and
the Master Lab+ 340.
It handles all film sizes and paper widths of the Master Lab+ 520 but has twice
the processing capacity.
0DVWHU/DE
It has no film processor, instead it has larger replenishment and recovery tanks
installed.
0DVWHU/DE
The Master Lab+ 240 provides the same layout as the Master Lab+ 220 but has
twice the processing capacity.
Service Manual 25
2YHUYLHZ
)LOPSURFHVVRUVLGH0/0/0/DQG0/
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml01002a
1
3
7
6
5
4
1 Printer 4 Replenishment tanks for film proces-

sor
2 Film dryer 5 Overflow tanks for film processor
3 Film outlet station 6 Printer control system
7 Automatic Densitometer (ADM)
)LOPSURFHVVRUVLGH0/0/0/DQG0/
saml01003a
1
3
7
6
5
4
1 Printer 4 Overflow tanks for paper processor

2 Cover 5 Replenishment tanks for paper processor
3 Print stacker 6 Printer control system
7 Automatic Densitometer (ADM)
26 Service Manual
)URQWYLHZ
0/0/0/DQG 0/0/0/DQG
0/ 0/
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml01004a saml01005a
13 13
14 14
15
13 Exhaust connection
14 Wet part control system
15 Bleach air pump
3DSHUSURFHVVRUVLGH0/0/0/DQG0/
saml01006a
14
15
21
19
16
18 17
20
14 Paper dryer 19 Connector for peripherals:

15 Print stacker o Densitometer (D188/D19C)
16 Overflow tanks for paper proces- o Modem
sor
17 Repl. tanks for paper processor o Line printer
18 Mains socket o Aux 1, Aux 2
20 Lost liquid sensor
21 Water tank for autom. top-off system
Service Manual 27
3DSHUSURFHVVRUVLGH0/0/0/DQG0/
saml01007a
14
98.22.56 Edition 3
15
21
19
18
20
14 Paper dryer 19 Connector for peripherals:

o Densitometer (D188)
o Modem
o Line printer
o Aux 1, Aux 2
15 Print stacker 20 Lost liquid sensor
18 Mains socket 21 Water tank for autom. top-off system
/DEHOVRQWKH0DVWHU/DE
All together are five labels in a Master Lab+

saml01008a
4
1
2
1 Printer serial number 4 Wet part status label

2 Printer status label 5 Master Lab+ serial number
3 Wet part serial number
28 Service Manual
q One label contains the machine serial number which is the main number
q Two labels contain the serial numbers of the printer part and the wet part.
These are the serial numbers of the subunits.
98.22.56 Edition 3
q Two labels are service status labels. One for the printer part and one for the
wet part. The status labels contain a number field with the numbers 1 to 50
or 51 to 100.
saml01009a
GRETAG GRETAG SAN MARCO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
The circled or crossed out number on the status label indicates which modifica-
tion has been installed.
When several modifications are installed in the field or in the factory then the cor-
responding numbers are crossed with a line and the last number is circled.
For any modification done in the field you must circle the number mentioned in
the description included with the modification.
,03257$17
,WLVYHU\LPSRUWDQWWKDW\RXFLUFOHWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJQXPEHUEHFDXVH
WKLVLVWKHRQO\ZD\WRILQGRXWZKLFKPRGLILFDWLRQVKDYHEHHQLQVWDOOHG
,WDOVRWHOOVDQ\WHFKQLFLDQLIWKHPDFKLQHLVXSWRGDWHZLWKPRGLILFDWLRQV
RULIWKHUHLVDQ\RQHPLVVLQJWKDWQHHGVWREHLQVWDOOHG
Service Manual 29
6DIHW\DQGRSHUDWLQJRYHUYLHZ
saml01010a
98.22.56 Edition 3
9, 10
Film processor Paper processor

side view side view
17
6, 7, 8
20 21 13 14, 15, 16 11
12 1
Top view 19 Front view
18
2, 3, 4, 5
17
1 Exhaust tube connector 12 Paper dryer cover locking screw

2 Main electric box 13 Master Lab+ serial number
3 Mains transformer 14 Manufacturer model number

4 Voltage selector (XT) 15 Status label of wet part
5 Terminal block (X2) 16 Electrical rating marking
6 Mains inlet 17 Film cutting knife blade
7 Mains cable terminal (X3) 18 Safety switch, paper processor
8 Line filter 19 Safety switch, film processor
9 Voltage setup instruction 20 Indicator “Power on”
10 Label of factory voltage setup 21 Mains switch
11 Protective earthing terminal
30 Service Manual
7HFKQLFDOVSHFLILFDWLRQV
0DVWHU/DEV\VWHP
98.22.56 Edition 3
Dimension system Width 780mm (2.56ft.)

Length 1226mm (4.02ft.)
Height 1700mm (5.6ft.)
packed Width 1070mm (3.5ft.)
Length 1400mm (4.6ft.)
Height 1960mm (6.4ft.)
System footprint 1m2 (78 x 123cm)
10.3sq.ft. (2.56 x 4.02ft.)
Weights ML+ 320 320kg / 393kg

(dry / operational) ML+ 340 328kg / 401kg
ML+ 520 326kg / 399kg
ML+ 740 334kg / 407kg
ML+ 220 280kg / 345kg
ML+ 240 288kg / 353kg
ML+ 120 274kg / 339kg
ML+ 140 282kg / 347kg
Mains voltage 1 phase 200/208/220/230/240Vac

+/- 10%, 50/60Hz
3 phase 220Vac +/- 10%, 50/60Hz
3 phase 380Vac +/- 10%, 50/60Hz
Power consumption ML+ 320 - 740 max. 3300VA; average: 2450VA

ML+ 120 - 240 max. 2800VA; average: 2000VA
Stray power ML+ 320 - 740 max. 7700kJ; average: 5800kJ

ML+ 120 - 240 max. 6000kJ
Ambient conditions
Temperature operational +15o C to +30o C
non-operational -25o C to +60o C
Humidity operational 30% to 75% (not condensing)

non-operational 10% to 90% (not condensing)
Ambient light max. 1000 Lux
Noise level operational max. 70dB(A)

standby max. 60dB(A)
Exhaust tube length max. 2.5m (8.2ft.)

diameter 50mm (1.97”)
Exhaust fan air flow rate 1.6m3 / min1)
,WLVDEVROXWHO\QHFHVVDU\WKDWWKHYDSRUVIURPWKHFKHPLFDOVDUH
OHGWRWKHRXWVLGHRIWKHURRP)RUGHWDLOVVHHFKDSWHU
Service Manual 31
3ULQWHUSDUW
Negative formats ML+ 320 / 340 135 only
98.22.56 Edition 3
ML+ 520 / 740 135, 110, 126, 120, 220, Disc, APS
ML+ 220 / 240 135, 110, 126, 120, 220, Disc, APS
ML+ 120 / 140 135 only
Paper size ML+ 320 / 340 4” only

ML+ 520 / 740 3.5”, 4”, 5”, 6”, 7”, 8”, 8.25”
ML+ 220 / 240 3.5”, 4”, 5”, 6”, 7”, 8”, 8.25”
ML+ 120 / 140 4” only
Print size ML+ 320 / 340 4” x 6” only

ML+ 520 / 740 3.5” x 3.5” to 8.25” x 12”
Panorama. Passport
ML+ 220 / 240 3.5” x 3.5” to 8.25” x 12”
Panorama. Passport
ML+ 120 / 140 4” x 6” only
Capacity ML+ 320 / 120 200 (4”)

(prints / hour) ML+ 340 / 140 400 (4”)
ML+ 520 / 220 225 (3.5”), 200 (4”), 160 (5”), 100 (8”)
ML+ 740 / 240 450 (3.5”), 400 (4”), 160 (5”), 100 (8”)
Paper loading Daylight cassette for 175m paper rolls

Automatic paper loading
Film transport 135 Automatic with DX-Code reader

110 Automatic
126 Manual
120 / 220 Manual
Disc Semi automatic
APS Automatic with DX-Code and MOF reader
Light system Halogen lamp 24V / 250W

Additive filter system
Lens system ML+ 120 / 140 Fix lens

ML+ 320 / 340 Fix lens

ML+ 520 / 740 Zoom lens (motor driven), single lenses
optional
ML+ 220 / 240 Zoom lens (motor driven), single lenses
optional
Measuring system True color scanner

Approx. 96 pixels x 3 colors (135 FF)
Serial interface for Densitometer (D188/D19C)

Line printer
Modem
Auxiliary 1, 2
Data backup Memory card (RAM-card) 32kBytes
32 Service Manual
:HWSDUWILOPSURFHVVRULIDSSOLFDEOH
Chemical process C-41 RANP

98.22.56 Edition 3
Transport system Short leader (by leader cards)
Film formats 110, 126, 135, 120, 220, APS
Processing time (dry to dry) 8 minutes 40 seconds (135 film, 24 exposures)
Processing speed 478mm / minute
Processing capacity 21 films / hour (135 film, 24 exposures)
Replenishment system Automatic, from integrated tanks

(external tanks optional)
Evaporation compensation Automatic, from integrated water tank
Capacity of working tanks DEV 11.84 L

(racks installed) BL 2.60 L
FIX 1 2.69 L
FIX 2 2.58 L
STAB 1 2.70 L
STAB 2 2.58 L
Capacity of replenishment tanks DEV 1.95 L

BL 0.45 L
FIX 2.77 L
STAB 3.36 L
Film capacity of built-in replenish- 80 rolls (135 film, 24 exposures)

ment tanks
Power backup Backup-battery in case of power failure for the film

transport.
Service Manual 33
:HWSDUWSDSHUSURFHVVRU
Chemical process RA-4 NP
98.22.56 Edition 3
Paper loading syst5em Daylight cassette for 175m rolls
automatic paper loading
Paper transport system Single sheet transport
Processing time (dry to dry) 4 minutes 30 seconds
Processing speed 635mm / minute


Evaporation compensation Automatic, from integrated water tank
Capacity of working tanks DEV 5.49 L

(racks installed) BL 5.59 L
STAB 1 4.47 L
STAB 2 4.38 L
STAB 3 4.38 L
Capacity of replenishment and recov-

ery tanks (RA-4)
ML+ 320 to 740 DEV 3.40 L
BL 4.40 L
STAB 7.40 L
ML+ 120 and 240 DEV 13.5 L

BL 13.5 L
STAB 13.5 L
Capacity of replenishment and recov-

ery tanks (PRIME)
ML+ 320 to 740 DEV 4.50 L

BL 3.00 L
STAB 10.0 L
Print capacity of built-in replenish-

ment tanks
ML+ 320 to 740 1700 prints (3.5” x 5”)
ML+ 220 and 240 DEV (print size 3.5” x 5”) 6800 prints
ML+ 120 and 140 BL (print size 3.5” x 5”) 5200 prints
STAB (print size 3.5” x 5”) 3100 prints
Power backup Backup-battery in case of power failure for the

paper transport.
34 Service Manual
6KLSSLQJNLW
The shipping kit is included with every delivered machine. There is a separate
shipping kit for each part:
98.22.56 Edition 3
q one for the printer part
q one for the wet part
It contains all necessary consumables and other helpful items
3ULQWHUSDUW
3DUW 2UGHUQXPEHU 4XDQWLW\

Exposure lamp 24V / 250W 11.61.46 5
Fuse 5A (5 x 20mm) 20.94.12 10
Fuse 2A (5 x 20mm) 11.21.21 10
Hex key 1.5mm 13.55.65 1
Hex key 2.5mm 20.90.45 1
Testfilm 135 film (Kodak Gold 100-6) 34.91.33 1
Memory card 11.62.70 1
1RWH )RUWKHSDUWVOLVWFRQFHUQLQJWKHEDVLFFRQILJXUDWLRQUHIHUWRWKH
SULFHOLVW
Service Manual 35
:HWSDUW
3DUW 2UGHUQXPEHU 4XDQWLW\
98.22.56 Edition 3
Splice tape 00GSM2300 1
Washing bottle 00GSM7555 1
Graduated cylinder, 100ml 0021-101-03 4
Manual film puller 0021-906-84 1
Hose clamp SNP14 0026-480-07 5
Twincheck labels 0028-493-03 1
Fuse 1.25A (5 x 20mm) 0028-758-11 5
Fuse 2A (5 x 20mm) 0028-758-13 5
Fuse 10A (5 x 20mm) 0028-751-27 5
Fuse 1A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-759-75 5
Fuse 25A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-755-42 5
Fuse 2A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-759-78 5
Fuse 2.5A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-759-79 5
Fuse 4A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-759-81 5
Fuse 8A (6.3 x 32mm) 0028-759-85 5
Replenishment filter 0029-100-23 1
Manual tape dispenser 0029-230-09 1
5 lt. container tank 0029-302-11 1
Extension hose 0029-302-12 1
Tube 14 x 19 0034-411-06 1
Film loading cassette 14221-155-0 2
Tools 14991-009-2 1
Hook for cylinder 15160-127-0 4
Splash shield 15410-180-0 1
Developer rack tray 15605-421-1 1
126 film box 15615-075-0 2
110 film box 15615-076-0 2
120 film box 15615-088-0 2
135 film adapter 16245-449-1 2
Seeger 16315-009-0 10
Seeger 16315-017-1 10
Seeger 16315-019-1 10
Seeger 16315-020-0 10
Air filter 16445-137-1 1
Chemical filter 16445-139-0 22
Air filter 16445-517-0 1
Film loading caps 0025-514-02 2
Film leader 16555-211-0 10
Rack tray 16605-051-1 1
Dripping tray 16605-057-2 1
Film preparation station 18582-112-0 1
O-ring kit 18988-460-0 4
Print collector 16615-256-0 1
Film loading 14211-036-0 1
Paper panel 15425-087-4 1
36 Service Manual
$YDLODEOHRSWLRQV
More details about the following options as well as other information concerning
service aspects are found in chapter 14.
98.22.56 Edition 3
)LOPFOHDQHU
Cleans the film with brushes and discharges any electrostatic with ionized air.
This interface plus the corresponding software allows the control of quality via a
modem.
3DVVSRUWDQGZDOOHWOHQV
Allows either four (passport) or two (wallet) prints on the same 3.5” paper.
([WHUQDOUHSOHQLVKPHQWFRQVROH
Provides larger replenishment tanks.
/LQHSULQWHU
Allows certain statistics and calculation data to be printed.
Prints an additional subject to the regular print.
9DULRXVFRQYHUVLRQNLWV
Improving and upgrading the machine, such as
q Enlargement kit E1
q Speed-up kit I
q Speed-up kit II
q Digital upkit
q Film processor upkit
q Automatic densitometer
q Lamp house upkit
q APS / Index kit
q Customizer
Service Manual 37
38
Service Manual
Master Lab / Master Lab+ 98.22.56 Edition 3

98.22.56 Edition 3
,QVWDOODWLRQ 2
,QWURGXFWLRQ
,03257$17
,QVWDOODWLRQRID0DVWHU/DEVKRXOGRQO\EHPDGHE\DWUDLQHG
WHFKQLFLDQ
This chapter contains procedures for unpacking and installing a Master Lab+
therefore:
5HDGWKLVFKDSWHUFDUHIXOO\EHIRUHXQSDFNLQJDQGLQVWDOOLQJWKH0DVWHU
/DEWRIDPLOLDUL]H\RXUVHOIZLWKWKHSURFHGXUH
The chapter is organized as follows:
2.2 Pre-Installation requirements
2.3 Unpacking the Master Lab+

2.4 Installation
2.5 Checking the system
Service Manual 39
Installation
3UH,QVWDOODWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWV
)ORRUVSDFHUHTXLUHPHQWV
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml02001a
0..500
Replen. Console
(Optional)
100
1226
800
600 780 745
All measurements in Millimeter
Please note:
)ORRUVSDFH q at least 500mm (approx. 20”) are required at the rear of the machine if the
replenishment tanks are placed behind the machine.
q If there are no external replenishment tanks at the rear of the machine,

leave at least 50mm (approx. 2”) to guarantee sufficient air circulation.
q The 745mm (approx. 29”) on the right-hand side are used to allow the elec-
tronic rack to be drawn out for service purposes.
40 Service Manual
Installation
5RRPKHLJKW
5RRPKHLJKW A minimal room height of 2250mm (7.38ft.) is required to allow the film and/or
paper dryer to be lifted.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml02002a
2250
Repl. Console
(Optional)
All measurements in Millimeter
)ORRUORDG
The floor in the Master Lab+ working area must be capable of supporting at least
410kg/m2.
)ORRUORDG
Max. net weight of the Master Lab+ 355kg (7.82cwt.sh.)
Max. operating weight (with chemistry) 407kg (9cwt.sh.)
3OHDVHQRWH
q 7KHQHWZHLJKWRID0DVWHU/DEZLWKRXWILOPSURFHVVRULVDERXWNJ
VWOLJKWHU
q 7KHRSHUDWLQJZHLJKWRID0DVWHU/DEZLWKRXWDILOPSURFHVVRULV
DERXWNJVWOLJKWHU
6LWHLOOXPLQDWLRQ
Observe the following:
q Keep a constant light intensity. Avoid direct sun light or spot light onto the
operator side.
q Use diffused light from the ceiling such as daylight neon tubes.
q The light intensity in the film deck area should not exceed 1000 Lux.
Service Manual 41
Installation
5RRPWHPSHUDWXUHDQGKXPLGLW\
q Operate the machine at a room temperature between +15o C and +30o C.
98.22.56 Edition 3
q The maximum relative humidity (not condensing) is 75%.
q For the minimum permissible relative air humidity consult the specifications
from the paper manufacturer (about 30%)
$LUFRQGLWLRQLQJ
It is advisable to install a room temperature cooling system. The Master Lab+

produces an average heat of 5800kJ (max. 7700kJ).
([KDXVW
The Master Lab+ is equipped with an exhaust fan. The outlet is near the top right
corner of the machine. The inner diameter of the exhaust tube is 50mm. The air
flow rate of the exhaust is 1.6m3/min.
saml02003a
Exhaust tube
Ø 50mm
:$51,1*
+D]DUGRXVYDSRUV
,WLVDEVROXWHO\QHFHVVDU\WRGLVFKDUJHWKHH[KDXVWYDSRUVWR
WKHRXWVLGH.HHSLQJWKHPLQWKHURRPFDQFDXVHDVHULRXV
KHDOWKKD]DUGDQGOHDGWRFRUURVLRQRIPHWDOOLFSDUWV
42 Service Manual
Installation
q With the built-in fan the maximum length of the additional exhaust tube is
2.5m (2.7yd.)
q For longer tubes an additional external exhaust fan must be installed. It is

98.22.56 Edition 3
the duty of the customer to provide this fan. The capacity must be large
enough to guarantee an air flow rate of 1.6m3/min.
5RRPDHUDWLRQ
Apart from discharging the exhaust vapors to the outside, the room in which the
machine is to be installed, must be sufficiently ventilated to avoid concentrations
of chemical vapors. In addition, please observe the regulation concerning room
aeration given by the chemistry supplier, also see bibliography in chapter 15.1
0DLQVVRFNHW
0DLQV The customer has to provide either a 1-phase or a 3-phase Mains socket (for
details see chapter 2.4.4)
The Mains socket must be installed close to the machine.
The Mains socket must always be easily accessible. During operation, the
access to the Mains socket shall not be obstructed by objects placed in front of
it or by the machine itself.
The Mains socket and its installation have to comply with the local safety stan-
dards and must be capable of carrying the maximum machine current (see tech-
nical specification in chapter 1.4).
The customer has to ensure that the Mains socket has a good and reliable
grounding connection.
&KHFNLQJIRUVKLSSLQJGDPDJHV
,QVXUDQFH GRETAG IMAGING AG takes out a transport insurance when a machine is

shipped. The customer is invoiced for the insurance and transport costs.
,03257$17
&KHFNGHOLYHU\IRUVKLSSLQJGDPDJHV5HSRUWDQ\WUDQVSRUWGDPDJHVWR
*5(7$*,0$*,1*$*RUWKHQHDUHVWUHSUHVHQWDWLYH
'RQRWGLUHFWO\FRQWDFWWKHLQVXUDQFHRUVKLSSLQJFRPSDQ\*5(7$*RU
WKHUHSUHVHQWDWLYHZLOOXQGHUWDNHWKHQHFHVVDU\VWHSV
Service Manual 43
Installation
7UDQVSRUWWRLQVWDOODWLRQVLWH
To transport the packed Master Lab+ close to the installation site, you need a
pallet trolley. The shipping weight is approx. 440kg (9.7cwt.sh.)
98.22.56 Edition 3
7RROVUHTXLUHGIRULQVWDOODWLRQ
1RWH $OOWRROVUHTXLUHGIRUWKHLQVWDOODWLRQRID0DVWHU/DEDUHRIWKH
PHWULFV\VWHP
7RROVUHTXLUHGIRU Most tools required are the standard tools in any Service Technicians tool box.
LQVWDOODWLRQ All special tools required for the installation however are contained in a tool kit
included in the shipment (Tool kit P/N SM 14991-009-1)
o 1 spanner 7mm and 8mm
o 1 screw driver 4mm (No. 2)
o 1 ‘Phillips’ screw driver (No. 1)
o 1 hex key 3mm
o 1 hex key 4mm
To unpack the Master Lab+ follow the given procedure:
saml02004a
Cut the straps that fasten the

cover.
Remove the top cover. Master Lab / Master Lab+
saml02005a
Unscrew the five big fasteners on

the side by hand. In case they are
too tight, use a pair of snipe nose
pliers.
44 Service Manual
Installation
saml02006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the cardboard packing.
Remove the wooden planks behind the machine.
Remove the plastic covering the entire machine.
Remove all the boxes packed on top of the working area.
Check the whole shipment for completeness. A parts list is included in every
shipment showing what parts should have been supplied.
Remove the polystyrene foam block, located under the sorter.
Remove the dripping tray from underneath the machine.
Remove all side panels of the Master Lab+.
saml02007a
Lower the four feet until they rest

on the pallet (use the spanner size
17mm from the tool kit).
saml02008a
Remove the four Z-shaped steel

brackets (the counter nut is for
additional security).
Turn the four feet upward until the machine rests on the four wheels.
Service Manual 45
Installation
saml02009a
Make a ramp by nailing the two
98.22.56 Edition 3
planks provided to the pallet with
two nails each.
&$87,21
7KHPDFKLQHLVYHU\KHDY\&DUHIXOO\JXLGHWKHPDFKLQH
GRZQWKHUDPS
1HYHUWU\WROLIWLWRIIWKHSDOOHW\RXPD\GDPDJH\RXUEDFN
&$87,21
1HYHUSXVKWKHPDFKLQHGRZQZLWKWKHIURQWILUVW<RXZLOO
GDPDJHWKHIURQWSDQHOVXSSRUW
3XVKLWGRZQVLGHZLVHRQO\
saml02010a
Push the machine down the ramp

until it is off the pallet.
Move the Master Lab+ to its final installation place.
Lower the feet until the wheels are off the ground. Is the ground to uneven,
you may have to place small wooden blocks under the feet to achieve the
necessary stability.
46 Service Manual
Installation
,QVWDOODWLRQ
As soon as the Master Lab+ is positioned at its definite place you can start the
actual installation.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Level the Master Lab+. Use a spirit level, place it on the wet part and turn
the feet up- or downward until the machine is leveled.
Place the dripping tray under the machine.
Close all drain taps.
)LOPSURFHVVRUWDQNVQRWYDOLGIRU0/WR0/
If your machine does not have a film processor, skip this chapter and proceed
with the next one.
:$51,1*
:KHQHYHU\RXZRUNZLWKFKHPLFDOVZHDUSURWHFWLYHJORYHV
DQGJRJJOHV
,WLVDOVRDGYLVDEOHWRZHDUDUXEEHUDSURQWRSURWHFW\RXU
FORWKHV
saml02011a
Remove the replenishment tanks

from the film processor.
saml02012a
Open the screw caps of the

replenishment tanks.
Rinse the replenishment tanks with warm water.
Service Manual 47
Installation
&$87,21
:KHQ\RXILOOWKHWDQNVHQVXUHWKDWWKHFKHPLFDOVDQGWKH
98.22.56 Edition 3
WDQNPDWFK2WKHUZLVHFRQWDPLQDWLRQZLOORFFXUZKLFK
PDNHVFKHPLFDOVZRUWKOHVV
Fill the replenishment tanks for the film processor with the corresponding
chemicals. A color dot indicates which chemicals belongs into which
replenishment tank:
o Blue dot = developer
o Red dot = bleach
o Green dot = fixer
o Yellow dot = stabilizer
Close all screw caps so no chemicals are spilled when the tanks are moved.
saml02013a
Reinsert the full replenishment

tanks.
Open the screw caps.
saml02014a
Pull the draw-off unit from the fill-

ing unit.
saml02015a
Insert it into the replenishment

tanks.
48 Service Manual
Installation
&$87,21
:KHQ\RXILOOWKHZRUNLQJWDQNVHQVXUHWKDWWKHFKHPLFDOV
98.22.56 Edition 3
DQGWKHWDQNPDWFK2WKHUZLVHFRQWDPLQDWLRQZLOORFFXU
ZKLFKPDNHVWKHFKHPLFDOVZRUWKOHVV
Fill the working tanks of the film processor with the corresponding chemi-
cals. A color dot indicates which chemicals belongs into which working
tank:
o Red dot = bleach
o Green dot = fixer
Check the working tanks for leaks.
1RWH ,IDOHDNLVGHWHFWHGGUDLQWKHWDQNLPPHGLDWHO\7KHOHDNFDQEH
UHSDLUHGZLWK6&27&+:(/''38VHWKHVWUXFWXUDODGKHVLYH
WRGLUHFWLRQZULWWHQRQWKHSDFNDJH
Ensure that the filling unit of the overflow tanks of the film processor is
pushed down properly.
Fill the top-off tank with water.
)LOOLQJWKHSDSHUSURFHVVRUWDQNV
:$51,1*
:KHQHYHU\RXZRUNZLWKFKHPLFDOVZHDUSURWHFWLYHJORYHV
DQGJRJJOHV
,WLVDOVRDGYLVDEOHWRZHDUDUXEEHUDSURQWRSURWHFW\RXU
FORWKHV
saml02016a
Remove the replenishment tanks

from the paper processor
Service Manual 49
Installation
saml02017a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Open the screw caps of the
replenishment tanks.
Rinse the replenishment tanks with warm water.
&$87,21
:KHQ\RXILOOWKHWDQNVHQVXUHWKDWWKHFKHPLFDOVDQGWKH
WDQNPDWFK2WKHUZLVHFRQWDPLQDWLRQZLOORFFXUZKLFK
PDNHVWKHFKHPLFDOVZRUWKOHVV
Fill the replenishment tanks for the paper processor with the corresponding
chemicals. A color dot indicates which chemicals belongs into which replen-
ishment tank:
o Red dot = bleach / fix
Close all screw caps so no chemicals are spilled when the tanks are moved.
saml02018a
Reinsert the full replenishment

tanks.
Open the screw caps. Master Lab / Master Lab+
saml02019a
Pull the draw-off unit from the fill-

ing unit.
50 Service Manual
Installation
saml02020a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Insert it into the replenishment

tanks.
&$87,21
:KHQ\RXILOOWKHZRUNLQJWDQNVHQVXUHWKDWWKHFKHPLFDOV
DQGWKHWDQNPDWFK2WKHUZLVHFRQWDPLQDWLRQZLOORFFXU
ZKLFKPDNHVWKHFKHPLFDOVZRUWKOHVV
Fill the working tanks of the paper processor with the corresponding chem-
icals. A color dot indicates which chemicals belongs into which working
tank:
o Red dot = bleach
Check the working tanks for leaks.
1RWH ,IDOHDNLVGHWHFWHGGUDLQWKHWDQNLPPHGLDWHO\7KHOHDNFDQEH
UHSDLUHGZLWK6&27&+:(/''38VHWKHVWUXFWXUDODGKHVLYH
WRGLUHFWLRQZULWWHQRQWKHSDFNDJH
Ensure that the filling unit of the overflow tanks of the paper processor is
pushed down properly.
It not already done, fill the top-off tank with water.
0HFKDQLFDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
The mechanical configuration consists of installing and connecting equipments

removed for transport.
saml02021a
Install the fix lens for Master Lab+

320, 340, 120 and 140.
Service Manual 51
Installation
saml02022a
Install the zoom lens for Master
98.22.56 Edition 3
Lab+ 520, 740, 220 and 240.
saml02023a
2 Install the film deck.
1
saml02024a
Install the light shaft.
9ROWDJHVHWXS
,03257$17
7KHVWDQGDUGFRQILJXUDWLRQDVWKHPDFKLQHOHDYHVWKHIDFWRU\DQGLV
VKLSSHGLV9VLQJOHSKDVH
After the Master Lab+ is mechanically prepared, connect the power to the
machine.
There are three possibilities of power connection:

o single phase 230V with protective Ground (200 ... 240V)
o three phase 230V with protective Ground (200 ... 240V)
o three phase 380V with protective Ground (376 ... 415V)
0DLQVFDEOH
Mains cable and mains plug are not provided with the machine as they have to
comply with local regulations. They have to be provided by the customer.
Preparation of the cable has to be made prior to the connection of the machine
to the Mains.
52 Service Manual
Installation
o The type of plug has to comply with local safety standards and has to
be capable of carrying the maximum power required by the machine
(for details see chapter 1 ‘Technical specification’).
o The type of cable has to comply with local safety standards and has to
98.22.56 Edition 3
meet at least the following diameter requirements:

for single phase 230V AWG 14 (2mm2)
for three phase 230V AWG 16 (1mm2)
for tree phase 380V AWG 18 (0.75mm2)
o The isolation of the grounding wire must have the color ‘yellow/green’
or ‘green’ or ‘yellow’.
o The plug should meet the standard for industrial use according
IEC 320.
o In Europe use cables of the type H05RR-F, H05VV-F or H05H2-F
(specifications according VDE 0281, 0282, 0292)
o In USA use cables of the type S, SO, ST or STO (specifications accord-
ing UL-CSA)
3UHSDULQJWKHFDEOH
The power cable has to be prepared as shown before it is thread into the
machine.
saml02025a
min. 60mm (2.4")

≥ 0.5D max. 90mm (3.5")
Cable diameter D
ye 9mm
llo
w
/g
re
en
Strain relief
&RQQHFWLQJWKHFDEOH
'$1*(5
0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHLQFRPLQJFDEOHLV127FRQQHFWHGWRRU
SOXJJHGLQWRWKH0DLQVEHIRUH\RXVWDUWFRQQHFWLQJWKH
ZLUHV
(OHFWULFVKRFNKHDYLO\HQGDQJHUV\RXUOLIHLWPD\HYHQNLOO
\RX
Service Manual 53
Installation
Thread the cable into the machine and through the strain relief.
Tighten the strain relief.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml02026a
Line filter
Connect the incoming cable to the
terminal block X3.
XZ
X3
The connections for the various types of mains supplies are shown in the next
figure.
saml02027a
X 3
200 - 240V /1 Phase -YG- -YG3-
-1- -1- Black

1
-2- -4- Black
2
-3- Black
-3-
3
-2- Black
-4- XZ
4
Phase 1 L1 -173-
-174-
L2
-175-
Mains cable L3
Ph 2/Neutral -176-
MP
Ground -YG-
X 3
200 - 240V/3 Phase ∆ -YG- -YG3-
-1- -1- Black

1
-2- -2- Black
2
-3- -3- Black
3
-4- -4- Black
4
Phase 1 L1 -173-
Phase 2 -174-
L2
Phase 3 -175-
Mains cable L3
-176-
MP
Ground -YG-
X 3
-YG- -YG3-
376 - 415V/3 Phase
-1- -1- Black
1
-2- -2- Black
2
-3- -3- Black
3
-4- -4- Black
4
Phase 1 L1 -173-
Phase 2 -174-
L2
Phase 3 -175-
Mains cable L3
Neutral -176-
MP
Ground -YG-
54 Service Manual
Installation
saml02028a
200-240V/3phase
200-240V 1 Phase 376-415V/3phase
-1-
-4-
-3-
-1-
-4-
-3-
-2-
-2-
98.22.56 Edition 3
L1' L2' N' L3' L1' L2' N' L3'

LOAD LOAD
Z
With three phase 230V or 380V
Z
disconnect the wire bridges

(jumper) on the filter Z.
LINE LINE
L1 L2 N L3 L1 L2 N L3
-176-
-176-
-174-
-174-
-YG-
-YG-
-173-
-173-
-175-
-175-
X = Remove
saml02029a
X2
XT
Transformer
saml02030a
200-240V/3 Phase
200-240V/1Phase
376-415V/3 Phase
With three phase 230V or 380V

171
104
107
171
104
107
you have to connect the bridge

(jumper) on terminal block X2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 between terminal 2 and 3.
106
106
106
106
172 172
Set the bridges (jumpers) on terminal block XT according to the incoming

voltage.
In case of three phase 230V disconnect wire # 172
Service Manual 55
Installation
saml02031a
200-240V/3 Phase ∆ 376-415V/3 Phase

200-240V/1 Phase
109
109
109
108
110
109
109
109
108
110
109
109
109
108
110
98.22.56 Edition 3
172
172 172
103
103
107
107
105
105
103
103
107
107
105
105
103
103
107
107
105
105 saml02032a
220V~ # 1 11
# 103
Check the connection on the auto-

0V transformer for the right voltage.
0V Change if necessary.
200V
208V
220V
230V
240V
9ROWDJHFXUUHQWUDWLQJV
7ULDQJOH 6WDU
9ROWDJH 6LQJOHSKDVH
200V 14A 9.2A

208V 14.2A 9.3A

220V 14.5A 9.5A
230V 14.8A 9.6A
240V 15.2A 9.8A
380V 5.2A
400V 5.3A
415V 5.4A
56 Service Manual
Installation
&KHFNLQJWKHV\VWHP
&KHFNWKH3ULQWHU
98.22.56 Edition 3
Load the first paper cassette with paper.
On the paper cassette, set the magnet code for the paper memory as
required by the customer.
Insert the prepared paper cassette.
saml01001a
POWER
Switch ON the Master Lab+ with

ATS
the main circuit breaker.
saml02033a
Pull out the drawer.
Connect a voltmeter to the 24V backup battery on the right-hand side of the
transformer.
Test the voltage of the battery. The Master Lab+ changes during start-up
from mains supply to battery supply. If the voltage is approx. 27Vdc, the
battery is charged. If the voltage falls rapidly down to 24Vdc under load,
then the Master Lab+ runs on the standby-battery. If the battery voltage
drops below 21V, turn ON the Master Lab+ to charge the battery for at least
one day and test it again. If the test fails, replace the battery.
Check for smooth transport in all racks. If the Master Lab+ is equipped with
a film processor, feed several leader cards through the film processor.
Check all fans for proper operation. Location and direction of air flow are
given in the following drawing.
Service Manual 57
Installation
saml02034a
5 4
98.22.56 Edition 3
1 3
2
1 Pump cooling fan (blows into the machine)

2 Wet part electronic cooling fan (blows into the machine)
3 Printer part electronic fan (blows up into the machine)
4 Exhaust fan (blows fume out of the machine)
5 Lamp cooling fan (blows out of the lamp house)
&KHFNWKHILOPSURFHVVRU
If the Master Lab+ is not equipped with a film processor, simply skip this section
and proceed with the paper processor.
Check that the temperatures in the film processor tanks rise with the following
procedure:
Press &200!.
A softkey menu is displayed
Press the key below )352&.
Press the key below ',63703.

The actual temperatures in the various tanks are displayed.
saml02035a
Check the replenishment rates

with four graduated plastic
cylinders supplied by placing the
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
replenishment tubes into the
90
80
70
90
80
70
90
80
70
90
80
70
cylinders.
60 60 60 60
50 50 50 50
Press &200!. A softkey menu is displayed.
58 Service Manual
Installation
Press the key below 0$15(3/.

The nominal replenishment quantities of the various tanks are displayed.
Press the key below 7(67.

98.22.56 Edition 3
An amount – equal to 20 strokes – is pumped into the cylinders.If the quan-

tity is not correct the first time, repeat the procedure a few more times to
deaerate the tubes. Is the quantity still wrong afterwards, adjust it as
described in the chapter 11.8.2
After the operating temperatures have been reached (about 1 hour after switch-
ing ON) check the temperatures with an accurate mercury or electronic ther-
mometer. The procedure is as follows:
saml02036a
Remove the lid of the film

processor.
saml02037a
Lift the cover of the film dryer
Remove the light shield covering

the tanks.
Press &200!.
A softkey menu is displayed.


The actual temperatures in the various tanks are displayed.
,03257$17
7KHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHIL[HUDQGWKHVWDELOL]HUPXVWEHPHDVXUHGLQWKH
VHFRQGWDQNRIWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJEDWK
Service Manual 59
Installation
saml02038a
Insert an accurate thermometer
vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvvvvvv vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvvvvvv vvvv
vvvv vvv vvv
vvvvvvvv
into the tank right by the tempera-
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvv vvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
ture sensor and compare the mea-
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv vvv vvvv vvv vvv vvv
98.22.56 Edition 3
vvvv vv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv
vvvv vvvv
sured value with the value dis-

played.
If the actual value deviates more than the permissible tolerance from the nomi-
nal value, a recalibration is necessary. Proceed as described in chapter 11.8.1
saml02039a
When the temperature measure-

ment is finished, place the light
shield back over the tanks.
Lower the cover of the film dryer.
saml02040a
Remount the lid of the film

processor.
&KHFNLQJWKHSDSHUSURFHVVRU
Check that the temperatures in the paper processor tanks rise with the following
procedure:
Press &200!.
Press the key below 3352&.

The actual temperatures of the various tanks are displayed.
60 Service Manual
Installation
saml02041a
Check the replenishment rates

98.22.56 Edition 3
with three graduated plastic cylin-

100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
ders supplied by placing the
90 90 90
80
70
80
70
80
70
replenishment tubes into the cylin-
ders.
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
Press &200!.
Press the key below 0$15(3/.

The nominal replenishment quantities of the various tanks are displayed.
Press the key below 7(67.

An amount – equal to 20 strokes – is pumped into the cylinders. If the quan-
tity is not correct the first time, repeat the procedure a few more times to
deaerate the tubes. Is the quantity still wrong afterwards, adjust the quantity
as described in chapter 12.9.2.
After the operating temperatures have been reached (about 1 hour after switch-
ing ON) check the temperatures with an accurate mercury or electronic ther-
mometer. The procedure is as follows:
saml02042a
Remove the lid of the paper pro-

cessor.
saml02043a
Lift the cover of the paper dryer.

Make sure the cover locks on both
sides.
Service Manual 61
Installation
saml02044a
Turn both fasteners on the cross-

over unit left, then lift the unit and
98.22.56 Edition 3
remove it.
saml02045a
Unlock the lower part of the dryer

with the two knurled screws and
tip it up.
Press &200!.
Now press the key below ',63703.

The actual temperatures of the various tanks are displayed.
,03257$17
7KHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHVWDELOL]HUPXVWEHPHDVXUHGLQWKHODVWWDQN
saml02046a
Insert an accurate thermometer
into the tank right by the tempera-
ture sensor and compare the mea-
sured value with the value dis-
saml02046a
played.
If the actual value deviates more than the permissible tolerance from the nomi-
nal value, a recalibration is necessary. Proceed as described in chapter 12.9.1.
saml02047a

ment is finished, lower the lower
part of the dryer and lock it.
62 Service Manual
Installation
saml02048a
Remount the crossover unit and

turn the fasteners right until they
98.22.56 Edition 3
lock.
saml02049a
Lower the cover of the dryer.
saml02050a
Remount the lid of the paper

processor.
&RQFOXGLQJFKHFNV
Check the chemicals of the film processor and the paper processor by
means of control strips. Refer to the ‘Operating Manual Setup’.
Check the code of the reference paper. If necessary, modify it according to

the customer requests, otherwise proceed with step 10.
Press 6(7!.
Enter the password. (default is 3340) and confirm with (17(5!.

Press the key below 35,17(5.
Press the key below 0$67(5.
Press the key below ',5(&7

and change the code for the reference paper.
Confirm with (17(5!.
Press any menu key to exit the present menu
Service Manual 63
Installation
Now, insert a film strip and place the first negative in the viewing window.
Press &200!. A softkey menu is displayed.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Press the key below 6(7/(16.
Press the key below 6(7=220.
Press the key below 67$57.
The negative is now transported into the exposure position, paper is cut and
brought into the exposure position on the paper deck.
saml02051a
The projected image may overlap

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
the paper by maximum 2mm
(0.08”). Should this not be the
case, adjust the zoom by turning
the crown gear until the proper
Crown Gear overlap is achieved.
CW CCW
:$51,1*
,WLVYHU\LPSRUWDQWWKDW\RXH[DFWO\IROORZWKHVWHSVWR
IRUDGMXVWLQJWKHILOPWUDFNRWKHUZLVHIDXOW\H[SRVXUHVPD\
RFFXU
Load a film strip with the key.

Position the negative in the viewing window with the arrow keys and
.
Press 0$,17!.
Enter the password (default is 7890) and confirm with (17(5!.
Press the key below ),75$&..
Press the key below ,1,7.
64 Service Manual
Installation
Press the key below $'-(;3 to adjust the exposure position.

This transports the negative from the viewing window into the exposure
98.22.56 Edition 3
position, a paper is cut and positioned on the paper deck.
Position the negative exactly in the middle of the paper with the keys just
below the signs < and > shown in the display.
Confirm the final position with (17(5!.

The film strip is then removed from the film deck.
Press any menu key to exit the present menu.
Load the test negative #6 in the viewing window with the key.
Press 0$,17!.
Press the key below ),75$&..
Press the key below ,1,7.
Press the key below $'-9,(:.
Position the negative exactly in the viewing window with the keys just below
the signs < and > shown in the display.
Confirm the final position with (17(5!.
Press any menu key to exit the present menu.
6HWWLQJWKHZDNHXSWLPHV
Press 6(7! and proceed as follows to set the 7-day timer.

Press the key below 6<67(0.
Press the key below :$.(83 and enter the on/off times.
<SET> SYSTEM WAKEUP
Monday Set any Time to
[24:00] [24:00] 24:00 for disable
ON OFF
1RWH 6HWWLQJWKH212))WLPHWRGLVDEOHVWKHZDNHXS
IXQFWLRQIRUWKDWGD\
Service Manual 65
Installation
Repeat this step for every day of the week.
At the end press any menu key to exit the present menu.
98.22.56 Edition 3
6HWWLQJWLPHDQGGDWH
Press 6(7! and proceed as follows to set the actual time and date.
Press the key below '$77,0 and enter the correct date and time.
<SET> SYSTEM DATTIM
Actual Date and Time
1999 6 17 13:25
Year Month Day Time
Remount all removed side panels.
0DVWHUVHWXS
Press 6(7! and proceed as follows to set the reference film.
Press the key below 0$67(5
Press the key below7(676(7'(1

until the aim values are reached (refer to the Operating Manual SETUP).
6DYLQJWKHGDWDRIWKHLQLWLDOVHWXS
saml02052a
Insert the memory card
Press &200!.
66 Service Manual
Installation
Press the key below 6$9(.

98.22.56 Edition 3
Press the key below 67$57 to save the parameters.
Remove the memory card as soon as the saving procedure is finished.

Service Manual 67
68
Installation
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
6HUYLFHPHQX 3
7KHV\VWHP
Before entering values or reading data you have to address the corresponding
location in the menu system. The following figure shows the keys used to navi-
gate through the menu system.
saml03001a
Standard
Display
Corresponding Menu Key

<MAINT>
Menu
1. Level SOFTKEY
(1. line of Display)
Any
Menu 2. Level SOFTKEY
Key
SOFTKEY
n. Level
Last Level
Screen # 1
Menu
Last Level
Screen # 2
<ENTER>
Menu
Last Level
Screen # n
<ENTER>
Menu
Last Level
Last Screen
Service Manual 69
Service menu
0DLQWHQDQFH0HQXIRUWKH3ULQWHU
'HVLJQDWLRQ )XQFWLRQ
98.22.56 Edition 3
0HQXOD\HU

Enter the maintenance menu (Pass-
0$,17!
word)
PRINTER Select printer functions
PATRACK Select paper track
INIT Initialize paper track
ADJUST Adjust exposure position
ADJUST Enter exposure position in (mm) and
confirm with (17(5!
ALL Overall initialization of paper trans-
port
DISTR Reset of distributor
TRANSP
ADVANCE Regular paper transport
FETCH Move paper from cassette to paper
deck
LEAVE Move paper from paper deck to pro-
cessor
FEED 7KHVH Move paper from paper deck to
PHQXVDUH feeder
TURN RQWKHQH[W Turn feeder to processor / distribu-
VFUHHQ tor
DISTR Move paper from distributor to pro-
cessor
CASS
SENS Display paper end, splice detector
CODE Display magnet settings & cassette
code
EXTRACT Activates paper extractor-motor
(without a cassette only)
FORW Extracting forward
BACKW Extracting backward
STOP Stop extracting
KNIFE Move knife, display light barrier
CUTLFT Move knife left
CUTRGHT Move knife right
PDECK Select paper deck
MOVE Move paper deck transport 100mm/

cont.
FORW Move paper 100mm/cont. forward
BACKW Move paper 100mm/cont. backward
STOP Stop
FAN
VACUUM Vacuum fan ON/OFF
EXIT
SENS Display light barriers feeder
FEEDER Turn feeder and display light barri-
ers
TURNPRI Turn feeder into printer position and
display light barriers
TURNPRO Turn feeder into processor position
and display light barriers.
continued on next page
70 Service Manual
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
0$,17! Enter the maintenance menu (Pass-

word)
PATRACK Select film track
EXIT
DISTR Start distributor, reset, display error
START Start transport in distributor, display
error
RESET Reset distributor
FITRACK
INIT Initialize film track
FDECK Press (17(5! to init software
(after changing a film deck)
ADJEXP Adjust exposure window with soft-
keys
START Move the film to exposure position
<- Move film left, confirm with
(17(5!
-> Move film right, confirm with
(17(5!
ADJVIEW Adjust viewer window with soft keys
<- Move film left, confirm with
(17(5!
-> Move film right, confirm with
(17(5!
SENS Adjust sensors

A135 Move film, calibrate, display photo
sensors
o PosDiode: density, absolute, off-
set
o -DxData: density, absolute, off-
set
o DxClock: density, absolute, off-
set
o STC Data: density, absolute, off-
set
(Fuji frame number)
STEPS Number of steps to move film
FORW Move film forward (number of steps)

BACKW Move film backward (number of
steps)
CALIB Calibration of photo diodes
A110 Move film, display microswitch

viewer and exposure
steps)
Service Manual 71
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
word)
FITRACK Select film track
SENS Adjust sensors
UNI Move film, display light barrier
home-position
steps)
ATAPS Display DX and MOF signals

steps)
CALIB Dark calibration
CODE Display film deck code and mask

code
MOVE Forward, backward, stop motor ON/

OFF
FORW Move film continuously forward
BACKW Move film continuously backward
STOP Stop film movement
MOTOR Motor ON/OFF
ACTUAT Position LED, clamp, viewer lamp
CLAMP Activate negative mask
POSLED Position LED ON/OFF
VIEWER Viewer lamp ON/OFF
EXPSYS
FIXTIME Allows to copy prints with user
defined constant exposure times
[ms] for tests. Scanner is OFF
BLUE Enter the time for blue in [ms]
GREEN Enter the time for green in [ms]

RED Enter the time for red in [ms]
ATTEN Attenuator ON/OFF
FIXTIME 2QQH[W Set fixtime mode ON/OFF
VFUHHQ
LAMPSYS
MODE Lamp voltage ON/OFF
ATTEN Swing attenuator
TURN Move attenuator in/out
SENS Display state of temperature switch
CODE Status light barrier and light shaft
code
72 Service Manual
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3

word)
EXPSYS Select exposure system
FWHEEL
INIT Initialize filter wheel
EXPOSE Exposure time 40ms for each color
START Start an exposure cycle of 40ms
COLORS Turn dark > blue > green > red >
dark > white > dark display home
sensor.
TURN Start the test cycle
CONT Turn continues
START Start rotating the filter wheel
STOP Stop rotating the filter wheel
SHUTTER Swing shutter, display light barriers

TURN Turn shutter in/out
TEMPCOR Temperature correction

YELLOW Density correction yellow
MAGENTA Density correction magenta
CYAN Density correction cyan
MEASYS
SENS Display temperature in measuring
system
SCANLIN Measure and display one scan line
(12 diodes), gain, offset, absolute of
blue, green, red.
(Diode 1 ... 10 Scan diodes
Diode 11 Reference diode)
START Scan one line of negative
GAIN Enter value for gain
See results with
T-CALIB
AUTO Measure calib. strip automatically
(ADM)
MAN Measure calib. strip manually

(D19C)
AIM Enter aim values
OTHER
OPTICS
CODE Read lens code (in home position
only!)
ZOOM
GETPOS
RELEASE De-energize zoom drive, move
zoom by hand
GETPOS Get actual zoom position in steps
POSITION Display actual position in steps.
Service Manual 73
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
word)
OTHER
ZOOM
GOPOS
START Move zoom to specified position
POSITION Enter position of zoom in [steps]
ELECTR
SENS Status of DIP-Switch 1 - 7 on CPU
board, memory card, backup bat-
tery, software version of CPU board.
SERIAL Status of connected options, paper
transport, wet part
BACKPRI
INIT Initialize the backprinter
RIBBON Switch the ribbon motor ON/OFF
TEST_EX Expose a grey print
0DLQWHQDQFHPHQXIRUWKHSDSHUSURFHVVRU
0HQXOD\HU

word)
P.PROC Select paper processor functions
TEMP
CALTMP
DEV Actual temperature in °C in the
developer
BLEACH Actual temperature in °C in the
bleachfix
STAB Actual temperature in °C in the sta-

bilizer
DRYER Actual temperature in °C in the dryer
STATUS Actual temperature in comparison to
the set temperature for developer,
bleachfix, stabilizer and dryer
HEATER
DEV Heater of developer ON/OFF
BLEACH Heater of bleachfix ON/OFF
STAB1 Heater of stabilizer 1 ON/OFF
DRYER 2QQH[W Heater of dryer ON/OFF
VFUHHQ
Continued on next page
74 Service Manual
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3

word)
P.PROC Select paper processor functions
TEMP
PROBES Condition of the temperature probes
and heaters in developer, bleachfix,
stabilizer and dryer
LIQUID
CALPUMP
DEV Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the developer
BLEACH Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the bleachfix
STAB Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the stabilizer
TEST Execute 20 pump strokes
PUMPS Switch agitation and replenishment
pumps
DEV Switch developer agitation pump
ON/OFF
BLEACH Switch bleachfix agitation pump ON/
OFF
STAB Switch stabilizer agitation pump ON/
OFF
REPL Switch replenishment pumps ON/
OFF
SENS Display level condition in the work-
ing tanks, the replenishment and
recovery tanks (optional console
only). Displays status of flow/vac-
uum sensor.
AIR Switch fans ON/OFF

DRYER Switch dryer fan ON/OFF
EXHAUST Switch exhaust fan ON/OFF
COOLING Switch cooling fan ON/OFF
TRANSP
PAPER
MOTOR Switch paper transport motor ON/
OFF
SORTER
MOVE Move sorter and shows position
LEFT Move sorter to the left
RIGHT Move sorter to the right
STOP Stop sorter movement
STATUS Status of the sorter
SENS Condition of light barriers, paper
width and presence of sorter kit.
Service Manual 75
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
word)
P.PROC Select paper processor
TRANSP Select transport
STATUS Status of the paper processor
SENS Condition of the tacho light barrier
SYSTEM Select system functions

ON/OFF
PROCESS Switch paper processor ON/OFF
DRYER Switch dryer ON/OFF
DEVTIM Developer time in seconds
SWITCH
BUZZER Switch buzzer ON/OFF
24VBAT Switch 24V ON/OFF
ACPOW Switch AC-Power OFF
DCPOW Switch DC-Power ON/OFF
STATUS Display the various status of the

paper processor
SENS Displays status of various sensors
of the system
0DLQWHQDQFHPHQXIRUWKHILOPSURFHVVRU
(Valid for machines with film processor only!)
0HQXOD\HU

word)
F.PROC Select film processor functions
TEMP
CALTMP
DEV Actual temperature in °C in the
developer
BLEACH Actual temperature in °C in the
bleach
FIX Actual temperature in °C in the fixer
STAB Actual temperature in °C in the sta-
bilizer
DRYER Actual temperature in °C in the dryer
STATUS Actual temperature in comparison to

the set temperature for developer,
bleach, fixer, stabilizer and dryer
76 Service Manual
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3

word)
TEMP
HEATER
DEV Heater of developer ON/OFF
BLEACH Heater of bleach ON/OFF
FIX1 Heater of fixer 1 ON/OFF
FIX2 Heater of fixer 2 ON/OFF
DRYER Heater of dryer ON/OFF
PROBES Condition of the temperature probes
and heaters in developer, bleach,
fixer, stabilizer and dryer
LIQUID
CALPUMP
DEV Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the developer
BLEACH Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the bleach
FIX Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the fixer
STAB Actual pump rate for 20 strokes and
per m2 for the stabilizer
TEST Execute 20 pump strokes
PUMPS
DEV Switch developer agitation pump
ON/OFF
BLEACH Switch bleach agitation pump ON/
OFF
FIX Switch fixer agitation pump ON/OFF
STAB Switch stabilizer agitation pump ON/
OFF
REPL Switch replenishment pumps ON/
OFF
SENS Displays level condition in the work-
ing tanks, the replenishment and
recovery tanks (optional console

only). Displays status of flow sen-
sors.
AIR Switch fans ON/OFF
DRYER Switch dryer fan ON/OFF
AIRBLEA Switch air blower bleach ON/OFF
TRANSP Select film transport

FILM
MOTOR Switch film transport motor ON/OFF
Service Manual 77
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
word)
TRANSP Select film transport
LOAD
LOCK Switch film loading
CUT Activate the knife when a film load-
ing cassette is inserted.
STATUS Status of the film processor and its
various modules.
SENS Display the tacho light barrier and
the film detecting sensor.
SYSTEM
ON/OFF
PROCESS Switch film processor ON/OFF
DRYER Switch dryer ON/OFF
DEVTIM Developer time in seconds
SWITCH
BUZZER Switch buzzer ON/OFF
24VBAT Switch 24V ON/OFF
ACPOW Switch AC-Power OFF
DCPOW Switch DC-Power ON/OFF
STATUS Display the various status of the film

processor
SENS Displays status of various sensors
of the system
78 Service Manual
Service menu
0DLQWHQDQFHPHQXIRUWKHRWKHUV\VWHPSDUWV
98.22.56 Edition 3
0HQXOD\HU

word)
OTHER Select various other parts
SYSTEM Select various system parts
LANG
DEFAULT Load the default language (English)
MEMCARD Load language from the language
card
PASSWD
PASSWD Enter new password
SOFT Display software version of printer

part, wet part, paper transport and
keyboard, LCD etc.
ADM Automatic Densitometer

MOVE
REMHEAD Move the measuring head and indi-
cate the position of the head (right
or left of the center position)
<- Move the head one step to the left
(One step is NOT equal to one ras-
ter segment)
µ0RYHUDVWHU¶
-> Move the head one step to the right
(One step is NOT equal to one ras-
ter segment)
<- Move the head to the left end posi-
tion
µ0RYHHQG¶
-> Move the head to the right end posi-
tion
HOME Move the head to the center position
(marked with an arrow on the raster
segment).
TRANSP Transport the strip

TYPE Select the method of measurement
(REM / TRANS)
INDEX Distance the strip will be moved (not
equal for REM and TRANS)
FORW Transport the strip forward.
BACKW Transport the strip backward
STROUT Transport the strip out of the ADM
ACTUATE
STRACC Enable / disable the function ‘Strip
access’
LAMP Lamp ON/OFF
Service Manual 79
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
word)
OTHER Select various other parts
ADM Automatic Densitometer
TEST
DARKMEA Dark measurement
REM Remission Densitometer
TRANS Transmission Densitometer
BRIMEA Bright measurement
REM Remission Densitometer
TRANS Transmission Densitometer
WHIMEA White measurement
MIPOS Move head to center position
RESET Selftest of the ADM, reset all stored
commands in the ADM
SENS Information about:
o Transmission of the sensor for
the raster segment
o Transmission of the sensor for
the strip detector
o Sensor for the filter wheel (in the
measuring head)
CALIB Calibration of the ADM. Providing
information about:
o Measured and target values for
white
o Measured and target values for
dark
o Distance between the reference
marks.
o Max. number of measurements
between reference marks for re-
mission densitometer
o Max. number of measurements
between reference marks for
transmission densitometer
MEAS
FILM Measurement of a film strip
START Start the measuring process.
2QQH[WVFUHHQ
FORW Next measuring position

BACKW Previous measuring position
DIST Measuring position (mm)
PAPER Measurement of a paper strip
START Start the measurement
HEAD<-> Offset of the head from the center
position (mm)
2QQH[WVFUHHQ
FORW Next measuring position
BACKW Previous measuring position
DIST Measuring position (mm)
80 Service Manual
Service menu
0DLQWHQDQFHPHQXIRURSWLFDOLQGH[SULQWHU
The following maintenance menu is only valid for software version 3.30
98.22.56 Edition 3
0HQXOD\HU

word)
OTHER Select various other functions
INDEX Select index functions for optical
Indexprinter
MOVE
IDXUNIT Activate the index unit
HOME Set index unit to home position
WORK- Set index unit to work position
POS
LOGO Movement of the logo turret
NEXT Move to the next logo position
HOME Move to logo home position
ZOOM Move to index zoom magnification
START Move to index zoom position
HOME Move to index zoom home position
POSITION Enter number of steps for zoom
movement
TRANSL
START Move to index translation position
HOME Move to translation home position
POSITION Enter number of steps for translator
movement
MIRRORS
FDECK Turn film deck mirror
LOGO Turn logo mirror
EXPOSE
FRAMENR
EXPOSER Expose frame number for specified
time
TIME Set exposure time for frame number
FORMAT
EXP_C Expose format indicator ‘C’ for spec-
ified time
EXP_P Expose format indicator ‘P’ for spec-

ified time
TIME Set exposure time for format indica-
tor
TEXT
EXPOSE Expose text for specified time
TIME Set exposure time for text
LOGO
EXPOSE Expose logo for specified time
TIME Set exposure time for logo
Service Manual 81
Service menu
0HQXOD\HU

98.22.56 Edition 3
0$,17! Entering the maintenance menu
(Password)
OTHER Select various other functions
INDEX Select index functions
CALIB
LEFT Move paper to the left
RIGHT Move paper to the right
UP Move zoom translation up
DOWN Move zoom translation down
CALTYP Selection of frame min./max. or logo
FMTWHL
INT With (17(5!, the format wheel
id initialized
ADJUST
NEXT
-1
+1
FMTWHL
ADJUST
CHECKMIR
NEUTRAL
H-FMT
P-FMT
C-FMT
FRAMENR
YES/NO Confirmation for saving the data of
the format wheel setting.
EXPOSE
EXPOSE Expose frame number for specified
time
TIME Set exposure time for frame number
0DLQWHQDQFHPHQXIRU&XVWRPL]HU
The following maintenance menu is only valid as of software version 5.xx

0HQXOD\HU

(Password)
OTHER These menu items are described in
SYSTEM detail in the Service Manual Cus-
ADM tomizer Master Lab+
CCD P/N 98.29.02
LCD
INDEX
82 Service Manual
Service menu
'HEXJPHQX
98.22.56 Edition 3
0HQXOD\HU

(Password)
DEBUG
INFO For software development only!
P.PROC For software development only!
F.PROC For software development only!
APS FID (Test string) For software devel-
opment only!
DEBUG
TEST STRING For software development only!
0DLQWHQDQFHIXQFWLRQVRQWKH$/0/3/86ERDUG
A set of maintenance functions are provided on the ALMLPLUS board to check

the pumps and sensors.
saml04007a
ATS Make sure that the automatic top-

green off system is ON. The green light
lamp must be ON
saml04008a
Turn the rotary switch SW1 from 0

upward. As soon as the position 0
is left, the ‘MAIN LED’ indicates
the maintenance mode.
MAIN LED Test the pumps, various valves

and switch SW2 and SW3 by step-
8 8 8
ping-up switch SW1 as given in
the following tables:
C
C
C
4
4
0 0 0
SW1 SW2 SW3
Service Manual 83
Service menu
3RVLWLRQRI6: $FWLYDWHGIXQFWLRQ
0 Maintenance OFF
1 Pump and valve film developer (EV1)
98.22.56 Edition 3
2 Pump and valve film bleach (EV2)
3 Pump and valve film fixer 1 (EV3)
4 Pump and valve film fixer 2 (EV4)
5 Pump and valve film stabilizer 1 (EV5)
6 Pump and valve film stabilizer 2 (EV6)
7 Pump and valve paper developer (EV7)
8 Pump and valve paper bleachfix (EV8)
9 Pump and valve paper stabilizer 1 (EV9)
A Pump and valve paper stabilizer 2 (EV10)
B Pump and valve paper stabilizer 3 (EV11)
C Tank empty lamp (red lamp)
D Buzzer
E Checking switch SW2 as given in the next table
F Checking switch SW3 as given in the next table
7DE 3RVLWLRQRIVZLWFK6:
saml13019a
EV1 ➩ Electro valve film developer

EV2 ➩ Electro valve film bleach
EV3 ➩ Electro valve film fixer 1

EV5 ➩ Electro valve film stabilizer 1
EV7 ➩ Electro valve paper developer
EV8 ➩ Electro valve paper bleach
EV9 ➩ Electro valve paper stabilizer 1
EV1 1 ➩ Electro valve paper stabilizer 3
8 8 8
ALAR ➩ Level phase alarm
4
4
C
0 0 0
+24V ➩ Power supply +24V
ACT ➩ The board is running (flashing with 1Hz)
PUMP ➩ Top-Of f pump
MAIN ➩ Maintenance mode
ON ➩ Manual switch activated (green lamp)

TANK ➩ Level empty (red lamp)
BUZZ. ➩ Buzzer
84 Service Manual
Service menu
3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ $FWLYDWHG 3RVLWLRQ 3RVLWLRQ $FWLYDWHG

6: 6: /(' 6: 6: /('
0 All LED’s OFF 0 All LED’s OFF
98.22.56 Edition 3
1 EV1 1 EV1
2 EV2 2 EV2
3 EV3 3 EV3
4 EV4 4 EV4
5 EV5 5 EV5
6 EV6 6 EV6
7 EV7 7 EV7
E F
8 EV8 8 EV8
9 EV7 9 EV7
A EV6 A EV6
B EV5 B EV5
C EV4 C EV4
D EV3 D EV3
E EV2 E EV2
F EV1 F EV1
Position of SW2 Position of SW3

Service Manual 85
86
Service menu
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
3UHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH 4
3UHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFHGHVFULEHGLQWKLVFKDSWHULVDVHUYLFHWHFKQLFLDQ¶V
GXW\DQGQRORQJHUDQRSHUDWRU¶VGXW\$OOGXWLHVSHUIRUPHGE\WKHRSHUD
WRUDUHGHVFULEHGLQWKH2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDOVXSSOLHGZLWKHYHU\PDFKLQH
7KLVPDLQWHQDQFHUHTXLUHVDQLQGHSWKNQRZOHGJHRIWKH0DVWHU/DE
WHFKQRORJ\HJRSHUDWLQJLQWKHPDLQWHQDQFHPHQX
6WDQGDUGSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
For the standard preventive maintenance which should be done every half year
the following material is required:
3DUWQXPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQ 4W\

3ULQWHUSDUW
11.54.43 Filter mat 1
:HWSDUW
16445-139-0 Chemical filter 11
16445-137-0 Filter mat 1

16445-145-0 Filter mat 1
15525-159-0 Squeegee roller 4
0DWHULDOIRUSUHYHQWLYHPDLQWHQDQFH
0029-100-22 Filter for replenishment pump 7
0021-658-51 Flap valve for replenishment pump 7
0021-658-56 Bellow 3/4” for bleach replenishment pump 1
0021-658-53 Bellow 1” for replenishment pump 5
0021-658-62 Bellow 1.5” for stabilizer pump 1
0026-729-44 Drain tap 1
Service Manual 87
Preventive maintenance
3DUWQXPEHU 'HVFULSWLRQ 4W\

$X[LOLDU\PDWHULDO
20.66.98 Lens cleaning tissues
98.22.56 Edition 3
14.20.88 Lens cleaning liquid
35.37.28 TRI-FLOW teflonbased lubricant
18540-061-0 Pure silicon oil
Vacuum cleaner
Brush
Alcohol
*HQHUDO3URFHGXUHV
Save all data on the memory card.
Check the +5Vdc supply according to instructions in chapter 5.4.4
:$51,1*
$OZD\VVZLWFKRIIWKHPDFKLQHEHIRUHFOHDQLQJ
1RWHFHUWDLQDGMXVWPHQWVDQGIXQFWLRQDOWHVWVUHTXLUHWKH
PDFKLQHWREHRSHUDWLRQDO:LWKWKHH[FHSWLRQRIWKHFRYHUHG
SDUWRIWKHFRQWUROXQLWPDUNHGZLWKWKHIODVKV\PEROWKH
SULQWHUSDUWRQO\RSHUDWHVZLWKYROWDJHVEHORZ9KRZHYHU
ZKHQVHUYLFLQJDOLYHPDFKLQHPDNHVXUHWRXVHQRQFRQGXFW
LQJWRROV
Shut down the machine.
,03257$17
'RQ¶WXVHFRPSUHVVHGDLUIRUFOHDQLQJEHFDXVHLWGLVWULEXWHVWKHGXVWLQ
VWHDGRIHOLPLQDWLQJLW%UXVKHVRIYDULRXVVL]HVDQGDKDQGKHOGYDFX
XPFOHDQHUDUHUHFRPPHQGHGIRUFOHDQLQJSXUSRVHV
Dust the control panel with a brush and a vacuum-cleaner.
Clean the control unit (electronics) with a brush and a vacuum-cleaner.
Open the test cassette for paper processor control strips and dust it with a
brush and a vacuum-cleaner.
88 Service Manual
3ULQWHUSDUW
2SWLFDOV\VWHP
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml04001a
1 Lamp
1 2 IR filter (coated side up)
2 3 Correction filter (coated side up)
3
4 4 Test filter
5 5 Filter wheel (blue/green/red color
6
filters, coated side up)
7
6 Filter wheel motor
8 7 Fixed light cone
8 Exchangeable light shaft
9
9 Film deck
10 Shutter
11* Lens turret
10
11 12* Turret lock
12 13* Lens code reader
14* Zoom lens motor
13 15* Zoom lens
16 Paper
14 17 Paper deck
15
* = ML+ 220 / 240 / 520 / 740 only!
16
17
Shut down the machine with the main switch.
Dust the lamp house with a brush and a vacuum-cleaner.
Use lens cleaner to clean the IR filter, the correction filter, the test filter and
the color filters.
1RWH 5HPRXQWWKHILOWHUVLQWKHFRUUHFWVHTXHQFHDQGPDNHVXUHWKDW
WKHFRDWLQJLVRQWKHULJKWVLGH
q ,5ILOWHU FRDWHGVLGHXS
q &RUUHFWLRQILOWHU FRDWHGVLGHXS
q 7HVWILOWHU QRFRDWHGVLGH
q &RORUILOWHUV FRDWHGVLGHXS
Use a brush to dust the outside of all light shafts.
Clean both sides of the respective diffusers with lens cleaner.
Thoroughly dust all film decks with a brush.
Service Manual 89
Clean the conveyer rollers and the reader unit with alcohol.
Check the tension of the toothed belt (see chapter 9.6.4)
98.22.56 Edition 3
Clean the table of the printer part with a damp cloth.
Clean the film deck seat with a brush and a vacuum-cleaner.
Clean the front surface of all lenses using lens cleaner.
)RU0/DQGRQO\
Unlock the lens turret and check that it runs smoothly and without effort.
The turret shall not jam in any position!
Switch on the machine.
Open the lamp house.
Check the lamp voltage in normal operation, adjust if necessary (refer to

chapter 5.4.5.)
Check the function of the thermostat in the lamp house with the following
procedure:
Cover the lamp cooling fan (e.g. with an aluminum plate).
Close the lamp house cover.
Ensure that the lamp is on.
Wait approx. 10 minutes, the lamp should now be switched off
Does this not happen, replace the sensor.
Operate the test filter with the menu

0$,17!),75$&.(;36<6/$036<6$77(1
Press the key below7851and check the evenness of movement. The

test filter shall not touch the filter wheel and the fixed light cone.
Check the sequence of the color filters with the menu

0$,17!),75$&.(;36<6):+((/&2/256
)RU0/DQGRQO\
Check the movement of the shutter, at least 20 times with the menu
0$,17!),75$&.(;36<66+877(5
Press the key below7851
90 Service Manual
0HDVXULQJV\VWHP
saml04002a
1
2
98.22.56 Edition 3
18
17 3
4
16 5
15
6
14 7
13 12 11
10 8
9
1 Lamp 2 Lamp house
3 Test filter 4 Filter wheel
5 Light shaft 6 Film
7 Photo diode 8 Measuring board (MESY)
9 Measuring box 10 Measuring filter
11 Measuring lens 12 Optical box
13 Deviation mirror 14 Film deck
15 Lower diffuser 16 Upper diffuser
17 Correction filter 18 IR-filter
Clean the test filter in the lamp house
Clean the measuring filter of the measuring box with lens cleaner.
saml04003a
1 Measuring lens
4 2 Deflection mirror
1
3 Fibre optic
4 Magnets
2
Use a brush to dust the inside and outside of the optical box
Service Manual 91
Clean the deflection mirror and the measuring lens with lens cleaner
Check if both ends of the fibre optic are properly seated.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Before remounting the cover, ensure that the coated side of the deflection
mirror faces down and that it is positioned in a 45o angle to the light path.
Check if the four holding magnets are in place (optical box for universal film
deck only!).
3DSHUSDWK
saml04004a
11
12
13
14
10
7
6
5
2
1
8
)LJ 3DSHUSDWKDVVHPEOLHV
1 Paper cassette 2 Light trap

3 Paper extractor front panel 4 PAMID board
5 Paper extractor motor 6 Knife motor
7 Paper deck transport motor 8 Paper deck
9 Feeder pivot drive motor 10 Feeder
11 Paper distributor (ML+ X40 only!) 12 Drive shaft of paper processor
13 Paper distributor carriage motor 14 Paper distributor motor
92 Service Manual
saml04005a
21
17
9 18
98.22.56 Edition 3
8
19
20
10
6
11 12
7 13 11
14 15
16 3
4
3 2
1
)LJ 'ULYHDQGPRQLWRULQJV\VWHP
1 Paper cassette 2 Paper extractor and knife unit

3 Detection of knife position 4 Vacuum fan
5 Paper deck 6 Detection of feeder position
7 Feeder 8 Paper width detector
9 Paper detector of feeder 10 Feeder pivot drive motor
11 Paper cassette code detection 12 Paper present detector
13 Paper splice sensor 14 Paper deck drive stepper motor
15 Knife drive DC motor 16 Paper extractor stepper motor
17 Paper distributor 18 Paper transport stepper motor
19 Distributor carriage stepper motor 20 Detection of carriage position
21 Paper path sensors
The paper path needs the following maintenance:
Dust the paper cassette and the paper path from the paper inlet to the paper
distributor.
Service Manual 93
saml04006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Check the fasteners ($) of all
A paper cassettes for correct func-
tion. Replace defective fasteners
Check the belt tension of the knife, the feeder and the paper distributor. (For
details refer to chapter 10).
Replace defective or worn parts, such as:

o Fasteners of the light trap.
o Tension and pressure springs of the paper inlet and the knife unit.
o Rollers of the feeder and the paper distributor.
:$51,1*
2QO\XVHDOFRKROIRUFOHDQLQJWKHUROOHUV7KHXVHRIDQ\RWK
HUFOHDQLQJDJHQWLVVWULFWO\SURKLELWHG,WGDPDJHVWKHUXEEHU
RIWKHUROOHUV
Use alcohol to clean the paper inlet rollers and the transport rollers of the
paper deck.
Replace the air filter below the electronic rack.
Check the play between the driving mechanism of the paper processor and
the paper distributor outlet. The paper distributor shall not touch the motor
shaft of the paper processor.
Lubricate both drive sprockets with TRI-FLOW (teflonbased lubricant).
Check the play between the driving mechanism of the paper distributor and
the feeder.
94 Service Manual
Check the play between the driving mechanism of the paper deck and the
feeder.
Switch the machine on and check the function of all paper path assemblies
98.22.56 Edition 3
during initialization.
Execute 30 exposures with a paper size of 3.5” x 3.5” or 4” x 4” and check

the parallelism of the paper path from paper deck to paper distributor.
Expose several gray prints with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(527+(57(67B(;3
Check the prints for the following criteria:

o how has the print been cut, it must be a clean cut.
o that no edges are damaged.
o that no pressure marks are on the prints
o that all prints have the same length (+/- 0.2mm)
Check the paper position (X-Y adjustment) on the paper deck and readjust
if necessary (for details refer to chapter 10).
Trigger three paper feeds of each paper type used during daily production
and check the edges of the prints for damages.
Check if the detection of the paper cassette code works correct. (Instruction
about cassette coding is given in chapter 10).
:HWSDUW
*HQHUDO
:$51,1*
:KHQHYHU\RXKDYHWRKDQGOHFKHPLFDOVSURWHFW\RXUVHOI
ZLWKJORYHVDQGJRJJOHV
1HJOHFWLQJWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFRXOGOHDGWRVHYHUVNLQLUULWDWLRQ
DQGRUGDPDJHVWR\RXUH\HV,QWKHZRUVWFDVHOHDGLQJWR
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
It is advisable to do the following maintenance at least every half year. It is fur-

ther assumed that the daily, weekly and monthly maintenance have been done
on a regular basis. Unlike the maintenance in the printer part, the maintenance
in the wet part mainly include functional checks, verifying of values and inspec-
tion of various parts. Cleaning is only covered to some extent as this is a duty
which has to be done much more frequently.
Service Manual 95
)LOPSURFHVVRU
saml04009a
98.22.56 Edition 3
2
4
16
5
15
14 13 12 11 10 9
1 Exhaust fan 2 Dryer

3 Temperature sensor dryer 4 Dryer heating
5 Dryer fan 6 Squeegee roller
7 Speedometer of transport motor 8 Transport motor
9 Stabilizer 2 10 Stabilizer 1
11 Fixer 2 12 Fixer 1
13 Bleach 14 Developer
15 Transport safety switch 16 Film collecting bin
Develop a chemistry test strip.

Evaluate the developed test strip.
Replace the four squeegee rollers of the last stabilizer rack.
Remove the dryer rack.
Clean it with a vacuum cleaner.
Lubricate all bearings of the dryer with pure silicon oil (P/N 18540.061.0)
96 Service Manual
,03257$17
'RQ¶WXVH75,)/2:WROXEULFDWHWKHEHDULQJVRIWKHGU\HU7KLVZLOOOHDG
98.22.56 Edition 3
WRWKHGHVWUXFWLRQRIWKHUROOHUV
Check all racks for possible mechanical damages and wear. Replace
defective parts.
Check and ensure that all racks are transporting smoothly
Lubricate the bearings in all processor racks with TRI-FLOW
,03257$17
75,)/2:PXVWEHXVHGIRUWKHUDFNVLQWKHSURFHVVRUEXW1(9(5IRU
WKHGU\HUUDFNV
Clean the film outlet station and the dryer housing with a brush and a vac-
uum cleaner.
saml04010a
4 3 2
6 6 6 5 1
1 Pulley 30T 2 Pulley 15T

3 Toothed belt 4 Friction bearing
5 Ball bearing 6 Worm gears
Check the condition of the worm gears on the main drive shaft. Use TRI-
FLOW to lubricate the worm gears, the ball bearings and the friction bear-
ings.
If a worm gear or a bearing has to be replaced, refer to chapter 11
Service Manual 97
saml04011a
5 mm
Check the belt tension of the main
98.22.56 Edition 3
drive and adjust if necessary.
5N
Replace the air filters for the wet part electronics and the pump cooling fans.
Remove the cover of the tank heaters and temperature/level sensors.
Clean the frame located underneath by removing all chemical residues (fur-
ring)
Check chemical tanks, pumps and hoses for possible leaks.
Open all filter housings in the replenishment tubes.
Clean the filters under running water.
1RWH %HFDUHIXOQRWWRORVHWKH2ULQJV
Remove the suction tube of the automatic top-off tank.
&$87,21
'RQ¶WVZLWFK21WKHPDFKLQHDVORQJDVWKHUDFNVDUHUH
PRYHGDQGWKHVXFWLRQWXEHLVVWLOOLQWKHDXWRPDWLFWRSRII
WDQN
7KHDXWRPDWLFWRSRIIV\VWHPILOOVXSWKHWDQNVZLWKZDWHU
DQGWKHFKHPLVWU\ZRXOGEHGLOXWHGDQGXVHOHVV
Switch ON the machine with the main switch.
Visually check circulation of the liquid in each working tank.

Visually check the agitation in the developer.
Visually check the air pump in the bleach.
Switch OFF the machine again.
Before reinserting the racks, check the results of the evaluated test strip, if
necessary fill new chemistry into the tanks.
1RWH &OHDQWKHWDQNVEHIRUHUHILOOLQJZLWKQHZFKHPLVWU\
98 Service Manual
saml04011a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the film loading station.
&$87,21
%HORZWKHFRYHURIWKHILOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQLVWKHILOPFXWWLQJ
NQLIH
C A U T I O N
S H A R P
B L A D E :KHQUHPRYLQJWKHFRYHUEHFDUHIXORWKHUZLVH\RXPD\FXW
\RXUILQJHUV
saml04013a
A A Remove the screws marked (A)

and open the film loading station.
Check the blade of the knife for a

A A sharp edge. Exchange a damaged
or unsharp knife.
Clean the rollers of the film loading

station with alcohol.
A A
Check all pressure and tension
Sensor board springs.
M805
Lubricate the outside of the guide
rails (for the film loading cassette)
A A and the gears with silicon oil.
Check the cassette locking and

A A the knife solenoid for smooth
movement and if necessary lubri-
cate with very little TRI-FLOW to
A A prevent films from getting dirty.
Service Manual 99
saml04014a
Check the contact resistance of
98.22.56 Edition 3
both micro switches with an Ohm-
meter. Activate the switches sev-
eral times by hand. The resistance
must be below 1Ohm
Close the film loading station and reinstall it
Insert the racks into the working tanks.
Check the film transport from the film loading through to the film collecting
bin.
Process at least two to three films and check them for scratches.
Check the temperature of the chemicals and the dryer (see chapter 11).
Check the replenishment rates (see chapter 11).
Make sure the pumps are self-priming, otherwise change the valves.
Check the bellows and the valves for possible leaks.
Check the volume of the remaining chemicals in the replenishment tanks to

see whether they are in proportion to each other.
Select the menu:

0$,17!3352&$,5(;+$867
Switch the exhaust fan OFF and ON again and check the air flow of the fan.
Check the transport speed by inserting an HPSW\ leader card into the Mas-
ter Lab+.
Start a stop watch when the front of the leader card enters the developer
rack.
Stop the time when the leader card enters the bleach rack. The time should
be 3min. 15sec. (195s).
If necessary, adjust the time with the menu:

0$,17!)352&6<67(0'(97,0
Close all covers of the film processor and the dryer.
100 Service Manual

3DSHUSURFHVVRU
saml12001a
1
98.22.56 Edition 3
3
15
4
14
5
16
9 10 11 12 13
1 Dryer 2 Temperature sensor of dryer

3 Dryer heating 1 (230V / 450W) 4 Dryer fan 1
9 Stabilizer tank 3 10 Stabilizer tank 2
11 Stabilizer tank 1 12 Bleachfix tank
13 Developer tank 14 Transport switch
15 Print collector 16 Water tank (auto top-off system)
saml04015a
1 2
3 4 5
1 Sorter transport motor 2 Large print detection (5” and up)

3 Sensor, sorter right 4 Sensor, sorter left
5 Sensor, sorter end
Service Manual 101

Develop a chemistry test strip.
Evaluate the developed test strip.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Switch OFF the machine with the main switch.
Remove the dryer rack.
Clean the dryer rack with a vacuum cleaner.
Lubricate all bearings of the dryer with pure silicon oil (P/N 18540.061.0)
,03257$17
'RQ¶WXVH75,)/2:WROXEULFDWHWKHEHDULQJVRIWKHGU\HU7KLVZLOOOHDG
WRWKHGHVWUXFWLRQRIWKHUROOHUV
Check all racks for possible mechanical damages and wear. Replace
defective parts.
Check and ensure that all racks are transporting smoothly.
Lubricate the bearings in all processor racks with TRI-FLOW.
,03257$17
75,)/2:PXVWEHXVHGIRUWKHUDFNVLQWKHSURFHVVRUEXW1(9(5IRU
WKHGU\HUUDFNV
Clean the paper outlet station and the dryer housing with a brush and a vac-
uum cleaner.
saml04016a
6 6 6 5 1 Master Lab / Master Lab+
4 3 2
1 Pulley 18T 2 Pulley 15T
3 Toothed belt 4 Friction bearing
5 Ball bearing 6 Worm gears
Check the condition of the worm gears on the main drive shaft. Use TRI-
FLOW to lubricate the worm gears, the ball bearings and the friction bear-
ings.
If a worm gear or a bearing has to be replaced, refer to chapter 12
102 Service Manual

saml04017a
5 mm
Check the belt tension of the main
98.22.56 Edition 3
drive and adjust if necessary.

5N
Remove the cover of the tank heaters and temperature/level sensors.
Clean the frame located underneath by removing all chemical residues (fur-
ring)
Check chemical tanks, pumps and hoses for possible leaks.
Open all filter housings in the replenishment tubes.
Clean the filters under running water.
1RWH %HFDUHIXOQRWWRORVHWKH2ULQJV
Remove the suction tube of the automatic top-off tank.
&$87,21
WDQN
Visually check circulation of the liquid in each working tank.
Visually check the agitation in the developer.

Visually check the air pump in the bleach.
Switch OFF the machine again.
Before reinserting the racks, check the results of the evaluated test strip, if
necessary fill new chemistry into the tanks.
1RWH &OHDQWKHWDQNVEHIRUHUHILOOLQJZLWKQHZFKHPLVWU\
Switch ON the machine.
Insert a test negative into the film deck.
Service Manual 103

Expose the negative several times.
Check the prints, they must have a clean surface, be without scratches and
the edges must be free of notches.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Check the temperature of the chemicals and the dryer (see chapter 12).
Check the replenishment rates (see chapter 12).
Make sure the pumps are self-priming, otherwise change the valves.
Check the bellows and the valves for possible leaks.
Check the volume of the remaining chemicals in the replenishment tanks to

see whether they are in proportion to each other.
Check the transport speed by exposing a print.
Start a stop watch when the leading edge of the print enters the developer
rack.
Stop the time when the print enters the bleachfix rack. The time should be
45s.
If necessary, adjust the time with the menu:

0$,17!3352&6<67(0'(97,0
Close all covers of the film processor and the dryer.
Lubricate the guide rails of the sorter with vasoline.
saml04018a
Check the belt tension. Adjust if

necessary.
8 mm
2.5 N
&RQFOXGLQJSURFHGXUHV
Check and calibrate the Densitometer.
Clean the printer table and all covers with a damp piece of cloth.
To ensure proper operation of the machine carefully watch it during the first
hour of production.
Check all further Master Lab+ peripherals (options supplied by GRETAG

IMAGING)
104 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
3RZHUVXSSO\ 5
The entire Master Lab+ is powered from the wet part.
In the wet part is a transformer with input coils from 200Vac to 240Vac producing
output voltages of 220Vac / 780VA, 19,5Vac / 450VA and 32Vac / 1000VA.
The 19.5Vac and 32Vac are rectified and filtered by the main power supply. The
resulting 5Vdc, 24Vdc and 45Vdc are fed to the DC load circuits of the wet part
and the printer part.
All supplies for the printer part are led to the 32wer ',6tributor (PODIS) from
where they are distributed throughout the printer part.
The printer electronics is grounded in the wet part via the 24VGND and the
45VGND, no grounding is provided inside the printer part.
The 45Vdc is not for direct use in the printer part but is used as input for:
o the lamp power supply, produces a stable 20Vdc for the exposure lamp
o the 34V regulator supplying the stepper motor drivers of the paper path
and the filter wheel

o the 26V switching regulator for the paper path fan (on CBO).
The 24Vdc supplies all other stepper motor drivers, motors, solenoids, fans and
lamps of the printer part.
Service Manual 105

Power supply
saml05001a
Battery BLOW
low
+24V
98.22.56 Edition 3
Battery Wet
charger DC / DC +5V section
5V
GND
Power
fail PF
+24V
Printer
power Printer
+45V
on / off GND
3RZHUVXSSO\ZHWSDUW
:LULQJ
The Mains connection starts at the connector block located in the rear part of the
electrical panel, under the connector for the modem. Thereafter it leads to the
line filter, then to the main switch, to the voltage selector and finally to the trans-
former.
For the setup of the transformer to the different voltages refer to chapter 2.4.4.
%DFNXSEDWWHULHV
Two Pb-batteries 12V / 1.9Ah – connected in series – are installed in the Master
Lab+. In case of a power fail the batteries are used to finish a pending work cycle
in the film- and/or paper processor.
During start-up of the machine, the batteries are tested under load-condition.
The power supply switches both transport motors to the batteries for about 20
seconds and monitors the voltage. If the voltage of the batteries falls below 21V,
the message ‘BATTERY OF TRANSPORT IS LOW’ appears on the screen. The error
message remains until the machine has been restarted and the batteries had
time to recharge.
The charging voltage is between 26V and 27V. The charging current is between
10mA and 200mA depending on the charging level. The batteries are on trickle
charge as long as the machine is not switched off by the main switch.
)XVHVLQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\
The power supply board and the battery charger board contain fuses.
106 Service Manual

Power supply
2OGYHUVLRQ
saml05002a
+
98.22.56 Edition 3
-
F1 Battery Charger Board
F1
F2
F3 F4 Power Supply
F5
Power supply board
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

7\SH 31 3URWHFWHGSDUW
>$@ VLRQV
F1 25 T 6.3 x 32 0028-755-42 19.5Vac of the main transformer
F3 25 T 6.3 x 32 0028-755-42 32Vac of the main transformer
24Vdc
Analog section of the MCB
Sorter Motor
Transport motor paper processor
F5 10 T 5 x 20 13.58.28
Transport motor film processor
Knife solenoid
Film loading cassette locking
solenoid
1) T = surge resisting fuse (slow blow)

F = quick acting fuse (fast blow)
Battery charger board
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
24Vdc
F1 10 T 5 x 20 13.58.28
Backup battery

Service Manual 107

Power supply
1HZYHUVLRQ
saml05003a
98.22.56 Edition 3
+
-
F6
F1
F2 F3
F4
Power Supply
F5
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
24Vdc
Analog section of the MCB
Sorter Motor
Transport motor paper processor
F5 10 T 5 x 20 13.58.28
Transport motor film processor
Knife solenoid
Film loading cassette locking
solenoid
24Vdc
F6 10 T 5 x 20 13.58.28
Backup battery

108 Service Manual

Power supply
3RZHUVXSSO\SULQWHUSDUW
(OHFWURQLFSRZHUVXSSO\
98.22.56 Edition 3
The electronics power supply consists of a primary switched, isolated AC/DC

converter. The input voltage range is 85Vac to 260Vac and the output voltages
are +5Vdc / 5A, +12Vdc / 1A and -12Vdc / 1A.
The +5Vdc is used for the logical circuits while the +/- 12Vdc supplies the
RS232 drivers on the main board.
/DPSSRZHUVXSSO\
The lamp power supply is a switched, non-isolated DC/DC converter.
The input voltage range is 10V to 60V and the output voltage is adjustable
between 4.5V and 30V.
For operation, the output voltage must be set to 20.0V (with the 25W exposure
lamp) and the input voltage must be at least 3V higher than the output voltage.
97HUPLQDOUHJXODWRU
The stepper motor drivers for the paper path and the filter wheel are specified
for a maximum input voltage of 42V. Because the supply with 45V would be too
risky, this regulator serves as an overvoltage protection and is supplied with
45V.
The power dissipation of the regulator is limited, i.e. if the product of the voltage
over the controller and the current through the controller exceeds the specified
limit, the regulator is switched off. The same happens when a short-circuit
occurs. In this case the unit must be switched OFF and ON again for the
regulator to recover.
Service Manual 109

Power supply
)XVHVLQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\
5DFNZLWKROG32',6
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml05004a
Electronics Power Supply Power

Distributor
RET +OUT PODIS

F1
Lamp Power Supply
F1
IN
PODIS
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
+24Vdc
Attenuator solenoid
Zoom drive stepper motor
Shutter motor
Knife motor
F1 5 T 5 x 20 13.54.62 Feeder motor
Film deck stepper motor
Viewing window lamp (f-deck)
Pressure mask solenoid (f-deck)
Distributor stepper motor
Distributor clutches

Electronics power supply

)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
5Vdc
F1 2 F 5 x 20 11.21.09 CPU
CBO / CBO2

110 Service Manual

Power supply
5DFNZLWKQHZ32',6
saml05005a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Electronics Power Supply

Power
Distributor
RET +OUT
PODIS
F1
Lamp Power Supply

F1 F4
F5
IN
PODIS
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
+24Vdc
Attenuator solenoid
Zoom drive stepper motor
Shutter motor
Knife motor
F1 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24 Feeder motor
Film deck stepper motor
Viewing window lamp (f-deck)
Pressure mask solenoid (f-deck)
Distributor stepper motor
Distributor clutches
+34Vdc
Stepper motor filter wheel
F4 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24
Stepper motor extractor
Stepper motor paper deck
+42Vdc
F5 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24 Exposure lamp power supply
Vacuum fan paper deck.

Electronics power supply
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
5Vdc
F1 2 F 5 x 20 11.21.09 CPU
CBO / CBO2

Service Manual 111

Power supply
)XVHERDUG
saml05006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14
)XVH 9DOXH 'LPHQ

>$@ VLRQV
F1 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater developer, paper
F2 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater bleach, paper
F3 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater stabilizer 1, paper
F6 2.5 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-79 Heater dryer 1, paper
F7 2.5 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-79 Heater dryer 2, paper
F8 2 F 6.3 x 32 14.04.34 Heater developer, film2)
F9 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater bleach, film2)
F10 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater fixer 1, film2)
F11 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater fixer 2, film2)
F12 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater stabilizer 1, film2)
F13 1 F 6.3 x 32 13.59.35 Heater stabilizer 2, film2)
F14 4 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-81 Heater dryer, film2)

2) These fuses are not used in machines without film processor and may be used
as spares.
112 Service Manual

Power supply
,QGLFDWRUVLQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\
2OGYHUVLRQ 1HZYHUVLRQ
98.22.56 Edition 3
D2 D4 D6 D8 D10
D4
D2
D1
The LED’s indicate the following when li up:
2OGYHUVLRQ 1HZYHUVLRQ
Board receives +24Vdc +24Vdc
D1 D2
Fuse F1 is good Fuse F1 is good
D2 Board receives +42Vdc D4 Board receives +24Vdc
D4 Regulator produces +34Vdc D6 Regulator produces +34Vdc
+42Vdc
D8
Fuse F5 is good
D10 Board receives +42Vdc
Service Manual 113

Power supply
6HUYLFLQJ
:HWSDUWSRZHUVXSSO\
98.22.56 Edition 3
There are no adjustments necessary.
To access the power supply:
saml01001a
Switch OFF the Master Lab+ with

the main switch and disconnect
POWER
the power cable.

ATS
Loosen the cap screw on the

drawer.
saml05009a
Pull the drawer out.

1 Power supply
2 Batteries
3 Transformer
3 2 1
&KHFNLQJWKHEDFNXSEDWWHULHV
The batteries may be checked with the following procedure:
Switch OFF the Master Lab+ with the main switch.
Disconnect both cables from the batteries.
Disconnect the cable between both batteries.
1RWH 'RQRWPHDVXUHWKHEDWWHULHVFRQQHFWHGLQVHULHV,QWKLVFDVH\RX
FDQQRWUHFRJQL]HDIDXOW\EDWWHU\
Connect a load of 2A .. 5A (e.g. spare exposure lamp) to each battery.
114 Service Manual

Power supply
&$87,21
%HDZDUHWKDWWKHODPSXVHGDVORDGJHWVYHU\KRW'RQ¶W
98.22.56 Edition 3
WRXFKLWZLWK\RXUILQJHUV\RXPD\EXUQ\RXUVHOI
Measure the voltage of the battery:

o if the voltage stays >11.5V for more than 20 seconds, the batter is ok.
o if the voltage drops below 11V during the 20 seconds, the battery has
to be replaced.
&$87,21
,IDEDWWHU\KDVWREHUHSODFHGGRQ¶WWKURZWKHPLQWRWKH
ZDVWHSDSHUEDVNHWRUGXVWELQ%HDZDUHWKDW\RXGLVSRVH
WKHEDWWHU\VWULFWO\LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHORFDOUHJXODWLRQIRU
WKHSURWHFWLRQRIWKHHQYLURQPHQW7KH\KDYHWREHWUHDWHGDV
VSHFLDOUHIXVH
Reconnect the cables to the batteries.
Switch ON the Master Lab+.
3ULQWHUSDUWSRZHUVXSSO\
To access the power supply:
saml05010a
Remove the cover over the elec-

tronic rack.
saml05011a
Turn both screws holding the elec-

tronic board 90o counterclockwise
and tilt the board down.
Service Manual 115

Power supply
'$1*(5
%HYHU\FDUHIXOEHKLQGWKHSURWHFWLYHFRYHUDUHGDQJHURXV
98.22.56 Edition 3
YROWDJHV
saml05012
Turn the four screws of the protec-

tive cover 90o counterclockwise
and remove the protective cover.
Remove the transparent protec-

tive plate.
(OHFWURQLFSRZHUVXSSO\
To measure and adjust the voltages proceed as follows:
Switch OFF the machine.
Get access to the power supply as described in 5.4.3
Connect a voltmeter between the test point ‘GND’ and ‘+5V’ on the CBO/
CBO2 board.
saml05013a
CBO
Paper extractor
Paper deck
Filterwheel
Filmdeck
Zoom
U14
U8
U15
U9
U7
J410 J407
J412
+24V +45V
GND
+5V +40V
116 Service Manual

Power supply
saml05014a
CBO2
98.22.56 Edition 3
F2 F1
+34V
+24V
GND 42V
F3
+5V
saml05015a

R21 Turn the potentiometer (R21) on

F1
the electronics power supply
board until the measured voltage
is between 5.0V and 5.1V.
6XSSO\IRUWKHH[SRVXUHODPS
:$51,1*
:KHQ\RXZRUNDURXQGWKHH[SRVXUHODPSEHDZDUHWKDWWKH
ODPSDQGWKHODPSVXSSRUWPD\EHYHU\KRW
'RQ¶WWRXFKWKHKRWDUHDV\RXPD\EXUQ\RXUILQJHUV
The supply voltage for the 250W exposure lamp must be set to 20.0V+/-0.1V.
Service Manual 117

Power supply
saml05016a
Open the lamp house cover and
98.22.56 Edition 3
manually activate the lamp house
cover switch
Connect a voltmeter to the termi-

nal block in the lamp house.
Switch on the lamp with the menu

0$,17!
Move further down the menu through:

35,17(5/$036<602'(21
&$87,21
'RQ¶WXVH5(7DQG287WRDGMXVWWKHODPSYROWDJH
7KHYROWDJHGURSEHWZHHQSRZHUVXSSO\DQGODPSLVWRR
KLJK7KHODPSZRXOGQRWKDYHHQRXJKSRZHU
saml05017a
RET +OUT
Turn the potentiometer R13 on the
F1
lamp power supply until the volt-
Lamp Power Supply
age is 20.0V+/-0.1V
R18 R13
IN
After readjusting the lamp voltage you have to recalibrate the system.
Disconnect the voltmeter from the terminal block.
Close the lamp house cover.
Select the menu

&+(&.!35,17(5(;326(
and proceed as described in the Operating Manual.
118 Service Manual

Power supply
6FKHPDWLFV
:HWSDUW
98.22.56 Edition 3
7LWOH 'UDZLQJ 3DJHVVKHHWV

Sch. ELT. ALIM. M_L (circuit diagram) 17319.014.2 1 to 4
Alimentatore Master Lab (layout drawing) 14074.243.2 1
Overview Fig. 1 1
Overview ATEX 14074.208.0 1
Schematic ATEX 15074.0119.0 1
Layout ATEX 15074.0119.0 1
Overview Power control 14074.208.0 1
Schematics Power control SE0133.SCH 1
Layout Power control C.S. B226 1
Schematics Batery charger ATEX 15074.0120.0 1
Layout battery charger ATEX 15074.0120.0 1
Schematics battery charger Power control 1
Layout battery charger Power control C.S. B227 1
3ULQWHUSDUW

PBA Power Distributor PODIS (new) 34.79.13 ES 1
PBA Power Distributor PODIS (new) 34.79.13 AZ 1
PBA Power Distributor PODIS (old) 34.79.13 AZ 2
Service Manual 119

120
Power supply
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
3ULQWHUHOHFWURQLFV 6
2YHUYLHZ
saml06001a
ADM
Film Deck slave
Slave E
Distributor
Measuring A/D converter
System Slave C
Paper deck
Paper
Memory Transport
Card
Keyboard
Frame #
Control
Densitometer Main Board MOF
80186
D188/D19C Processor
CPU 80186 Indexprint
slave
Lineprinter
Slave D
Filterwheel
Pricing Optical
Modem System
Aux. 1
Aux. 2 Power Supply

Printer section
Slave B Power Supply

Wet section Wet section
Date / Time
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI&38V\VWHP
Service Manual 121

Printer electronics
0DLQSURFHVVRUERDUG&38
2YHUYLHZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
The main processor board is the heart of the Master Lab+. The software on this
board controls the entire machine. All sensors are connected to this board either
directly or indirectly, and all acting parts are controlled from here.
Furthermore the main processor board maintains all kinds of communication,

e.g. the dialogue with the keyboard, printing on the line printer or reading from
the densitometer.
saml06002a
36 32 20
9 x RS232 8 Bit Bus IN OUT IN
Serial Bus Interface

Parallel A/D
Communication Clock for Memory
Interface Interface
Interface Backup
General General Data Code

CPU
Purpose Purpose Memory Memory
80186
Input Port Output Port 256 kByte 768 kByte
Reset Backup
Circuit Supply
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH&38
7KHSURFHVVRU
Processor type AMD 80186

Clock rate 8MHz
Single bus cycle 125ns
Memory cycle time 4 cycles for even word/byte access
8 cycles for odd word access

Address range 1024 kilobytes
5HVHWFLUFXLW
This functional unit is used to initialize the hardware. When the power supply is
switched on, the reset signal will be kept active 43ms longer than the supply volt-
age needs to reach the allowable minimum value of 4.75V
The reset signal may also be triggered by actuating the input signals HARD-
WARE RESET, SOFTWARE RESET or BREAK.
122 Service Manual

Printer electronics
saml06003a
Supply Voltage
£ 4.75V
UART
Reset jumper
Reset CPU 80186
98.22.56 Edition 3
Keyboard Logic
GPO Port
(F-Clear)
Offboard
Slave C
Software Reset
Slave D
(GPO 0)
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIUHVHWFLUFXLW
&RGHPHPRU\
The code memory stores the machine program (software). The maximum stor-
age capacity of 768 kilobytes is divided in 6 EPROMS of 128 kilobytes each.
The EPROMS must be inserted in the corresponding IC-sockets U15 to U20.

Two larger EPROMS may be inserted in the sockets U17 and U20 replacing the
chips in socket U16, U17, U10 and U20.
The jumper settings are described in chapter 6.4.
The maximum access time for the code memory is 162ns with a CPU 80168 run-
ning at 8MHz.
'DWDPHPRU\
The data memory holds the setup paprameters for the machine. The maximum
storage capacity is 256 kilobytes, using two static RAM chips (SRAM) of 128
kilobytes each.
The jumper settings are described in chapter 6.4.
The maximum access time for the data memory is 170ns with a CPU 80168 run-
ning at 8MHz.
%DFNXSVXSSO\
This functional unit maintains the supply voltage to the data memory thus pre-
serving the memory contents on shutdown of the regular power supply. Buffer-
ing however is limited to the +VBAT voltage (nominal value = 5V). Upon shut-
down of the mains supply the battery maintains the supply voltage.
saml06004a
+5V
+VBat
Lithium Battery
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIEDFNXSVXSSO\
Service Manual 123

Printer electronics
The higher voltage (either the nominal +5V or the battery) will be used as +VBAT
to supply the data memory. The battery capacity is 1.7Ah.
Depending on the production tolerances of the used components the working
98.22.56 Edition 3
life of the battery varies between a minimum of 11 months and an average of 10
years.
If you encounter an error message indicating a low battery, save your data on a
memory card immediately. Then replace the lithium battery (refer to chapter
6.9.3) and restore the saved data afterwards.
6HULDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQLQWHUIDFH
This functional unit allows to address nine peripheral units using a serial link.
The operation mode is asynchronous and full-duplex which means that data can
be sent and received simultaneously.
The channels A, B, C, E and K use the same selectable baud rate, while for all
other channels it may be selected independently.
This functional unit includes a clock generator, 6 baud rate generators and 9
serial interface channels.
The clock generator generates the 1.8432MHz supplied to the baud generator
and the serial interface channels. With this clock, the baud rate generator cre-
ates the transfer rates for the serial interface channels. The serial interface acts
as a parallel / serial converter.
A ‘BREAK’ on channel A ()!&/($5!) actuates a reset, while a ‘BREAK’

on channel I may trigger an NMI (selectable via J2).
3RVLWLRQ 0RGH
1-2 The BREAK signal on the interface I is ineffective
2-3 The BREAK signal on the interface I triggers a non maskable interrupt (NMI)
7DE -VHWWLQJIRU%5($.VLJQDORILQWHUIDFH,
The interface configuration is as follows:

A Keyboard 19200 bps RS232 mode (+12V, -12V)

B Wet part 19200 bps special mode (isolated by opto-isolator)
C Paper transport 19200 bps special mode (0, +5V, inverted signals)
E Densitometer 1200 bps RS232 mode (+5V TTL) for external communication
F Line printer 9600 bps RS232 mode (+12V, -12V) for ext. communication
G Modem 2400 bps RS232 mode (+12V, -12V) for ext. communication
H Aux. 1 19200 bps RS232 mode (+12V, -12V) for ext. communication
I Aux., CRT 9600 bps RS232 mode (+12V, -12V) for ext. communication
K Backprinter 1200 bps special mode (0, +5V, inverted signals)
7DE ,QWHUIDFHFRQILJXUDWLRQ
124 Service Manual

Printer electronics
The data format is as follows:
q 8 data bits per character

98.22.56 Edition 3
q 1 stop bit
q even parity
3DUDOOHOLQWHUIDFH
This functional unit allows the integration of peripheral sensors and drivers. It
provides 36 inputs and 32 outputs. 16 inputs are latched and from there 8
latched outputs are led to the INT3 and two are led to the INT1.
The inputs and outputs are TTL compatible. All inputs are provided with a RC
filter and a pull-up resistor.
(3/' All inputs use a programmable EPLD (type 5C180) which allows the integration
of the interrupt logic including all FF and OR connectivity.
24 outputs are latched (3 latches of 8 bits), the remaining outputs are part of the
EPLD
$',QWHUIDFH
The analog - to - digital interface serves as connection between the analog data
of the measuring system, the film deck and the paper deck on one side and the
digital data processing of the 80186 CPU on the other side.
All elements of the measuring system are supplied with electrically isolated volt-
ages generated on the CPU board.
saml06005a
1 Uref (on board)
8
CPU 1 1 1
A/D prog.
S/H MUX
Converter Gain
12 12
12 integrators
Control
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI$'LQWHUIDFH
The A/D interface provides 20 analog inputs. To reduce noise, the 12 signals
from the photo diodes of the scan array and the paper deck are integrated inter-
nally. The remaining 8 inputs are measured directly. There is an additional input
for the internal reference voltage.
A control logic switches through the channels. It controls the read/conversion

mode of the A/D converter and the integrators.
Service Manual 125

Printer electronics
0HPRU\FDUGLQWHUIDFH
The bus interface is used to integrate a memory card into the system by con-
necting it to the microprocessor bus.
98.22.56 Edition 3
The maximum addressable storing capacity is 32 Kilobytes.
1RWH 8SWRVRIWZDUHYHUVLRQDNLORE\WHPHPRU\FDUGLVXVHG
8SIURPVRIWZDUHYHUVLRQDNLORE\WHPHPRU\FDUGLVXVHG
*HQHUDOSXUSRVHLQSXWSRUW
The general purpose input port provides 8 inputs. These inputs are:
o DIP switches (2 - 6)
o RAM/ROM select of external memory card
o Check of external memory card (low = connected)
o Battery check (high = battery discharged)
*HQHUDOSXUSRVHRXWSXWSRUW
The general purpose output port provides 8 outputs used for general system
functions on the board.
&ORFN
The clock is not implemented because the clock of the wet part is used as sys-
tem clock.
3RZHUFRQVXPSWLRQ
Voltage +5V +12V -12V

Power consumption (measured values) 1.6A 80mA 80mA
126 Service Manual

Printer electronics
,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&38ERDUG
saml06006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
D7
D5
D6
Battery D 18
)LJ ,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&38
LED When ON
D5 Board receives -12Vdc power
D6 Board receives +12Vdc power
D7 Board receives + 5Vdc power
The LED 18 on the CPU displays three conditions recognizable by the blinking
rhythm illustrated below.
saml06007a
on
CPU ok
3s 8s 6s approx. 1Hz
off
on
EPROM defect
3s approx. 1Hz
off
on
RAM defect
3s
off
Reset of the CPU
)LJ 3XOVHGLDJUDPRI/(''
Service Manual 127

Printer electronics
/LVWRI',3VZLWFKHVDQGMXPSHUV
6RIWZDUHYHUVLRQEHORZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
',3VZLWFK
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ 2SWLRQ
6
SW1 OFF Shows run-time error ON For R&D purposes only
SW2 OFF without shutter/distributor ON with shutter/distributor
SW3 OFF with wet part ON without wet part
SW4 OFF with lens turret ON without lens turret
SW5 OFF with film processor ON without film processor
SW6 OFF CPU test off ON CPU test on
SW7 OFF unused ON ---
-XPSHU 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ 2SWLRQ
J2 1-2 BREAK I (NMI) disabled 2-3 NMI enabled
&RGHPHPRU\ &RGHPHPRU\
J6 2-3 6 x 128 kilobyte 1-2 2 x 128 kilobyte
J7 2 - 3, 4 - 5 (U15, U18) 2 - 3, 4 - 5 (U15, U18)
J8 2 - 3, 4 - 5 U16, U19 X,X 2 x 256 kilobyte
J9 X U17, U20 1-2 (U17, U20)
J28 2-3 Battery on 1-2 Battery off
J30 open No reset of CPU 1-2 Reset of CPU
6RIWZDUHYHUVLRQDQGKLJKHU
',3VZLWFK
'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ 2SWLRQ
6
SW3 OFF with wet part ON without wet part
SW4 OFF with lens turret ON without lens turret
SW5 OFF with film processor ON without film processor
SW6 OFF CPU test off ON CPU test on
-XPSHU 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ 2SWLRQ
J2 1-2 BREAK I (NMI) disabled 2-3 NMI enabled

&RGHPHPRU\ &RGHPHPRU\
J6 2-3 6 x 128 kilobyte 1-2 2 x 128 kilobyte
J7 2 - 3, 4 - 5 (U15, U18) 2 - 3, 4 - 5 (U15, U18)
J8 2 - 3, 4 - 5 U16, U19 X,X 2 x 256 kilobyte
J9 X U17, U20 1-2 (U17, U20)
J28 2-3 Battery on 1-2 Battery off
J30 open No reset of CPU 1-2 Reset of CPU
128 Service Manual

Printer electronics
saml06025a
J18
98.22.56 Edition 3
J14
J17
S178
1 7 J2 J16
1
32 17 32 17
U14 RAM U21 RAM

J13 1 16 1 16 J11
1
J7
1
J8 1
1 J6 J1
1
J30 J9
1 8
J28
1 J25
+
J27
A / D converter
Battery
DC-DC
converter J24
-
J26
)LJ /RFDWLRQRIMXPSHUVSOXJVDQG',3VZLWFKHV
3LQDVVLJQPHQWRQSRZHUVXSSO\SOXJ-
3LQ 'HVLJQDWLRQ
1 +12V (input)
2 +5V (Input)
3 Code (Input)
4 Ground (Input)
5 Ground (input)
6 -12V (input)
7 Ground (output to CBO)
8 +5V (output to CBO)
Service Manual 129

Printer electronics
&RQWURO%RDUG&%2DQG&%2
2YHUYLHZ&%2
98.22.56 Edition 3
The control board contains the stepper motor drivers and the control for the sole-
noids of the Printer.The stepper motor drivers are either triggered directly by the
CPU or via two slave processors located on the Control Board called slave C
and D.
The control board also processes the signals received from the sensors (light
barriers or Hall elements) that monitor the functions of the Printer.
Slave C is a microcontroller 8031 (U6) with its EPROM 27128 (U4). It controls
in particular the paper transport which includes:
o paper deck
o zoom drive
o paper extractor
saml06008a
D20
J403 J416
internal tests
Test connector
U13
J417
U6
U11
U4
for
Slave D Slave C
Filterwheel Papertransp.
Paper extractor
Paper deck
Filterwheel
Filmdeck
Zoom
U15
U14
U7
U9
U8
J411
)LJ &%2
Slave C also controls the slave E, located in the distributor with its own micro-
controller and EPROM.
The slave D controls the filter wheel. It has the same microcontroller (U13) and
EPROM (11) as the slave C.
As of software version 1.30 a Counter CBO board is installed on connector J411

in series with the print counter. This board suppresses the single count signal
for the print counter when the Master Lab+ is switched on.
130 Service Manual

Printer electronics
2YHUYLHZ&%2
The CBO2 is an updated design of the CBO. It contains the same functions as
the former CBO; drivers for the stepper motors and the controls for the sole-
98.22.56 Edition 3
noids.
The print counter is now connected directly to J411 and no longer via an addi-
tional circuit board.
saml06009a
Filterwheel Film deck
D20
Extractor
J417
D11
Paper deck D9 S4
Zoom S2
)LJ &%2
The new CBO2 has improved stepper motor drivers and additional features
required for APS film decks. Also new is the connection of the ADM (Automatic
Densitometer).
The test connector J417 is normally used for internal tests. As an exception, it
may be used with old cables from the backprinter in the Master Lab.
Service Manual 131

132

)LJ
Printer electronics
HW Reset
RS 232 Reset SLAVE C
&%2
+ 45V >=1
+ 40V
+ 24V
Pwr.Gnd clock GSD
Mem
+ 5V PIO I set 200 Magazine motor
Log.Gnd L 6508 PORT Adr. direction
Knife motor DC L 298 8255
Port A CPU
%ORFNGLDJUDPV
8031
GSD
%ORFNGLDJUDPRI&%2
Feeder motor DC 200 S Deck motor
Port B SLAVE C
Paper Feeder Data
Feeder width end
Print Port C
GSD
200 Zoom motor
Int 0
Int 1
Int 0 Int 1
>=1 >=1 Zoom &
Knife right Home
Knife left
Feeder Printerpos.
45 V
Feeder Processorpos.
PWM
3524
Vacuum fan ON/OFF DC Vacuum fan
Print counter
Hall switches Splice Paper end Print counter
1 2 3 4
>=1 Cassette present
Cassette code 0...15
HW Reset
Paper width
Start LED Obj. ON/OFF
Distributor Distr. active OB 5
Busy OB 4
Error OB 3
OB 2
SLAVE E Reset & OB 1
Objective changed
Distr. connected
saml06010a
Service Manual
Service Manual
)LJ
+42V
Print counter
+34V
+24V
&%2
Pwr GND
Vacuum fan +24V
GND
Panorama feeder
(Magnet) Reset from CPU
Sens ML digit.
Extractor
%ORFNGLDJUDPRI&%2
Control
8255
EPROM
Knife motor
Paper deck
Feeder motor
Control
Feeder Paper
Board width
CPU 80C32
Feeder
end
TxD
Zoom
Knife RxD
right
Control
Knife
left
Zoom
Feeder home
OB 5
Printer pos.
Feeder
OB 4
Proc. pos.
Lens-Sensor
OB 3
Paper width Board

Hall switches
OB 2
Splice
OB 1
Obj changed
Cassette code
Paper width
Paper
Start
Cassette present
OB 5
OB 4
OB 3
OB 2
OB 1
Obj changed
distributor Distr. active

Busy
Error
Reset
Distr. conn.
To CPU
HW Reste
133
Printer electronics
saml06011a
Printer electronics
saml06012a
Main CPU
Backprinter
Shutter
motor
Shutter
Shutter board
98.22.56 Edition 3
open
Serial 3 Shutter
(Reserve) closed
Serial 4
(Reserve)
EPROM
82510
SRAM
Serial DATA DATA DATA
80C188
Film cleaner
to Host
CPU
ADDR ADDR ADDR
Index VBatt
UART
Reset
DIP-Switch
ADM
DATA
Battery
MLCPU
UART
RxD
To CPU
80C32 Reset
TxD
LED array
MOF
Filterwheel
Control
EPROM
80C31
CPU
Light
attenuator
Home pos.
Filterwheel
Light shaft
code 1
Reset
Light shaft
code 2
To CPU
Film deck
Control
motor
Negative
clamp
Film deck
+24V
Negative
viewer
Film notch pos. 2

Film notch pos. 1
Film deck code 1

Film deck code 2
Film deck code 3

Film deck code 4
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI&%2
)XVHVRQ&%2DQG&%2
)XVHVRQ&%2
The CBO contains no fuses!
134 Service Manual

Printer electronics
)XVHVRQWKH&%2
saml06013a
98.22.56 Edition 3
F1
F2 F3
)LJ )XVHVRQWKH&%2
9DOXH 'LPHQVLRQ
)XVH 7\SH 31 3URWHFWHGSDUWV
>$@ >PP@
F1 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24 +34Vdc
Stepper motor paper deck

Stepper motor extractor
Stepper motor filter wheel
F2 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24 +24Vdc
Knife motor
Feeder motor
Panorama feeder motor
Light attenuator solenoid
Shutter motor
Stepper motor film deck

Negative clamp
Negative viewer lamp
Stepper motor zoom
Mirror motor (Customizer)
Format wheel motor (optical APS)
F3 6.3 T 5 x 20 11.21.24 +42Vdc
Vacuum fan

Service Manual 135

Printer electronics
,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&%2DQGWKH&%2
&%2 &%2
98.22.56 Edition 3
+12V
+24V
+34V
+42V
-12V
+ 5V
D 20
D 20
D 11
D9
1
D20 When ON indicates zoom in D20 When ON indicates zoom in
home position home position
D9/1 Not used
D9/2 Failure RAM-Battery
Continuously ON when failure
D9/3 Failure RAM
Continuously ON when failure
D9/4 Paper transport
Shortly ON during communica-
tion
ADM
tion
D9/6 Index-Slave
tion
D9/7 CBO-CPU
tion
D9/8 MOF
tion
D9/9 Not used
D9/10 Not used
136 Service Manual

Printer electronics
.H\ERDUG
2YHUYLHZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
The keyboard is the man-machine interface. It communicates with the main pro-
cessor via a serial interface. The microprocessor in the keyboard receives the
commands for the LCD display and the LED’s. When a key is activated a corre-
sponding key code is sent to the main processor.
saml06016a
POWER
ON OFF
TIMER
F
FILM FORMAT PAPER
MENU DATA CORRECTIONS

COMM CHECK
7 8 9 0 CLEAR FIX
-
SET DISP
4 5 6
ENTER
MAINT STAT
1 2 3 .
OPERATION
MAN AUTO ORDER STOP
)LJ 9LHZRINH\ERDUG
The keyboard is based on a matrix of 7 columns by 6 rows, with the keys situ-
ated at the nodes on the PBA.
First, the microprocessor feeds a logical ‘0’ to the first row of the matrix and a
logical ‘1’ to all the other lines. Then all columns are read in consecutive order.
With the next step, the logical ‘0’ is fed to the second row and so on. If a key is
closed, the row and the corresponding column of the node have a logical ‘0’ the
corresponding key code is then sent to the main processor.
6SHFLDOFRQQHFWLRQRINH\V
The keys 21!, 2))! and 7,0(5! including their LED’s are connected
directly to the wet part and NO electrical connection with the printer part is made.
,03257$17
7KH0DVWHU/DEFDQQRWEHVZLWFKHG21RU2))ZLWKRXWWKHNH\ERDUG
6SHFLDONH\FRPELQDWLRQ
A reset can be triggered on the main processor with the special key combination
)!&/($5!.
Service Manual 137

138

)LJ
Printer electronics
Contrast
RS232 Buffer
Control-Bus
RXD
%ORFNGLDJUDP
TXD
Data-Bus LCD 4 x 40 Characters
CTS
%ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKHNH\ERDUG
RTS
Latch
Power Control
Maskprogrammed
Buzzer
MCB Key - Matrix
1 x 6 Key - Matrix
+ 1
7 x 6
( Menu Keys )
- 1
Microprocessor
( 41 Keys )
saml06017a
Service Manual
Printer electronics
/&'GLVSOD\
The LCD displays 4 x 40 characters. It is controlled by a microprocessor via an

8 bit bus. The display supports the whole ASCII character set without control
98.22.56 Edition 3
characters. The microprocessor provides additional functions such as absolute

cursor addressing, erase, video attributes, cursor blink and beep.
There are two types of displays (driver and software):
q standard European languages and Russian (Cyrillic) P/N 37.05.69

q Japanese P/N 34.55.31
saml06018a
Display controller
)LJ /RFDWLRQRIGLVSOD\FRQWUROOHU
,03257$17
7RHQVXUHDFRUUHFWRSHUDWLRQLWLVDEVROXWHO\QHFHVVDU\WRKDYHWKHULJKW
FRPELQDWLRQRIGLVSOD\FRQWUROOHUDQG(3520
(3520YHUVLRQ (3520
&RQWUROOHUQXPEHU
>8@ >31@
HD44780A00 1.02 34.59.07
HD44780A02 1.03 37.06.48
The following combinations have to be watched:

/DQJXDJH 'ULYHU31 (352031
ja 34.55.31 34.59.07
en, de, fr and so on 37.05.69 34.59.07
ru 37.05.69 37.06.48
1) Language abbreviations according DIN 2335 and ISO 639
Service Manual 139

Printer electronics
/('¶V
The LED’s assigned to certain keys may be addressed via the serial interface
using an ESC commands. Via a latch on the bus, the microprocessor converts
98.22.56 Edition 3
the commands to signals triggering the LED’s.
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
The serial interface allows the connection of external devices to the Master Lab+
saml06019a
Densitometer
Modem
Line printer
Aux. 1
Aux. 2
)LJ /D\RXWRIVHULDOLQWHUIDFH
Such devices are:
q Densitometer 1200 Baud (TTL-level)

q Modem 2400 Baud
q Line printer (for software version 9600 Baud
below 5.0)
q Aux. 1 9600 Baud
q Aux. 2 19200 Baud
With the exception of the interface for the Densitometer, all interfaces meet the
RS232 standard and have a 25 pin Sub-D connector.
The Densitometer is connected via a 9 pin Sub-D connector which includes a

connection to a current source to recharge the batteries in the Densitometer.
The charging circuit is located on the CPU.
The data format for serial communication is:

o 8 data bits per character
o 1 stop bit
o even parity.
140 Service Manual

Printer electronics
0HPRU\FDUG
2YHUYLHZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
The plug-in CMOS-RAM memory card with integrated lithium battery is used to
backup and restore setup data. The required storage capacity of the memory
card is 8kilobytes for main software below version 1.30. As from main software
version 1.30 and upward the required storage capacity is 32kilobytes. The
memory card is equipped with a switch to protect data from being overwritten
(write protect switch). As the card is delivered, the switch is in the µQRWSURWHFWHG¶
position.
saml06020a
)LJ 9LHZRIPHPRU\FDUG
The memory card stores the machine specific data (based on software version
3.16), i.e.:
o all film memories
o all paper memories
o all format memories
o master memory
o exposure memory
o adjustment value of film position for several film decks
o setup values of the wet part
o statistics (NOD / MAD)
o quality (chemistry) reference and corrections only, no daily data
o ADM calibration
o backprinter text string
o index calibration values
For further information on handling the memory card, please consult the ‘Oper-
ating Manual’ supplied with every machine.
:$51,1*
'RQRWOHDYHWKHPHPRU\FDUGLQWKHPDFKLQHGXULQJQRUPDO
RSHUDWLRQRWKHUZLVHWKHGDWDPD\EHRYHUZULWWHQRUGH
VWUR\HGXSRQDPDFKLQHIDLOXUH
6WRUHWKHPHPRU\FDUGLQDVDIHSODFH
Service Manual 141

Printer electronics
5HVWRULQJGDWDIURPWKHPHPRU\FDUG
When restoring data from the memory card there are some special behaviors of
the software to be known:
98.22.56 Edition 3
5HVWRULQJDILOPFKDQQHO
q When you restore a VLQJOH film channel, the DX-table is 127 restored from
the memory card!
q When you restore all film channels, the DX-table is also read from the mem-
ory card.
5HVWRULQJDOOGDWD
q When you restore DOO data (using the menu &200!6<67(05(
6725(35,17(5$//) the NOD and MAD data are 127 read from
the memory card.
q If you want these data as well, you have to restore them separately with the
menu &200!6<67(05(6725(35,17(527+(5
12'0$'.
$GMXVWPHQWVUHSODFHPHQWV
$GMXVWPHQWVRQWKH&38
There is no adjustment required on the Printer CPU.
5HSODFLQJWKH&38
saml01001a
If not already done, make a

POWER
backup of all machine data on a
memory card.
ATS
Switch off the machine.
saml05010a
Remove the cover of the electron-

ics
Disconnect all the cables from the

CPU.
Remove all screws holding the

CPU and remove the PBA.
142 Service Manual

Printer electronics
Remove all the EPROMS containing software from the old CPU and insert
them at the same places on the new CPU board.
After replacement, proceed in reverse order.

98.22.56 Edition 3
Set the battery jumper on the new board to ON.
Restore the previously written backup of the machine data.
5HSODFLQJWKHEDFNXSEDWWHU\RQWKH&38
To replace the battery on the CPU proceed as follows:
If not already done, make a backup of the data.
Switch off the machine and open the cover of the electronics as described
in chapter 6.9.2
Set the jumper J28 to OFF

saml06021a
Desolder the battery
+
Solder the new battery.
J28
+ Battery -
ON/OFF
1RWH :DWFKWKHSRODULW\
&$87,21
VSHFLDOUHIXVH
Set the jumper again to ON.

Switch on the machine
Restore the previously written backup with the machine data from the mem-
ory card to the printer as described in chapter 6.8.2
&OHDULQJWKH5$0¶V
Before upgrading software or after replacing the backup battery it is necessary

to bring the RAM’s on the CPU into a defined status, i.e. all RAM locations are
in the same logical ‘1’ status. An undefined status could cause start-up problems
due to wrong parameters in the RAM’s.
Service Manual 143

Printer electronics
A RAM clear kit V1.00 (P/N 37.63.25) is available to bring the RAM’s into a
defined status. This kit contains a description about the procedure and 4
EPROMS:
o RAM clearer Version 1.00 CPU U15 P/N 37.63.26
98.22.56 Edition 3
The procedure is as follows:
Save your data onto the memory card.
First switch OFF the machine at the keyboard followed by the main switch.
Open the cover of the electronic rack as described in chapter 6.9.2
On the CPU board, remove the inserted EPROM’s U15 to U20.
1RWH 8VHRQO\GHGLFDWHGWRROVWRKDQGOHWKH(3520¶VDQGWDNHVSHFLDO
FDUHQRWGHVWUR\LQJWKHOD\HUEHWZHHQ,&VRFNHWDQGFLUFXLWERDUG
Insert the four EPROM’s delivered in the kit.
Ensure that the jumper J28 for the battery on the CPU board is set to ON.
Watch indicator D18 on the CPU

saml06026a
board. It has to blink at a fre-
quency of 1Hz for about 17 sec-
onds indicating the boot status.
After the boot sequence the indicator D18 stays ON for several seconds
indicating the running RAM clearer program writing FF (Hex) to each
address of the memory.
A following unstable blinking sequence indicates a successful finish of the
program.
saml06027a
Memory will be
End
Blinking indicates a properly cleaned memory

Start
cleared and tested
$GMXVWLQJWKH&%2&%2
There are no adjustment, neither on the CBO nor on the CBO2.
5HSODFLQJWKH&%2&%2
First switch OFF the machine at the keyboard followed by the main switch
144 Service Manual

Printer electronics
Open the cover of the electronics as described in chapter 6.9.2
saml05011a
Turn both screws holding the elec-
98.22.56 Edition 3
tronic board 90o counterclockwise

and tilt the board down.
Disconnect all cables from the

CBO respectively CBO2.
Remove all screws holding the

board and remove the board.
Remove all the EPROMS contain-

ing software from the old board
and insert them at the same
places on the new board.
Reassemble in reverse order
&RQWUDVWDGMXVWPHQWIRUWKH/&'
saml06022a
Above the 2))! key – in the upper
Contrast right corner – is a recessed potentiom-
potmeter eter.
POWER Take a screw driver #1 and adjust

ON OFF
the contrast.
TIMER
5HSODFLQJWKHEDFNXSEDWWHU\LQWKHPHPRU\FDUG
:$51,1*
1HYHUUHPRYHWKHEDWWHU\IURPWKHPHPRU\FDUGLILWLVQRW
SRZHUHGE\DQRWKHUVRXUFH<RXORVH\RXUGDWD
5HSODFHWKHEDWWHU\DOZD\VZLWKWKHPHPRU\FDUGSOXJJHG
LQWRWKHPDFKLQH7KLVHQVXUHVWKDWWKHFDUGLVXQGHUSRZHU
DQGWKHGDWDUHPDLQVWRUHG
Service Manual 145

Printer electronics
saml06023a
Place your finger on the hook and

remove the battery cover.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Take out the lithium battery.
&$87,21
VSHFLDOUHIXVH
saml06024a
Confirm the polarity as shown and

insert the new battery.
Insert the battery cover.
Remove the memory card from

the machine.
146 Service Manual

Printer electronics
6FKHPDWLFV

98.22.56 Edition 3
Master Lab+ Overview 34.58.52 ES 1 to 10
Functional units on CPU board 34.58.52 BS 1

PBA Main Processor CPU (old type of CPU) 34.74.24 AZ 1
PBA Main Processor CPU 34.59.83 AZ 1
PBA Main Processor CPU 34.59.83 AZ 2
PBA Control Board CBO 34.59.85 AZ 1

PBA Control Board 2 CBO2 36.45.20 AZ 1
PBA Control Board 2 (CPU 80C188) 36.45.20 BS 1
PBA Control Board 2 (reduced layout drawing) 36.45.20 BS 4
PBA Counter CBO 36.08.82 ES 1
PBA Counter CBO 34.08.82 AZ 1
PBA Keyboard 1 34.75.61 AZ 1

PBA Keyboard 2 34.78.25 AZ 1
Memory card reader cpl. 34.79.15 ES 1

Memory card reader cpl. 34.79.15 AZ 1
Memory card reader cpl. 34.79.15 AZ 2
PBA Serial Interface SERIN 34.55.44 ES 1

PBA Serial Interface SERIN (old) 34.55.44 AZ 1 only
Gruppo Connectori Accesori (new) 14074.227.1 1
Service Manual 147

148
Printer electronics
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
2SWLFDOV\VWHP 7
The optical system of the Master Lab+ includes the lamp house, the light shaft,
the measuring optics and the printing optics.
saml07001a
LAMP HOUSE
Exposure lamp 24V/250W
IR cut-off Filter
Band-pass filter
Light attenuator/Testfilter
Filterwheel
Filter motor
Light cone
Light shaft
110, Disc, 126
135, APS, 120
Film deck 110 autom.

135 autom.
APS autom.
Universal
Shutter (in x40 and

Index only)
Lens turret
Lock mechanism
Lens code reader
Zoom lens motor
Zoom lens
Print
Paper deck
)LJ 2SWLFDOV\VWHP
Service Manual 149

Optical system
The negative is measured in the same light path that is used for printing. The
advantage of this system is that all parameters affecting the exposure light will
be included in the measurement. The printing filters are also used during the
measuring cycle.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Below the film level, the light path is split into two sections:
q The first section with the printing optics is located in the prolongation of the
optical axis. It comprises either of a fixed-focus lens or a zoom lens. The
printing optics projects the negative onto the paper. The zoom lens has a
motor driven adjustment of the magnification. The optical distance between
the negative and the print is 800mm (31,5”).
q The second section of the light path makes the light pass through a small
gap below the film level where it is deflected horizontally by 90o via a mirror.
The light is projected via optics and filters to the photo diodes of the scan-
ner. The mirror and the measuring optics are located in the optic box which
has to be exchanged according to the film formats. A filter pack is located
in front of the photodiodes of the measuring system (MESY).
All Master Lab+ x40 models and machines with index printer have a shutter
located between the film deck and the printing optics. This shutter doesn’t affect
the light path used for measuring.
/DPSKRXVH
The filter wheel, the light attenuator, the test filter, the pre-filters, the lamp and a
fan are located in the lamp house. There are two guiding rails in the lamp house
to mount the light shaft. The code of the light shaft is sensed by two light barriers.
An additional light barrier is used to detect the home position of the filter wheel.
A fan is provided to cool the lamp. In Master Lab’s this fan is connected in par-
allel to the lamp where as in the Master Lab+ it is connected fix to 24Vdc. The
electrical polarity is correct, if the air is exhausted from the lamp house to the
back.
The pre-filter closest to the lamp is an IR cutoff filter (heat protection filter), the
second filter is a band-pass filter. When mounting the filters, make sure that the
surface with the black dot is away from the lamp.The coated side faces the lamp.
saml07002a
Coated area
Black dot
)LJ 9LHZRIILOWHU
150 Service Manual

Optical system
)LOWHUZKHHO
The filter wheel is an aluminum disk divided into six sections. These sections are
used for:
98.22.56 Edition 3
o three diachroic color filter sections (blue, green and red)

o two opaque sections and
o a fully transparent section
saml07003a
)LJ )LOWHUZKHHOVHFWLRQV
The disk has a home position indicator, sensed by a light barrier. The filter wheel
is belt-driven by a stepper motor. The following drive circuits are used:
o with the CBO: a GSD-200, controlled by a microprocessor
o with the CBO2: a L297 and two L6203
The filter wheel acts as a light valve for the exposure cycle and for the frame
scanning. The slave processor is controlled by the CPU and executes the fol-
lowing commands:
o accelerate to 10 revolutions per second
o rotate at a constant speed (counterclockwise only) during scanning
cycle
o brake and stop at the home position
o reset, initialize and stop at the home position
The slave processor is reset either by the hardware during start-up or by a com-
mand from the CPU. In either event, the slave processor locates the home posi-
tion and waits for further commands
When the motor turns, the slave processor switches the supply from the standby
value of 0.4A to 1.8A. After the rotation, the increased current is maintained for
65ms to increase the braking torque on the motor.
Service Manual 151

Optical system
%ORFNGLDJUDPDQGWLPLQJ
saml07004a
SM-D Continuous
J1/P13
98.22.56 Edition 3
SM-D Load
J1/P14
SM-D Direction
J1/P15 8031
L 297 SM
2x L 6203
Filterwheel
Slave-D Busy Logic
J1/P44
Reset\ Slave-D
J1/P16
Meas. pos. Filterwheel

J1/P38 Fork type light barrier
Home pos. Filterwheel

J1/P40
The signal ‘Filter wheel measuring position’ is generated by the slave processor
for the three color positions of the filter wheel. The detailed chart is provided in
chapter 8.1.4.
The following command execution times may be considered:

o Reset: min. 34ms to max. 1s
o 60o turn: 39.2ms
o Cont -> Home: min. 150ms to max. 270ms
o 1 turn: 97.4ms, i.e. 10.27 revolutions per second
o Min. time interval between two consecutive commands
for a 60° turn 40.0ms
o Max. exposure time per color:60s
o Clock rate of slave:11.529MHz.
/LJKWDWWHQXDWRUWHVWILOWHU
The light attenuator is a rectangular perforated aluminum plate to provide a pre-

cise reduction of light. This light attenuator is located in the lamp house above
the filter wheel. In the Master Lab+, the light attenuator is the same as in the
Master Lab but has an additional testfilter. The attenuator has two positions:
o light path position to reduce the amount of light or
o home position
A solenoid moves the attenuator into the light path whereas a tension spring
pulls it back to home after the current for the solenoid is switched off.
152 Service Manual

Optical system
/LJKWVKDIW
The light shaft homogeneously distributes the light over the entire negative.
Each light shaft has two diffusers, one at the top and one at the bottom. There
98.22.56 Edition 3
are three different light shafts available:

o one for 110 film and DISC
o one for 135 and 126 film
o one for 120 film
Each light shaft has a code which allows the machine to detect the presence of
the shaft at one side and to check for the correct shaft. As seen from the front,
the light barrier LC1 is at the left side and the light barrier LC2 is at the right side
of the lamp house. This gives the following codes:
/& /& /LJKWVKDIW

0 0 No light shaft
1 0 Light shaft for 110 film and DISC
0 1 Light shaft for 135 and 126 film
1 1 Light shaft for 120 film
6KXWWHU
Only Master Lab+ X40-models and machines with index printer are equipped
with a shutter. The shutter prevents the light from reaching the paper deck dur-
ing the scanning cycle for the following negative. This is necessary because at
the same time the previously exposed paper is transported from the paper deck
to the feeder and distributor.
A small DC motor with a worm gear drives the shutter blade. Light barriers detect
both end positions.
The time for opening and closing the shutter is about 200ms. In case of a shutter
failure, a time-out is released after 300ms, indicating the error.
/HQVWXUUHW
2QO\PXOWLIRUPDWPDFKLQHVKDYHDOHQVWXUUHW
The lens turret holds up to four printing lenses. The suitable lens may be brought
into position by pressing the unlock button and turning the turret through the
opening in the front panel. Each lens has a code which is read by five reflective
light barriers. The code is transmitted to the main processor which identifies the
lens.
Zoom lenses are inserted into the turret from below and fixed with two screws.
Fixed-focus lenses are inserted from the top and not fixed with screws.
Service Manual 153

Optical system
The position of the unlock button is monitored by a light barrier. Pressing the but-
ton causes an interrupt on the main processor board. This ensures that the lens
is locked correctly in position.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Machines without a lens turret require a jumper in J413 on the CPU.
saml07005a
J413
Zo
Jumper P/N 14.16.71
10 8
)LJ -XPSHULQ-RQWKH&38
/HQVFRGH
A label with the lens code is glued to the lens barrel. The label is divided into five
sections.
saml07006a
OB 1
OB 2
OB 3
OB 4
OB 5
)LJ /DEHOGHVLJQ
The white area indicates a logic ‘1’ where as the black area indicates a logic ‘0’.
These five sections give a total of 32 possibilities (o ... 31). Due to mechanical
reasons the label with code 5 is smaller.
154 Service Manual

Optical system
saml07007a
Code 2 Code 3 Code 20

used for Zoom A used for Zoom B used for Fix-lens F = 90
98.22.56 Edition 3
)LJ &RGHH[DPSOHV
The following table gives an overview of the codes used for the various lenses.
2% 2% 2% 2% 2% /HQVFRGH 5HPDUNV

0 0 0 0 0 0 no lens
1 0 0 0 0 1 Large format zoom
0 1 0 0 0 2 Zoom A
1 1 0 0 0 3 Zoom B
0 0 1 0 0 4 Wide range zoom II
1 0 1 0 0 5 Index tubus
0 1 1 0 0 6 Wide range zoom III
1 1 1 0 0 7 CRT optics (ML Digital only!)
0 0 0 1 0 8 Fix lens F = 72
1 0 0 1 0 9 Passport 4-UP’s (135 film)
0 1 0 1 0 10 Wallet 2-UP’s
1 1 0 1 0 11 Fix lens F = 124
0 0 1 1 0 12 Passport 4-UP’s (120 film)
1 0 1 1 0 13 Fix lens F = 157
0 1 1 1 0 14 Fix lens F = 123
1 1 1 1 0 15 Fix lens F = 135
0 0 0 0 1 16 Fix lens F = 150
1 0 0 0 1 17 Fix lens F = 145
0 1 0 0 1 18 Fix lens F = 187
1 1 0 0 1 19 Fix lens F = 50.5
0 0 1 0 1 20 Fix lens F = 90
1 0 1 0 1 21 Fix lens F = 121
0 1 1 0 1 22 Fix lens F = 120
1 1 1 0 1 23 Fix lens F = 171

0 0 0 1 1 24 Fix lens F = 162
1 0 0 1 1 25 Fix lens F = 140
0 1 0 1 1 26 Fix lens F = 108
1 1 0 1 1 27 not yet in use!
0 0 1 1 1 28 Fix lens F = 172
1 0 1 1 1 29 Fix lens F = 167
0 1 1 1 1 30 Fix lens F = 127
1 1 1 1 1 31 not yet in use!
7DE /HQVFRGHWDEOH
Service Manual 155

Optical system
&DOFXODWLRQRIIRFDOOHQJWK
Use the following formula to calculate the required focal length for a particular
magnification:
98.22.56 Edition 3
m
f= A × - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2
(m + 1 )
where: f = focal length in mm

A = distance from film to paper deck in mm
(800mm for Master Lab+)
m = magnification (print length / negative length)
Example:
Print size 8” x 12”

Negative size 60mm x 70mm
Magnification m = 305mm / 69mm = 4.42
Focal length f = 800mm x (4.42 / 5.422) = 120.37
As read from the table f = 120, a fix-lens with code 22
The dioptric, an optical correction to compensate for the difference between the
target and the actual focal length is calculated with the following formula
B =  - - - - - -1 - - - - - -- – - - - - - - 1- - - - - - -  × 1 0 0 0
f t a r g e t f a c t u a l 
=RRPGULYH
The zoom is driven by a stepper motor. When turning the lens turret, a pinion
catches the crown gear of the zoom. When switching to the zoom, the home
position (label) will be located first. Then the stepper motor carries out the num-
ber of steps stored in the format memory. The lens turret should not be turned
too rapidly in order to prevent excessive wear on the pinion.
156 Service Manual

Optical system
5HSODFLQJWKHH[SRVXUHODPS
98.22.56 Edition 3
,03257$17
%HIRUHFKDQJLQJWKHH[SRVXUHODPSPDNHVXUHWKH3ULQWHULVVZLWFKHG
2))
Open the lamp house cover
:$51,1*
7KHODPSDQGWKHODPSVXSSRUWPD\EHYHU\KRW
'RQ¶WWRXFKWKHKRWDUHDV
/HWLWFRRORIIRWKHUZLVH\RXPD\EXUQ\RXUILQJHUV
Replace the lamp.
Close the lamp house cover
Recalibrate the system by performing a printer test (see Operating Manual).
$GMXVWLQJWKHODPSYROWDJH
To check and adjust the lamp voltage proceed as described in chapter 5.4.5.
After an adjustment of the lamp voltage you have to recalibrate the system by
performing a printer test (see Operating Manual).
$GMXVWLQJILOWHUZKHHO
Switch OFF the machine.
Open the lamp house cover.
Service Manual 157

Optical system
saml07008a
Loosen the stepper motor which
tension: drives the filter wheel.
1 kg
98.22.56 Edition 3
Hook a spring scale to the motor
shaft.
Adjust the tension of the belt to

1kg.
Tighten the screws of the stepper

motor.
the lamp house cover.
$GMXVWLQJWKHOHQVWXUUHW
saml07009a
Remove the light shaft.
saml07010a
1 Remove the film deck.
2
saml07011a
Remove all lenses.
158 Service Manual

Optical system
saml07012a
A
E
Shielding Remove the table by loosening the

98.22.56 Edition 3
plate
D screws ($,%,&,' and ().
B
C
saml07013a
Disconnect
cable
F
Remove the shutter by loosening
the screws (), * and +).
G
Disconnect the cable.
H
saml07014a
From the top, loosen screw (,) in

the turret shaft.
saml07015a
Unhook the tension spring (1) from

the light barrier mounting bracket.
Place the centering tool (P/N 95.16.96) in the opening of the base plate and
the lens turret. The openings have to match.
Service Manual 159

Optical system
saml07014a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Tighten screw (,) in the turret shaft.
saml07016a
Adjust the latching mechanism by

loosening both screws (2) on the
zoom drive, below the brass cylin-
2 der.
Hookup the tension spring (1).
Pullout the unlock button and fas-

1 ten both screws (2) on the brass
cylinder.
Remove the centering tool.
Check the snap-in lock at all four lens positions and ensure every time that
the centering tool can easily be inserted.
Remount the lens or lenses.
1RWH ,I\RXU]RRPGULYHLVVSULQJORDGHGLJQRUHWKHIROORZLQJDGMXVW
PHQW
saml07017a
~ 0.2mm
Loosen the three screws of the

zoom drive.
Move the plate until the crown

gear of the zoom has a distance of
~0.2mm.
160 Service Manual

Optical system
/HQVFRGHUHDGLQJ
Five infrared reflective light barriers mounted on the PBA LESE are reading the
code information of the lens.
98.22.56 Edition 3
1RWH ,QPDFKLQHVZLWKRXWDOHQVWXUUHWLQVHUWDMXPSHULQ-EHWZHHQ
SLQDQGRQWKH&%2&%2ERDUG
To adjust the sensitivity of these sensors proceed as follows:
saml07018a
POT. TEST-
SENSORS METERS POINTS On the PBA LESE connect a volt-
OB1
GND
LS1
meter between GND and the test
OB2
LS2
LS3
point LS1 to LS5 (depending on
OB3 LS4
LS5
the sensor to be tested or
OB4 adjusted).
OB5 J 803
saml07019a
Code label
Cover all sensors with the black
pattern of the label
BLACK: logic 0 = ≤ 0.4V Adjust the voltage of each sensor

to 300mV.
saml07020a
Code label
Cover all sensors with the white
pattern of the label.
WHITE: logic 1 = ≥ 3.5V Check the voltage of each sensor.

It should be 3.5V or more.
To verify correct adjustment, insert various lenses and check for correct reading.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(527+(5237,&6&2'(
The screen displays the detected color and the resulting lens code.
1RWH 7KHIROORZLQJVFUHHQGLVSOD\GRHVQ¶WVKRZXSLPPHGLDWHO\7KH
GLVSOD\KDVDVORZUHDFWLRQ%HSDWLHQW
MAINT PRINTER OTHER OPTICS CODE

Lightbar. 0: Black Lightbar. 2: Black
Lightbar. 1: White Lightbar. 3: Black
Lenscode: 02 Lighrbar. 4: Black
Service Manual 161

Optical system
=RRPOHQV
3UHSDULQJWKHIRFXVDGMXVWPHQW
98.22.56 Edition 3
,03257$17
0RYHWKHOHQVWXUUHWLQWRWKHSRVLWLRQIRUWKHSDUWLFXODU]RRPDQGUHLQL
WLDOL]HWKHV\VWHP
'21¶7WXUQWKHOHQVWXUUHWGXULQJWKHIROORZLQJIRFXVSURFHGXUHWRSUH
YHQWDUHLQLWLDOL]DWLRQRIWKHV\VWHP2WKHUZLVHWKH]RRPKRPHZLOOEH
LQFRUUHFW
Remove the front cover.
saml07021a
Lens turret
X X X
Loosen the three set screws (;)
Ring 1
on the head ring (Ring 1) to allow
the zoom to be turned for focusing.
There are two ways to adjust the focus:

o with grain finder if available or else
o without grain finder, by means of a printed focus ring.
$GMXVWLQJZLWKJUDLQILQGHU
saml07022a
Insert the focus test film

(P/N 34.91.51) in the film deck.
Select the menu:

&200!35,17(56(7/(166(7)2&
1RWH 7KHFRQILJXUDWLRQKDVWRFRUUHVSRQGZLWKWKHIRUPDW
162 Service Manual

Optical system
saml07023a
Turn the crown gear of the zoom

98.22.56 Edition 3
clockwise to the mechanical end-

stop (highest magnification).
Crown Gear
CW
Place a piece of white photo paper onto the paper deck.
Place the grain finder onto the paper.
Press the key below 67$57. The negative is now visible on the paper.
Adjust the focus by turning the lower part of the zoom while checking the
focus with the grain finder.
saml07021a
Lens turret
X X X
Tighten the three set screws (X)
Ring 1
without altering the position of the
zoom.
Remove the photo paper from the paper deck.
Readjust the home position of the zoom as described in chapter 7.2.7
$GMXVWLQJZLWKRXWJUDLQILQGHU
saml07023a
Turn the crown gear of the zoom
clockwise to the mechanical end-
stop (highest magnification).
Crown Gear
CW
saml07024a
Prepare a piece of adhesive paper
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 tape with 7 marks at about every
2.5cm (1”) and number them from
1 to 7.
Service Manual 163

Optical system
saml07025a
Stick this prepared paper tape

carefully to Ring 2 so that the mark
Ring 1 4 is positioned exactly below the
98.22.56 Edition 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
screw hole of Ring 1.
1RWH 'RQ¶WDOWHUWKHSRVLWLRQRI
WKHORZHUSDUWRIWKH]RRP
saml05022a
Insert the focus test film

(P/N 34.91.51) in the film deck.
Select the menu:

&200!35,17(56(7/(166(7)2&
Turn the lower part of the zoom to position 1 marked on the tape.
Close the front cover.
Expose two prints by press the key below 67$57twice (not too fast!)
The first print will be fogged, the second print will be good.
Wait at least 20 seconds after the second exposure then open the front
cover again.
Turn the lower part of the zoom to the next mark.
Repeat step 7 to 10 until all prints are ready for evaluation.
Open the front cover.

Evaluate the prints for best focus and set the zoom to the corresponding
mark on the tape.
164 Service Manual

Optical system
saml07021a
Lens turret
98.22.56 Edition 3
X X X
Ring 1
Tighten the three set screws on
the zoom.
Readjust the home position of the zoom as described in chapter 7.2.7.
6HWWLQJWKHKRPHSRVLWLRQ
saml07026a
Loosen the set screw in ring 2.
Ring 2 Turn the crown gear of the zoom

counterclockwise to the mechani-
Set screw
cal end stop and hold it in this
Crown Gear position.
CCW
saml07027a
CBO
Filterwheel
Slave D
U11
U15
Filterwheel
U13
J403
Papertransp.
U14
U4
Slave C
Filmdeck
U6
J416
U7
J411
Paper deck
D20
Test connector
for internal tests
J417
U8
Paper extractor
U9

Zoom
Slowly turn ring 2 counterclock-

wise until the LED D20 on the
Filterwheel Film deck
CBO/CBO2 lights up
CBO2
D20
Extractor
J417
D11
S4
Paper deck D9
Zoom S2
Service Manual 165

Optical system
saml07028a
Now turn ring 2 additionally in

counterclockwise direction
98.22.56 Edition 3
Ring 2
o 4 teeth with zoom A and B
o 3 teeth with a wide range
zoom
CCW
saml07026a
Ensure that ring 2 sits properly on

Ring 2 the crown gear.
Set screw
Tighten the set screw in ring 2.
Crown Gear
CCW
Check the correct adjustments with the menu

0$,17!35,17(527+(5237,&6&2'(
MAINT PRINTER OTHER OPTICS CODE
Lightbar. 0: Black Lightbar. 2: Black
Lightbar. 1: White Lightbar. 3: Black
Lenscode: 02 Lighrbar. 4: Black
1RWH 7KHDERYHVKRZQVFUHHQGLVSOD\GRHVQ¶WVKRZXSLPPHGLDWHO\
7KHGLVSOD\KDVDVORZUHDFWLRQ%HSDWLHQW
)RFXVLQJDIL[HGIRFXVOHQV
saml07029a
Loosen the counter-ring or the set

Lens Barrel
screw on the lens barrel (depend-
ing on the lens).
Set screw
Counter-Ring
Lens
Adjust the focus:

o with grain finder as described in chapter $'-867,1*:,7+*5$,1),1'(5
o without grain finder as described in chapter $'-867,1*:,7+287*5$,1
),1'(5
Tighten the counter-ring or the set screw on the lens barrel (depending on
the lens)
166 Service Manual

Optical system
$GMXVWLQJWKHRSWLFDOD[LV
When ever you adjust the optical axis, it is important to proceed in the following
sequence:
98.22.56 Edition 3
Adjust the lens turret following the instruction given in chapter 7.2.4.
For this purpose the centering tool (P/N 95.16.96) is required.
Adjust the paper position mechanically and via the software (see chapter
10.3.11 and 10.3.12)
Adjust the film position via the software (see chapter 9.7.2)
$XWRPDWLF'HQVLWRPHWHU
The Master Lab+ is capable to work with two kinds of Densitometers:

o Densitometer D188 / D19C
o automatic Densitometer ADM
Information about installation, setup, operation and maintenance are given in

separate manuals, listed below:
q UPKIT Automatic Densitometer (ADM) 34.90.98 BV (see chapter X)
q Operating Manual SETUP 98.27.52 (German)

98.27.54 (English)
98.27.56 (Italian)
98.27.58 (French)
98.27.60 (Spanish)
98.27.62 (Danish)
98.27.64 (Dutch)
98.27.66 (Portuguese)
q Service Manual ADM 98.26.28

(this manual has to be ordered at GRETAG Macbeth)
Service Manual 167

Optical system
6FKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
PBA Shutter Connector SHUT 34.55.63 ES 1
PBA Shutter Connector SHUT 34.55.63 AZ 1
PBA Lens Sensor LESE 34.78.91 ES 1
PBA Lens Sensor LESE 34.78.91 AZ 1
168 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
0HDVXULQJV\VWHP 8
The measuring system is below the film deck. It encompasses mainly three
parts:
o the optic box
o the measuring box
o the film positioning and DX-Code detection on the automatic film deck
The only electronics in the measuring system are photo diodes with some filters
and drivers. The main part of the electronics is in the CPU, starting with the ana-
log-to-digital interface as connection between the analog signals of the measur-
ing system and the digital processing of the CPU.
Basically there is a difference between channels whose signals are integrated

to reduce noise (scanner) and channels that are measured directly (film position
and DX-Code detection).
Service Manual 169

Measuring system
saml08001a
Lamp
Lamp house
Prefilter
Light attenuator/Testfilter
98.22.56 Edition 3
upper Diffusor
Filter Wheel
Light shaft
lower Diffusor
Film
Photo-
diode
Film
deck
Antireflection
angle
Optic Box
Measuring MESY
Filter
MESY
Silver
Measuring
Mirror coating Box
Triplet
thread
Detail A Detail B
)LJ 2YHUYLHZRIPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
2SWLFER[
The optic box is part of the film deck and projects the different film formats to the
measuring system (MESY). There are 3 different optic boxes. For the universal
film deck they are interchangeable but in the automatic film decks they are per-
manently attached.
170 Service Manual

Measuring system
saml08002a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Optic box 110
Optic box 120
Optic box 135
)LJ 7\SHRIRSWLFER[HV
The lens in the optic box is mounted in such a way, that the threaded ring faces
the scanning diodes (see ‘Detail B’ in Fig 8-1). The mirror is mounted with the
coated surface facing the light path (see ‘Detail A’ Fig 8-1).
1RWH 7KHPLUURULVLQVHUWHGZURQJLIWKHOLJKWKDVWRSDVVWKHJODVVILUVW
EHIRUHLWLVGHIOHFWHG
The optic box contains a fibre optic to measure the blue, green and red light
directly from the light source through the filters of the filter wheel.
saml08003a
Triplet
Mirror
Fiber optic
)LJ 2SHQRSWLFER[YLHZHGIURPWKHERWWRP
Service Manual 171

Measuring system
0HDVXULQJER[ZLWKPHDVXULQJERDUGVFDQQHU
Scanning pattern for all film formats:
98.22.56 Edition 3
Optic
box &
Scanning grid Format
light
Film decks
shaft
Diodes y Diodes x Width Length
PPL1) LPP2) (mm) (mm)
Automatic types
Panorama 4 12 48 135 12 36
135 auto Full frame 8 12 96 135 24 36
Half frame 8 6 48 135 24 18
110 auto 10 12 120 110 12.9 17.0
Classic 10 12 120 135 15.6 22.3
APS HTV 10 12 120 135 15.6 27.4
Panorama 8 12 96 135 9.6 27.4
Universal type
Disc 6 8 48 110 8.25 10.6
110 10 12 120 110 12.9 17.0
126 10 10 100 135 28.1 28.8
135 8 12 96 135 24 36
135HF3) 8 6 48 135 24 18
135HF Q4) 10 12 120 110 18 24
120 (4.5 x 6) 10 8 80 120 56 41.5
120 (4.5x6Q)5) 8 10 80 120 41.5 56
120 (6 x 6) 10 10 100 120 56 56
120 (6 x 7) 10 12 120 120 56 72
1) PPl = Pixels per line

2) LPP = Lines per picture
3) HF = Half frame
4) HF Q = Half frame across
5) Q = across
)LOPSRVLWLRQLQJDQG';&RGHGHWHFWLRQ
The sensor assembly for film positioning and DX-Code detection is described in
detail in chapter 9.4
6FDQQLQJ
Upon scanning, the main processor starts the filter wheel and waits for the home
signal sent by the light barrier of the filter wheel. This signal triggers three signals
issued by the software from the slave (filter wheel) corresponding to the three
colors blue, green and red. As soon as the maximum light intensity of the
respective color has been reached, the corresponding signal changes to active
(low). At this time the filter fully covers the light path. Based on this signal, the
172 Service Manual

Measuring system
hardware starts integrating the signal for an average time of about 3.8ms. After
this time, the integrator changes to the hold state, using the positive slope caus-
ing an interrupt on the main processor. The main processor now sequentially
reads the values stored in the integrators and converts them to digital data.
98.22.56 Edition 3
After this procedure has been carried out for a particular scan line (4 to 10
diodes, depending on the format) the main processor transports the film to the
next position while the filter wheel finishes the current turn.
The described procedure is repeated until all lines (4 to 12, depending on the
format) have been measured.
saml08004a
J1/P40 J14/P40
Homepos EPLD
IN16 IN16 10
CPU-Board
U49
J4/ Meas.
SlaveD
P9 6 10 pos.
8031
63
12
IN14 IN14
U13
GLS J40/
J1/P38
Home- P38
Filterwheel pos.
Control board
1
3
> 1
2 10 9
U82 > 1 U82
8 6
1
U107
INT1
44
5
Reset, Start
uP 80186
Integrators
U1 23 TMR01
)LJ 'HWHFWLRQRIILOWHUZKHHOURWDWLRQ
Service Manual 173

Measuring system
saml08005a
Logic
J24 Processor
I/U-Conv.
98.22.56 Edition 3
11x 11x
Scan-
diodes
MESY *1
U/I-Con.
Photo- Buffer
diode Amp
Integrator
To ADC
I/U-Conv. Multiplexer
3x
J25 25 : 1
DX and
Pos-
Diodes *1
FIDE
Photo- Buffer
diode Amp
J24
Tempe-
C *1
rature
Scanarray Temp.- Buffer
Sensor Amp.
Reserve CPU
N.C.
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIVHQVRUGHWHFWLRQ
saml08006a
D0 - D10 D12- D14

D 15 State AD
Mode
DX and Pos.-Diodes, Tempe-
ratures, Uref, Reserved Inputs -20 dB Dek 20- 2 7 -1
A
D0- D11
D
S/H
Mux
Photo-
Diodes
Data exchange channel selection
1-12 - Uedt
CS, CE, R/C
Reset, Start
Control Control WR
logic AD +5V + 15V
logic DC
System clock from CPU RD + 5V
AD GND - 10V
DC - 15V
AGND
INT1 to CPU,
Read measuring A1 A2 A3 A4 PCS2
values
Start of measuring
SlaveD, Filter wheel
)LJ 3ULQFLSOHRI$'FRQYHUVLRQ
The following timing diagram of a scanning cycle shows two full turns of the filter
wheel, respectively 1 line of 11 diodes.
174 Service Manual

Measuring system
saml08007a
Start Scanning
Home Home
5.32msec
97.2msec
Filter wheel home signal
102.6msec
98.22.56 Edition 3
13.56ms
21.65ms
Measuring position 29.75ms
37.85ms
of filter wheel 45.95ms
53.05ms
Light intensity, e.g. B G R W B G R

D D D
illumination measuring 2 1 2
1 = Hold or Sample
Integrator gate, e.g.
U58/P11 0 = Reset
Average time
3.85ms 3.85ms 3.85ms
1 = Hold
Integrator hold, e.g.
0 = Sample or Reset
U58/P6
ca.250nsec
Select channel resp.
gain U67, U68/P11
1 = Convert ca.30usec
resp. Hold
Status ADC resp.
S/H 0 = Read resp.
Sample
)LJ 7LPLQJIRUVFDQQLQJF\FOH
0HDVXULQJERDUG0(6<
The measuring board contains 11 photodiodes forming a linear array. Each pho-
todiode has its current / voltage converter with integrated low-pass filter followed
by an additional unipolar low-pass filter.
The total response time of the resulting bipolar filter is approximately 200us.
Each channel has an amplifier driving the line at low impedance.
A temperature sensor (Q1) on the board is used for temperature compensation.
The cable connecting the MESY and the A/D interface uses transposed wires
(pin1 of the MESY is connected to pin 16 on the A/D interface)
5HSODFLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
saml07009a
Remove the light shaft.
Service Manual 175

Measuring system
saml07010a
1
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the film deck.
2
saml08008a
Loosen screws $ and %.
B
saml08009a
1 1
1
Battery J30 J6
J28
-
DC-DC
converter
On the CPU, disconnect the cable

A / D converter from connector J24.
J9 J8
disconnect J24 1
J26 J24 J27 J25 J1

8 1
saml08010a
Remove the cable clamp and pull

Scanner box the cable through the cable pas-
sage.
Distributor Pull out the measuring box includ-

Cable clamp
ing the cable.
Cable Cable passage
Paperdeck
After replacement, reassemble in reverse order.
176 Service Manual

Measuring system
&KHFNLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
Ensure that the automatic 135 film deck and the 135 light shaft is installed.
If not, install them.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Initialize the system
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(50($66<66&$1/,1
<MAINT> PRINTER MEASSYS SCANLIN
Press <START>, to scan one line of Neg..
Read results on next screen [ 1]
START GAIN
Make sure the gain is set to 1 then press the key just below 67$57 with-
out a film in the film deck.
<MAINT> PRINTER MEASSYS SCANLIN
Blue Green Red Gain 0
A/D-Raw 1500 1500 1500 Diode 1
Offset 820 820 820 NEXT
To check the other diodes press the key just below 1(;7.
The gain can be set to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. With the gain set to 1 you
should get the following results:
ILOP
Conditions:
o automatic 135 film deck inserted
o No film in the film deck
o Gain set to 1.
' 'WR' ' 'OLJKWYDOXH

7\SLFDO
%*5 %*5 %*5 5*%
A/D-Raw (1000 to 2000) not used 1500 not used 1100
Offset +/- 100 not used 800 not used 800
A/D-Raw - Offset not used ~700 not used ~300

ALARM -> A/D-Raw - Offset < 43 < 16
A/D-Raw < 4095
ILOP
Conditions:
o Universal 120 film deck inserted
o No film in the film deck
o Gain set to 1.
Service Manual 177

Measuring system
' 'WR' ' 'OLJKWYDOXH

7\SLFDO
%*5 %*5 %*5 5*%
98.22.56 Edition 3
A/D-Raw (1000 to 2000) 1500 1500 1500 1100
Offset +/- 100 800 800 800 800
A/D-Raw - Offset ~700 ~700 ~700 ~300
ALARM -> A/D-Raw - Offset < 43 < 16
A/D-Raw < 4095
saml08011a
Optic box Measuring box

Diodes
fiberoptics (lightvalue)
11 Light value
2
3
4
135 film
120 film
5
6
7
8
9
10
)LJ 'LDJUDPRIPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
6FDQQHUFDOLEUDWLRQIRUVWDWXVµ0¶
,03257$17
7KHIROORZLQJFDOLEUDWLRQSURFHGXUHUHIHUVWRVRIWZDUH4RU45YHUVLRQ
RQO\
0DVWHU/DEDQG0DVWHU/DEZLWKRXW$'0
In older Master Lab’s the following calibration procedure is used when the cus-
tomer uses the scanner to measure the control strips for the film processor.
The calibration adapts the measured values of the scanner to those of a trans-
mission densitometer with status ‘M’-filters.
The Master Lab calculates the correction coefficients from the difference
between the measured values and the aim values. These coefficients are then
automatically applied, whenever a reference strip or a control strip is measured.
6SHFLDOWRROVUHTXLUHG
q Calibration strip P/N 36.17.68 (a strip similar to the control strip for the film
processor).
178 Service Manual

Measuring system
q The aim values (label with values should be on every calibration strip).
3URFHGXUH
98.22.56 Edition 3
Select the menu

0$,17!35,17(50($6<67&$/,%$872
<MAINT> PRINTER MEASYS T_CALIB AUTO
Insert Film and
press <ENTER> to start
Insert the calibration strip into the film deck.
Position the first measuring field in the viewing window.
Start the measuring cycle wit (17(5!.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(50($6<67&$/,%.
Press the key just below the word $,0.

<MAINT> PRINTER MEASYS T_CALIB AIM
Y (B)
[0.00]
RED GREEN BLUE
Enter the provided aim values in the following sequence:
1. Screen: Y (B)
2. Screen: Dmax (R/G/B)
3. Screen: LD (R/G/B)
4. Screen: press (17(5! to save data.
In case the following event message appears, proceed as advised in the

event message.
Code: M19
Text: Scanner wrong calibrated
Cause: There are no reasonable values from the calibration strip avail-
able (measured values or aim values)
Remedy: Repeat the calibration procedure for the scanner.
Service Manual 179

Measuring system
6HWWLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ
5HDVRQ
98.22.56 Edition 3
For Master Lab+ working under extreme temperature conditions it may be, that
production changes during the day. The changes may be visible in color or den-
sity shifts. The reason is the temperature drift between morning and evening in
the measuring system, influenced by the ambient room temperature. If such a
problem is encountered, temperature compensation factors can be established.
3URFHGXUH
Perform a Printer Test in the morning and measure it until it has the values
0.80 / 0.80 / 0.80.
In the morning select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(50($6<66(16
Write down the actual displayed temperature from the measuring box.
For example:
<HOORZ 0DJHQWD &\DQ 7HPSHUDWXUH

Morning 0.80 0.80 0.80 20oC
Evening
Difference
Perform a Printer Test in the evening and measure it with a densitometer.
1RWH 'RQ¶WXVHWKH(9$/WRVWRUHWKHYDOXHV
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(50($6<66(16.
Write down the actual displayed temperature from the measuring box.
For example:

Morning 0.80 0.80 0.80 20oC

Evening 0.95 0.87 0.74 31oC
Difference
Calculate the difference.

Morning 0.80 0.80 0.80 20oC
Evening 0.95 0.87 0.74 30oC
Difference +0.15 +0.07 -0.06 10oC
180 Service Manual

Measuring system
To calculate the temperature compensation values use the formula:
∆C o l o r × ( – 1 0 )
V a lu e = --------------------------------------
∆T e m p e r a t u r e
98.22.56 Edition 3
Regarding the values in our example:

e.g. for Yellow = (0.95 - 0.80) x (-10) / 10oC = -0.15
Select the menu

0$,17!35,17(5(;36<67(03&25
Enter the calculated value for the corresponding color.

As the example shows, you would have to enter:
Yellow: -0.15, Magenta: -0.07, Cyan: +0.06
1RWH 8VHWKHVHSDUDPHWHUVRQO\IRUORQJWHUPGULIWVRYHUDGD\
2QO\YDOXHVLQWKHUDQJHIURPWRFDQEHHQWHUHG
6FKHPDWLFV

PBA Measuring System MESY 34.75.70 ES 1
PBA Measuring System MESY 34.75.70 AZ 1
Service Manual 181

182
Measuring system
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
)LOPSDWK 9
The film path mechanism basically encompasses of four different film decks:
o Automatic film deck 135
o Automatic film deck APS
This film deck is not covered in this manual. Please refer to:
Service Manual Addendum APS P/N 98.27.42 for optical Indexprinter
Service Manual Customizer P/N 98.29.02 for digital Indexprinter
o Automatic film deck 110
o Universal film deck
Each film deck includes at least the following assemblies and positions:
o Drive
o Positioning diodes
o Viewing position
o Scanning position
o Exposure position
'ULYH
The drive, a stepper motor (400 half steps) is controlled by the main processor.
The driver for the motor is located on the control board (CBO / CBO2).
Three transport rollers drive the film on an automatic film deck.
On the universal film deck, the negative is placed in a film carrier which is then
moved by a stepper motor.
Service Manual 183

Film path
3RVLWLRQLQJGLRGHV
These diodes are used to determine the frame position and to detect the DX-
Code information.
98.22.56 Edition 3
9LHZLQJSRVLWLRQ
The viewing position provides an illuminated viewing window. Once a frame is

positioned the viewing window, the operator may check the negative visually.
6FDQQLQJSRVLWLRQ
Every frame entering the measuring position is scanned line-by-line using the
exposure lamp and the filter wheel as a scanning filter. The scanning system is
synchronized with the rotating filter wheel. The measured values are used to cal-
culate the exposure times of every color for each single negative.
([SRVXUHSRVLWLRQ
The frame is positioned in the optical axes which also includes the lens, the
exposure lamp, the filters of the filter wheel and the paper. In this position the
frame is exposed. The exact position is either determined by photo diodes or by
micro-switches depending on the film format.
)LOPGHFNFRGLQJ
Each film deck as a code. This allows the electronic to detect which film deck is
installed and to configure certain variables accordingly.
The code is made with either plugged or soldered jumpers on the electronic
board in the film deck.
saml09003a Master Lab / Master Lab+
J609 1
J603 1
J604 0
)LJ ),'(ZLWKILOPGHFNFRGHIRUILOP
184 Service Manual

Film path
saml09004a
FDECKCODE
98.22.56 Edition 3
Normal
1
FUJI J15
1 0
)LJ ),'(ZLWKILOPGHFNFRGHIRU)XMLILOP
saml09001a
J612 1
J613 0
J614 0
)LJ ),'(ZLWKILOPGHFNFRGHIRUXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN
saml09002a
J612 1
J613 0
J614 1
)LJ ),'(ZLWKILOPGHFNFRGHIRUILOP
Service Manual 185

Film path
%ORFNGLDJUDPVRIILOPGHFNV
$XWRPDWLFILOPGHFN
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml09005a
- Power supply
- Steppermotor
J 601A
- Digital signals
J 409
CBO
Analog signals:
- Positioning diodes
- DX-diodes
J 602
J 25
A/D - Interface
Power source CPU
for LED's
Amplifiers for
photodiodes
J 655
J 605
6 Photo-
5 LED's
diodes
FIPOR FIPOT
Receiver Transmitter
Coding (3)
J 606
LSB BC 1 J 609
2 Viewing
lamps
FIVI 135
BC 2 J 603
J 607
Pressure solenoid
MSB BC 3 J 604
J 608
1 0
Steppermotor
FIDE 135
186 Service Manual

Film path
$XWRPDWLFILOPGHFNIRU)XMLFRGH
saml09008a
- Power supply
98.22.56 Edition 3
- Steppermotor
- Digital signals
J 409
J 2
CBO
Analog signals:
- Positioning diodes
- DX-diodes
J 1
J 25
A/D - Interface
Power source CPU
for LED's
Amplifiers for
photodiodes
7 Photo-
6 LED's
J 8
J 9
diodes
FIPOR FIPOT
J 15 Receiver Transmitter
Normal 135
Fuji code
1 0
J 14
2 Viewing
lamps
FIVI 135
J 5
Pressure solenoid
J 4
Steppermotor
FIDE 135/2
Service Manual 187

Film path
$XWRPDWLFILOPGHFN
saml09006a
- Power supply
- Steppermotor
98.22.56 Edition 3
- Digital signals
J 601B
J 409
CBO
J 616
Positioning switch
J 618
Positioning switch
Coding (5)
J 621
LSB BC 1 J 612 1 Viewing

lamp FIVI 110
BC 2 J 613
J 620
Pressure solenoid
MSB BC 3 J 614
J 624
1 0
Steppermotor
FIDE 110/U
188 Service Manual

Film path
8QLYHUVDOILOPGHFN
saml09007a
- Power supply
- Steppermotor
98.22.56 Edition 3
- Digital signals
J 601B
J 409
CBO
J 615
Lightbarrier
home position
Coding (1)
5 Viewing lamps
LSB BC 1 J 612 1 Hall sensor
J 621
FIVI UNI
BC 2 J 613
MSB BC 3 J 614
J 625
1 0
Steppermotor
FIDE 110/U
Service Manual 189

Film path
7KHDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFNV
ILOPGHFN
98.22.56 Edition 3
The automatic 135 film deck uses sensors to position the film. The film deck han-
dles 135 full frame as well as 135 half-frame negatives.
The minimal film strip length these film decks can handle are three full frame
negatives.
saml09009a
SM
Film-
transport
Transport roller
Transport roller
Transport roller
Viewing position
Exposure station
Measuring position
DX/Positioning diodes
)LJ 'LIIHUHQWSRVLWLRQVDORQJWKHILOPSDWKLQWKHILOPGHFN
The positioning diodes measure the density of the film. They provide the infor-
mation to determine the frame position by the software. These diodes also read
the DX-Code (film type and frame numbers according to Kodak Standard).
The assembly includes a transmitter, a receiver and a diaphragm.
The diaphragm has an aperture to detect the frame position and two small pin
size apertures to read the DATA- and CLOCK-track of the DX-Code.On the
transmitter are 5 LED’s used to illuminate the film with a spectral wavelength of
660nm. The receiver has four photo diodes to detect the right frame position and
a double photo diode to read the DX-Code.
The analog signals from the photo diodes are fed to the A/D converter on the
CPU and then evaluated by the software.
saml09010a
Front view
Power source
SM
LED's
Film-
Film
transport
Diaphragm
Photodiodes
Amplifier
DATA track (DX-Code)
CLOCK track (DX-Code)
)LJ ';&RGHGHWHFWLRQ
190 Service Manual

Film path
ILOPGHFN
The automatic film deck 110 uses two microswitches to position the film. It only
handles 110 frames. Two microswitches detect the notch provided on the 110-
98.22.56 Edition 3
films and positions for the viewing position with the first and for the exposure with
the second microswitch.
The minimal film strip length these film deck can handle are four negatives.
saml09011a
SM
Film-
Transport roller transport
Exposure station
Transport roller
Transport roller
Viewing position
viewing position
exposure position
Measuring position
Microswitch
Microswitch
)LJ 'LIIHUHQWSRVLWLRQVDORQJWKHILOPSDWKLQWKHILOPGHFN
7KHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN
*HQHUDO
The universal film deck (also called manual film deck) requires manual feed of
the film. Different inserts can be attached to the sledge which is driven by a step-
per motor. The stepper motor is then used to transport the film from the viewing
position to the exposure position. The available inserts make it possible to han-
dle different film formats. The home position of the sledge (= viewing position) is
controlled by a light barrier.
saml09014a
SM
Sledge Insert
Filmmask
Filmtransport
6x6
Flap
)LJ 9LHZRIWKHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN
Service Manual 191

Film path
,QVHUWVFRGLQJ
For each film format there is a specific insert coded by 5 magnets. A Hall sensor
reads the code by moving the sledge from the viewing position to the exposure
98.22.56 Edition 3
position during initialization. Depending on the insert, it also checks for the cor-
responding optical box and the correct light shaft. For the transport to the expo-
sure position the film is fixed with a flap.
saml09015a
(MSB) 16 8 4 2 1 (LSB)
6 x 6
Top view
)LJ 9LHZRILQVHUWVZLWKFRGLQJSRVLWLRQV
The following table shows the different codes for the various inserts:
,QVHUW 2SWLFDOER[
1R
06% /6% )LOPVL]H /LJKWVKDIW
0 01) 0 0 0 0 no insert ---
120 (4.5 x 6Q)
1 0 0 0 0 1 120
120 (4.5 x 6Q+)
2 0 0 0 12) 0 110 110
3 0 0 0 1 1 126 126
4 0 0 1 0 0 135 FF (24 x 36) 135

5 0 0 1 0 1 135 HF (18 x 24) 135
6 0 0 1 1 0 120 (4.5 x 6) 120
7 0 0 1 1 1 120 (6 x 6) 120
8 0 1 0 0 0 reserved ---
9 0 1 0 0 1 reserved ---
10 0 1 0 1 0 120 (6 x 7.2) 120
11 0 1 0 1 1 reserved ---
12 0 1 1 0 0 reserved ---
13 0 1 1 0 1 reserved ---
14 0 1 1 1 0 Disc 110
15 0 1 1 1 1 reserved ---
192 Service Manual

Film path
,QVHUW 2SWLFDOER[
1R
06% /6% )LOPVL]H /LJKWVKDIW
Cropping masks
13.8 x 19.8 (110) 110
98.22.56 Edition 3
16 1 0 0 0 0 18.8 x 24.8 (135HF) 135

24.8 x 36.8 (135FF) 135
42.6 x 56.8 (120 / 45 x 60) 120
17 1 0 0 0 1 135 HF (18 x 24Q) 135
18 1 0 0 1 0 reserved ---
19 1 0 0 1 1 reserved ---
20 1 0 1 0 0 reserved ---
21 1 0 1 0 1 reserved ---
22 1 0 1 1 0 reserved ---
23 1 0 1 1 1 reserved ---
24 1 1 0 0 0 reserved ---
25 1 1 0 0 1 reserved ---
26 1 1 0 1 0 reserved ---
27 1 1 0 1 1 reserved ---
28 1 1 1 0 0 reserved ---
29 1 1 1 0 1 reserved ---
30 1 1 1 1 0 reserved ---
31 1 1 1 1 1 reserved ---
1) 0 = no magnet inserted
2) 1 = magnet inserted
&KHFNVDGMXVWPHQWVIRUDQGILOPGHFNV
1RWH 7KHIROORZLQJDGMXVWPHQWSURFHGXUHVDQGPHQXVDUHWKHVDPHIRU
DQDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFNDQGDQDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFN7KH
GDWDDUHVWRUHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHILOPGHFNFRGH
&KHFNLQJDQGSRVLWLRQLQJWKH';&RGHGLRGHV
To check the positioning and the DX-Code diodes of the 135 film deck proceed
as follows:
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.6(16$
<MAINT> PRINTER FITRACK SENS A135
Pos.Diode Density A/D-Raw Offset
[ 1] 0.00 2132 816
STEPS FORW BACKW CALIB
Without a film inserted in the film deck press the key just below &$/,%.
The display will show values for the positioning diodes as shown in the table
below.
Be aware that the values for the DX-Code diodes are shown on the next
screen!
Service Manual 193

Film path
$'5DZ 2IIVHW
Positioning diodes
DX-Code data min. 1100 to max. 3500 725 to 925
98.22.56 Edition 3
DX-Code clock
$GMXVWLQJH[SRVXUHYLHZLQJSRVLWLRQ
Production tolerances are compensated with this adjustment. Because the

viewing and the exposure position are in correlation we have to adjust in the fol-
lowing sequence:
o 1st = Exposure position
o 2nd = Viewing position
,03257$17
6WULFWO\REVHUYHWKHVHTXHQFHIRUDGMXVWLQJWKHSRVLWLRQV
Prerequisites: - Automatic film deck 135, APS or 110 installed

- Light shaft 135 or 110 installed
- Paper cassette attached, e.g. 3.5”
- Master Lab+ initialized
- Paper path correctly adjusted (refer to chapter 10)
Load a full length film in the film deck and ensure that the film is below all
rollers.
Ensure that a frame with enough contrast is correctly positioned in the view-
ing window. If necessary adjust the position with the or the
keys.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.,1,7$'-(;3
<MAINT> PRINTER FITRACK INIT ADJEXP
Press <START> to move Film to Exposure-

position -7
START <- ->
Open the front cover to get access to the paper deck.
Press the key just below the word 67$57.
Check the position of the negative by looking at the projection on the paper.
If necessary, adjust the frame in the exposure position with the keys just
below the signs or ! until no borders of unexposed mask are left at
either side.
194 Service Manual

Film path
Now position a frame with enough contrast in the viewing window.

98.22.56 Edition 3
1RWH 'RQ¶WFRUUHFWWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHIUDPHLQWKHYLHZLQJZLQGRZZLWK
WKHILQHSRVLWLRQLQJNH\V
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.,1,7$'-9,(:
<MAINT> PRINTER FITRACK INIT ADJVIEW
Adjust viewer position and press ENTER
-3
<- ->
If necessary, adjust the frame in the viewing window with the keys just
below the signs <- or -> until no borders are left at either side.
$GMXVWLQJWKHSUHVVXUHVROHQRLG
After replacing the solenoid or the mask on the film deck you have to adjust the
pressure solenoid again.
Remove the plastic cover of the film deck.
Loosen the set screw of the lever.
Turn the shaft to push the pres-

saml09012a
sure mask down.
~ 0.6 mm
Keep the mask down and push

the armature of the solenoid until
it touches the lever.
Set screw
Measure the part of the armature
protruding the coil. It should mea-
sure approx. 0.6mm. If necessary

adjust by turning the lever.
Tighten the set screw again.
Remount the plastic cover of the film deck.
Service Manual 195

Film path
$GMXVWLQJWKHEHOWWHQVLRQ
Remove the plastic cover of the film deck.

saml09013a
98.22.56 Edition 3
A
SM
3.5 .. 4.5N
(350 .. 450gr)
Loosen both screws $.
Take a spring balance and pull on the roller with a force of 3.5 to 4.5N
(350 to 450gr).
Tighten the screws without releasing the tension.
Remount the plastic cover of the film deck.
$GMXVWPHQWVRQWKHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN
$GMXVWLQJKRPHSRVLWLRQ
saml09016a
Home
flag sensor
Remove the cover on the upper

side of the sledge.
Loosen both screws of the flag.

6x6
1mm
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.6(1681,
<MAINT> PRINTER FITRACK SENS UNI
Error stat. of film Home: YES
[ 1] Magnet: NO
STEPS FORW BACKW
196 Service Manual

Film path
Depending on the sledge position press either the key just below the word
)25: or %$&.: until a gap of 1mm to the mechanical endposition is
achieved.
98.22.56 Edition 3
In this position adjust the flag until the display for ‘Home:’ changes to ‘YES’.
1RWH 7KHGLVSOD\RQO\FKDQJHVE\SUHVVLQJRQHRUWKHRWKHUVRIWNH\
DJDLQ
$GMXVWLQJWKHH[SRVXUHSRVLWLRQ
Production tolerances are compensated with this adjustment. The exposure

position is the only adjustment required and this adjustment is independent of
the insert. The viewing position is not adjustable by software!
Prerequisites: - Universal film deck installed

- Home position is mechanically adjusted
- An insert is attached
- the corresponding light shaft is installed
- Paper cassette attached, e.g. 3.5”
- Master Lab+ initialized
- Paper path correctly adjusted (refer to chapter 10)
Load a film strip
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.,1,7$'-(;3
<MAINT> PRINTER FITRACK INIT ADJEXP
Press <START> to move Film to Exposure-
position -7
START <- ->
Open the front cover to get access to the paper deck.
Press the key just below the word 67$57.
Check the position of the negative by looking at the projection on the paper.
If necessary, adjust the frame in the exposure position with the keys just
below the signs or ! until no borders of unexposed mask are left at
either side.
Service Manual 197

Film path
/LVWRIVFKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
PBA Film Deck 135, FIDE 135 34.75.68 ES 1
PBA Film Deck 135, FIDE 135 34.75.68 AZ 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Trans., FIPOT 34.75.35 ES 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Trans., FIPOT 34.75.35 AZ 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Rec.,. FIPOR 34.75.37 ES 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Rec., FIPOR 34.75.37 AZ 1
PBA Film Viewing 135, FIVI 135 34.75.33 ES 1
PBA Film Viewing 135, FIVI 135 34.75.33 AZ 1
PBA Film Deck 110/UNI, FIDE 110/U 34.76.00 ES 1
PBA Film Deck 110/UNI, FIDE 110/U 34.76.00 AZ 1
PBA Film Viewing UNI, FIVI UNI 34.76.12 ES 1
PBA Film Viewing UNI, FIVI UNI 34.76.12 AZ 1
PBA Film Viewing 110, FIVI 110 34.76.92 ES 1
PBA Film Viewing 110, FIVI 110 34.76.92 AZ 1
PBA Filmdeck 135/2 37.08.95 ES 1 to 3
PBA Filmdeck 135/2 37.08.95 AZ 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Trans., FIPOT 37.08.98 ES 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Trans., FIPOT 37.08.98 AZ 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Rec.,. FIPOR 37.09.00 ES 1
PBA Film Pos. Sens. Rec., FIPOR 37.09.00 AZ 1
PBA Filmdeck, FIDT 37.01.35 ES 1
PBA Filmdeck, FIDT 37.01.35 AZ 1
PBA Filmdeck rec., FIDR 37.01.37 ES 1
PBA Filmdeck rec., FIDR 37.01.37 AZ 1
PBA Viewer lamp, VLB 37.01.98 ES 1
PBA Viewer lamp, VLB 37.01.98 AZ 1
198 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
3DSHUSDWK 10
The paper transport system includes all movements of the paper from the paper
cassette into the Paper processor.
This transport system includes:

o the paper cassette
o the paper extractor
o the knife assembly
o the paper deck
o the feeder or panorama feeder
o the conveyer (ML X’20) or the distributor (ML X’40)
The paper is extracted from the paper cassette and cut according to the speci-
fied print length. The piece of paper (further called print) is then transported onto
the paper deck where it is exposed. After exposure the print is moved into the
feeder which transports the print via a 90° vertical turn further to the conveyer.
Finally the conveyer enters the print into the first tank of the Paper processor.
For ML X40 a distributor is installed instead of the conveyer allowing the distri-
bution of prints up to 4” with a maximal print length of 180mm into 2 tracks. With
a panorama feeder installed, the possible print length on 4” paper can be up to
305mm.
Service Manual 199

Paper path
saml10001a
11
12
98.22.56 Edition 3
13
14
10
9 8
7
6
5
4 3
2
1
Paper extractor unit
)LJ 3ULQFLSOHYLHZRISDSHUSDWK
1 Paper cassette (metal version) 2 Light trap (Adapter)

3 Locking mechanism 4 Sensor board (PAMID)
5 Extractor stepper motor 6 Knife with DC motor
7 Paper deck stepper motor 8 Paper deck

9 Feeder DC motor 10 Feeder or panorama feeder
11 Distributor or conveyer 12 Main drive from PP (1cm / sec)
13 Conveyer stepper motor 14 Distributor stepper motor (SM2)
3DSHUFDVVHWWH
The paper cassette is the storage container for the photographic paper to be
used in the machine. The paper cassette is coded by small permanent magnets
located at the exit of the paper cassette. The code is used to tell the computer if
a paper cassette is inserted or not and to load the appropriate paper memory.
Furthermore, the code is used to verify the correct format combination of light
shaft, film deck and lens.
200 Service Manual

Paper path
There are different types of paper cassettes in use:

o metal cassettes used so far for paper width 3.5” to 5”
o older type plastic cassettes used for paper width 3.5” to 6”
o new type plastic cassettes used for paper width 3.5” to 8.25”
98.22.56 Edition 3
o metal cassettes used for paper width 7” to 8.25”
saml10002a
saml10004a
saml10003a
Plastic type cassette Plastic type cassette

Metal type cassette
(old) (new)
3DSHUH[WUDFWRU
The paper which is extracted from the paper cassette is monitored to detect
paper end and paper splice. After the paper has been pulled out, it is cut accord-
ing to the length specified in the format memory. This piece of paper is then
transported to the vacuum table of the paper deck. If the preliminary checks
encounter missing paper a corresponding error message is displayed.
The paper extractor has an electronic board, the PAMID (3$per 0agazine ,'en-
tification). This board carries the sensors. Hall sensors are used to detect the
paper cassette code where as two reflective light barriers are used to detect
paper end and paper splice.
If a paper end is detected during the pull-in operation, an error message is dis-
played. The remaining piece of paper must be removed manually from the paper
deck.
Is a splice detected during pull-in operation, the procedure is aborted, an error

message is displayed and the splice must be cut off manually.
.QLIH
A rolling knife is used to cut the paper. Both end stops - front and rear - are mon-
itored by light barriers. The knife is driven by a DC motor. The cutting time is lim-
ited by a time-out. If the knife does not reach the opposite end stop within 1.5
seconds, a knife error is displayed.
Service Manual 201

Paper path
%DFNSULQWHU
The backprinter, a needle printer, is used to print important information to the

rear side of each print. The number of printable characters is limited to 80.
98.22.56 Edition 3
3DSHUGHFN
The paper deck is the place where the paper is positioned for exposure. The
transport of the paper to the paper deck is done with two different speeds
depending on the paper size. 3.5” and 4” paper is transported with high speed
where as 5”, 6”, 7” and 8” paper is transported with low speed.
A vacuum fan in the paper deck keeps the paper at a steady position and keeps
it flat for the exposure time to prevent unsharpness due to bent paper.
)HHGHU3DQRUDPDIHHGHU
After the exposure the paper is moved to the feeder. The feeder has two posi-
tions monitored by light barriers. The positions are ‘Printer side’ and ‘Processor
side’. The swivelling feeder motion is limited by a time-out. If the feeder does not
reach the opposite end within 1.5 seconds, a feeder error is displayed.
The feeder has two light barriers to detect the presence of paper in the feeder
and the width of the paper.
The panorama feeder has three light barriers to detect the presence of paper,
the size of paper -> distribution to 1 or 2 tracks and the length of the print (pan-
orama).
saml10023a
Sensor
'Panorama print'
Sensor
Print present
Fee
Sensor
der Print > 4"
202 Service Manual

Paper path
'LVWULEXWRU0/;PRGHOVRQO\
The distributor is a slave (Slave E) controlled by the paper transport slave

(Slave C). During initialization the master communicates the machine version to
98.22.56 Edition 3
the paper track:

o 1 track for ML X20
o 2 track /2 track 12” for ML X40
In a ML X40 model the slave checks whether the distributor is installed or not.
In case the distributor is missing. It issues an error message. 3.5” and 4” prints
are distributed and processed on 2 tracks. 5”, 6”, 7” and 8” prints are not distrib-
uted and fed through the paper processor in a straight-line motion.
The maximal length of prints to be distributed in a 2 track machine is 180mm

and 305mm for the 2 track 12” machine with panorama feeder. The distributor
moves a print as soon as the previous print has left, detected by the reflective
light barriers.
The belt drive motor of the distributor drives the conveyer belt via a pinion and
transports the print from the feeder into the carriage at high speed. For small
prints a second stepper motor moves the carriage to one of the two positions.
For large prints the carriage remains in the left position and just moves the print
in a straight-line motion. After that the belt drive motor transports the print until
it reaches the corresponding light barrier at the top end. Now the corresponding
electromagnetic clutch is activated to drive the upper belt system. At the end the
paper processor transport takes over the print at a low speed of 1cm/sec. This
sequence is necessary to ensure correct tracking.
saml10005a
Free wheeling
Free wheeling
1 cm/sec.
Main-
Light barrier Light barrier transport
left right
Transport belts
Electromagnetic
Electromagnetic clutch, right
clutch, left
Cover
Transport belt
SM 1
Transport belt Conveyer
Distributor
SM 2
Distributor
Home
Free wheeling sensor
Service Manual 203

Paper path
Two reflective light barriers are mounted on top of the distributor. If the respec-
tive light barrier does not detect a print after a couple of steps, an error is dis-
played. The left stop of the carriage is the home position. If the home position
cannot be found when distributing, an error is displayed. After a restart, two
98.22.56 Edition 3
clutches make the upper belts driving.
Slave C and the distributor are connected via the following lines:
START: A starting pulse on this line activates a distributor

action if the distributor is not busy already.
DISTRIBUTOR ACTIVE: This line is used to inform the slave C that the
distributor motion is in progress.
BUSY: This line remains active until the previous print

has left the distributor.
ERROR: This line is active if the carriage is unable to

detect its home position or if the light barrier for
the end position has not detected a print after a
couple of steps.
RESET: Following an error, a pulse on this line triggers a

hardware reset of the distributor slave.
PAPER WIDTH: This line is used to inform the distributor if the

paper width is 4” or smaller / 4” or larger.
DISTRIBUTOR CON- This line transmits the information if a distributor

NECTED: is connected or not.
204 Service Manual

Service Manual
)LJ
SENSORS:
Feeder -> print present
Distributor home
'LVWULEXWRUWLPLQJGLDJUDP
MOTORS:
Feeder to Printer pos.
Paper into Feeder
Feeder to PP pos.
Paper into Dist. SM 1
Distribute SM 2
Paper advance SM 1
Clutch right
Clutch left
SENSORS:
1 cm/sec. 1 cm/sec.
Right track
1 cm/sec. 1 cm/sec.
Left track
0 1- - - 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
205
saml10006a
Paper path
206

Paper path
)LJ
Timing Masterlab 320 / 520 1 Man 9 x 13
Transport Film
Negativ Clamp
Filterwheel rotate
Calculate Neg. Data
Extract Paper
7LPLQJGLDJUDPVRISDSHUSDWK
Cut Paper
7LPLQJGLDJUDP0/PDQXDOPRGH
Paper to Expo Pos
Expose Paper (Atten.)
Feeder to Printerpos
Paper into Feeder
Paper in Feeder
Vacuum fan on
ing normal operation and show the reason for variations in production speed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ..... 44
The following timing diagrams show the interaction of the various systems dur-
saml10007a
Service Manual
Service Manual
)LJ
Timing Masterlab 320 / 520 1 Auto 9 x 13
Transport Film
Negative Clamp
Filter Wheel rotate
Calculate Neg. Data
Extract Paper
Cut Paper
Paper to Expo Pos
7LPLQJGLDJUDP0/DXWRPDWLFPRGH
Paper into Feeder
Paper in Feeder
Vacuum fan on
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
207
saml10008a
Paper path
208
Paper path
)LJ
Timing Masterlab 740 3 Man 9 x 13
Transport Film
Negative Clamp
Filter Wheel rotate
Calculate Neg. Data
Shutter closed
Extract Paper
7LPLQJGLDJUDP0/PDQXDOPRGH
Cut Paper
Paper to Expo Pos
Paper into Feeder
Paper into Dist.
Distribute
Track A
Track B
Vacuum fan on
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
saml10009a
Service Manual
Service Manual
)LJ
Timing Masterlab 740 1 Auto 9 x 13
Transport Film
Negative Clamp
Filter Wheel rotate
Calculate Neg. Data
Shutter closed
Extract Paper
Cut Paper
7LPLQJGLDJUDP0/DXWRPDWLFPRGH
Paper to Expo Pos
Feeder to Printer pos.
Paper into Feeder
Feeder to PP pos.
Paper into Dist.
Distribute
Track A
Track B
Vacuum fan on
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
209
saml10010a
Paper path
Paper path
6HQVRURYHUYLHZ
saml10048a
SM
= Hall sensor
98.22.56 Edition 3
= Reflective lightbarrier
Lens/Zoom
- Lens code reading group = Fork type lightbarrier
Distributor DC = DC - Motor
- Left track
- Right track = Stepper motor
SM SM
- Distributor carriage
home position
= Solenoid
SM
Feeder DC
- Print present
- Print > 4 inch
- Print still in feeder
- PP position
- Printer position
Paper deck SM DC
SM
D
Vacuum fan
C
Knife assembly
- Knife right position
- Knife left position
Paper extractor
Sensor board "PAMID"

- Hall sensors (4x)
- Papersplice
- Paperend
Paper cassette
210 Service Manual

Paper path
5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWVDQGFKHFNV
/RDGLQJSDSHU
98.22.56 Edition 3
The detailed procedure is described in the ‘Operating Manual’.
1RWH /RDGLQJDSDSHUFDVVHWWHPXVWEHGRQHLQDGDUNURRP
saml10011a
When loading a new roll of paper,

the bar on the cassette exit has to
Metal type cassette
be pushed down to feed the paper
saml10012a through. The bar works as a light
trap and as a brake for the paper
when the cassette is not in use.
Plastic type cassette (old and new)

saml10013a
ca. 4 cm
(~1.5 inches)
Pull out the paper. It should pro-
Metal type cassette trude from the exit approximately
saml10014a 4cm (~1.5”)
ca. 4 cm
(~1.5 inches)
Service Manual 211

Paper path
Three different sizes of light traps (adapters) are available for the various paper
cassettes.
Ensure the correct size is mounted.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml10015a
6"
A A Smallest type for metal type

paper cassettes 3.5”, 4” and 5”
7"
B) Medium type for old plastic type

B cassettes 3.5” to 6”.
C) Large type for metal type cas-

9"
settes 6” 7” and 8”
When inserting the cassette into the machine, make sure that the lever is in
the unlock position (turned clockwise).
saml10016a
The paper cassette is unlocked for

removal or exchange by turning the
Metal type cassette lever clockwise.
saml10017a
After docking the paper cassette it is
locked in position by turning the lever
counterclockwise.
212 Service Manual

Paper path
&RGLQJWKHSDSHUFDVVHWWH
The paper cassettes are delivered uncoded (no magnets inserted) with a set of
magnets and adhesive labels to mark every paper cassette individually with the
98.22.56 Edition 3
paper width and the number of the paper memory.

saml10018a
8 4 2 1
Coding is done according to the following table:
3DSHU
&RGH 3DSHUPHPRU\IDFWRU\GHIDXOW
PHPRU\
1 2 4 8
0 Reserved for test strip cassette
1 X 3.5” MT
2 X 3.5” GL
3 X X 4.0” MT
4 X 4.0” GL
5 X X 5.0” MT
6 X X 5.0” GL
7 X X X 8.0” MT
8 X 8.0” GL
9 X X Paper 9
10 X X Paper 10
11 X X X Paper 11
12 X X Paper 12
13 X X X Paper 13
14 X X X Paper 14
15 X X X X Paper 15
Coding the paper cassette is basically the same for metal type and plastic type
paper cassettes. The only difference is the additional washer required for the
metal type paper cassette.
Service Manual 213

Paper path
saml10019a
)RUPHWDOW\SHFDVVHWWHVRQO\
Color dot First insert the washer (delivered
Washer with the cassette) into each hole a
98.22.56 Edition 3
magnet is going to be placed.
Metal type paper cassette

saml10020a
Insert the magnets with the color
Color dot dot upwards.

saml10021a
Black self-adhesive
label
Cover the holes with the black
self-adhesive labels supplied with
the cassette.
saml10022a
Paperwitdh 4"
Paperchannel
Stick the number corresponding

with the magnet code onto the
label on the cassette in position
metal type cassette
‘Paperchannel’
saml10024a
Stick the numeric label corre-

sponding with the paper width
onto the label to the cassette in the

Paperchannel Paperwidth position ‘Paperwidth’.
h
rwidt
Pape
nel
rchan
Pape
214 Service Manual

Paper path
The code of a docked paper cassette is checked with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.&$66&2'(
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK CASS CODE
Magnet 0: Yes Magnet 2: No
98.22.56 Edition 3
Magnet 1: No Magnet 3: No
Cassette code : 1
$GMXVWLQJWKHSDSHUFDVVHWWHWRGLIIHUHQWSDSHUZLGWKV
,03257$17
2QO\SODVWLFW\SHSDSHUFDVVHWWHFDQEHPRGLILHGIRUDGLIIHUHQWSDSHU
ZLGWKZLWKLQWKHPHFKDQLFDOOLPLWVRIWKHSDUWLFXODUFDVVHWWH
All paper cassettes are available as factory assembled units with the following
part numbers:
Type of paper cassettes Partnumber Remarks

Metal type paper cassette
3.5” cassette 34.45.76 replaced by 37.61.88
4” cassette 34.45.77 replaced by 37.61.89
Plastic type paper cassette
(old version)
plastic type paper cassette

(new version)
3.5” cassette T2 37.61.88
4” cassette T2 37.61.89
5” cassette T2 37.61.90
6” Cassette T2 37.61.91
7” cassette T2 37.64.84
8” cassette T2 37.64.85
8.25” cassette T2 37.64.86
It is possible to convert an existing plastic type paper cassette (old or new ver-
sion) to an other paper width with the help of the particular parts. For certain con-
version are conkits available containing all necessary parts.
Service Manual 215

Paper path
There are four such kits available:
Part number
98.22.56 Edition 3
Conversion to 3.5” 36.39.32
Conversion to 4” 36.39.33
For conversion proceed as follows:
saml04006a
A Open both clips.
saml10026a
Open the paper cassette.

216 Service Manual

Paper path
saml10027a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove any remaining paper core

and the mandrel.
saml10028a
Loosen both screws ($) and

remove the complete insert.
'A'
saml10029a
1
2
Remove the roller () and the
three spacers ()
2 4
1RWH %HFDUHIXOQRWWRORVHWKH
VSULQJVDQGWKHZDVKHU
WKH\DUHUHXVHG
3
2
3
saml10030a
1
2 Mount the new roller () and spac-
ers () to the guiding plates.
Don’t forget the washer () and the
springs ().
2 45
1RWH )RUD´FDVVHWWHDQDGGL
WLRQDOVSDFHUKDVWREH
2
3 LQVHUWHG
3
Insert the guiding plates into the correct position. Slots in the lower part of
the paper cassette aid you. The slots are for 3.5”, 4.0”, 5.0” and 6.0”.
Service Manual 217

Paper path
saml10028a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Fix both screws ($).
'A'
In the dark room, load the paper cassette with paper.
Ensure the paper can be pulled out of the cassette - when pressing down
the wedge - with a force of about 1.0 to 1.5kg.
Correct the magnet setting and attach the right label to the cassette.
&KHFNLQJWKHVHQVRUVRIWKHSDSHUH[WUDFWRU
The maintenance menu allows you to check the status of the sensors in the
extractor.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.&$666(16256
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK CASS SENSORS
Paperend No
Splice No
Loading mechanism: closed
5HPRYLQJWKHSDSHUH[WUDFWRU
Remove the paper cassette.

Remove the front panel and the panel of the electronics.
If installed, remove the backprinter from the paper deck.
218 Service Manual

Paper path
saml10031a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove screws (A) and (B).
Carefully pull out the complete

electronic assembly.
distributor rack
Disconnect the cables.

A
paperdeck
B
Reinstall in reverse order.
Adjust the paper position in the Y-axis if necessary as described in

chapter 10.3.11
&KHFNLQJWKHNQLIHIXQFWLRQDQGLWVVHQVRUV
The sensors and the function of the knife can be checked with the maintenance
menu.
Select the menu

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.&$66.1,)(
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK CASS KNIFE
Knife left No
Knife right Yes
CUTLFT CUTRGHT
5HSODFLQJWKHORZHUNQLIHEODGH
Remove the extractor as described in chapter 10.3.5

saml10032a
Remove screw ($) and (%).
PAMID
X Y Exchange the lower knife blade.
SM
Adjust the distances (;) and (<) to

A B
a parallelism of +/_0.2mm.
Knife blade
Tighten both screws ($) and (%).
Reinstall the extractor.
Service Manual 219

Paper path

chapter 10.3.11
98.22.56 Edition 3
5HSODFLQJWKHUROOLQJNQLIH
Remove the extractor as described in chapter 10.3.5
saml10033a
Loosen screw (A) in the support of

the sliding bar.
Pull
Push or pull the sliding bar
towards the stepper motor of the
A paper extractor.
saml10034a
Push the axis in the rolling knife

support towards the sliding bar.
Push
saml10035a
Pull down the axis with the knife

on it.
Down
saml10036a
Old Replace the complete circular

blade.
New
Reassemble in reverse order.
Reinstall the extractor

chapter 10.3.11
220 Service Manual

Paper path
5HPRYLQJWKHSDSHUGHFN
,03257$17
98.22.56 Edition 3
1HYHUHYHUWRXFKWKHVHDOHGVFUHZV
saml10037a
A Sealed D
SM
Sealed
Loosen screw ($, %, & and ')
Unplug the cables and remove the

B paper deck.
Sealed
Sealed
1RWH 1RVSHFLDODGMXVWPHQWVDUHUHTXLUHGDIWHULQVWDOODWLRQRIWKHSDSHU
GHFNDVORQJDVQRQHRIWKHVHDOHGVFUHZVKDVEHHQORRVHQHG
$GMXVWLQJWKHWHQVLRQRIWKHWUDQVSRUWEHOWV
saml10038a
Slightly loosen the screw (A) in the
SM
front and the rear side of the paper
deck.
X
Loosen the counternut (B) at the
A front and the rear side of the paper
deck.
C
B
Adjust the distance (X) to 11+/-
0.5mm by turning screw (C). Make
sure the distance is the same in

the front and the rear as both roll-
ers have to be parallel to each
other.
Tighten the counternut (B) at the

front and the rear of the paper
deck without altering the position
of screw (C).
Tighten both screws (A).
Service Manual 221

Paper path
$GMXVWLQJWKHVLGHZLVHSDSHUSRVLWLRQ<D[LV
With this adjustment the paper on the paper deck is adjusted to ensure an equal
overspill of the projection on both sides (b and b’) on the paper.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml10039a
Paper SM
Light-up area
Y (sidewise)
(sidewise)
b'
Initialize the machine.
Insert a paper cassette and lock it. Leave it locked during the whole adjust-
ment procedure.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5(;36<6):+((/&2/256
Press the key below 7851 until white light is on the paper deck.
Activate the negative mask solenoid with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.$&78$7(.
Press the key below &/$03 to activate the solenoid.
Now, position a print on the paper deck with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.75$163)(7&+.
Check the overspill of the projected light. The difference between b and b’
must be below 1 ... 2mm. If there is a difference greater than 2mm proceed
with the following steps.
222 Service Manual

Paper path
saml10042a
98.22.56 Edition 3
A/B
Remove both screws ($) and (%)

electronic of the extractor.
rack
A
topview
paperdeck B
saml10041a
The entire extractor assembly

may now be shifted sidewise by
pushing or pulling the unit to the
position where the projection is
equal.
4 mm
Tighten both screws again.
$GMXVWLQJWKHORQJLWXGLQDOSDSHUSRVLWLRQ;D[LV
With this adjustment the paper on the paper deck is adjusted to ensure an equal
overspill of the projection on both sides (a and a’) on the paper. This adjustment
is done by software.
Service Manual 223

Paper path
saml10040a
Paper SM
98.22.56 Edition 3
Light-up area
X (longitudinal)
a a'
Initialize the machine.
Insert a paper cassette and lock it. Leave it locked during the whole adjust-
ment procedure.
Select the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5(;36<6):+((/&2/256
Press the key below 7851 until white light is on the paper deck.
Activate the negative mask solenoid with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(5),75$&.$&78$7(.
Press the key below &/$03 to activate the solenoid.
Now, position a print on the paper deck with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.75$163)(7&+.
Check the overspill of the projection. The difference between a and a’ must
be below 1 ... 2mm. If there is a difference greater than 2mm proceed with
the following steps.
Select the menu

0$,1735,17(53$75$&.,1,7$'-867.
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK INIT ADJUST
Paper position [mm]
[-0.0]
ADJUST
Press the key below $'-867 and enter the amount of millimeters the
position should be adjusted
The adjustable range is +/- 10mm.
Positive numbers --> the print moves forward
Negative numbers --> the print moves backward
224 Service Manual

Paper path
Check the overspill again

98.22.56 Edition 3
Repeat the adjustment procedure until the overspill is correct.
&KDQJLQJWKHW\SHRIIHHGHU
It may be necessary to change or reset the kind of feeder in the machine if e.g.
the panorama feeder is installed or if you have had a loss of data.
Select the menu:

6(7!6<67(0237,213$75$&..
1RWH 7KHPHQX6(7!LVSURWHFWHGE\DSDVVZRUG
SET SYSTEM OPTION PATRACK

Kind of Paper_Track
STD 2-TRACK 2-TRACK-12”
Press the key below the word specifying the kind of feeder you want.
STD = Standard (1 track machine).
Was a DIP switch setting (#2=OFF) on the CPU with
main software < 2.60.
2-TRACK = 2 track machine with standard feeder.
Was a DIP switch setting (#2=ON) on the CPU with
main software < 2.60.
2-TRACK-12” 2 track machine with panorama feeder (12” length
distribution).
Initiate the paper track with the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.,1,7$//.

$GMXVWLQJWKHVHQVRUVLQWKHSDQRUDPDIHHGHU
Two sensors in the panorama feeder are found on the PBA PAFE2. a third one
is mounted separatelly. The adjustment is done as follows:
Take a piece of 12” photographic paper and cut out a window to get access
to the test points and the potentiometers.
Service Manual 225

Paper path
saml10043a
Light barrier
98.22.56 Edition 3
Left
PAFE GND
Middle
Right
Photopaper mask
Insert the paper into the feeder that all three light barriers are covered.
Connect a voltmeter between GND and the test point ‘Left’.
The voltage should read <= 0.75Vdc.
If the value is not correct adjust it with the Potentiometer ‘LEFT’.
Do the same for the light barriers ‘Middle’ and ‘Right’.
Disconnect the voltmeter.
Remove the paper.
Reconnect the voltmeter between GND and test point ‘Left’
The voltage should now read >=4.8Vdc
&KHFNLQJWKHVHQVRUV
There are sensors in the feeder monitoring the paper and the end positions of
the feeder.
To check the sensors in the feeder enter the menu:

0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.(;,76(16
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK EXIT SENS
Print at feeder end: No

Print width > 4 Inch: No
1RWH 7KHDGGLWLRQDOVHQVRUQRWRQWKH3$)(LVQRWPRQLWRUHGDQGGLV
SOD\HG
226 Service Manual

Paper path
To check the sensors monitoring the end positions of the feeder enter the
menu:
0$,17!35,17(53$75$&.(;,7)(('(5
MAINT PRINTER PATRACK EXIT FEEDER
98.22.56 Edition 3
Feeder in Printerposition: Yes

Feeder in Processorposition: No
TURNPRI TURMPRO
To check the sensor press the key below 7851352 and the feeder turn
to the processor position and the sensors change their state.
Press now the key below 785135, and the feeder returns to the stan-
dard position.
0DQXDOO\PRYLQJWKHIHHGHU
The feeder is normally at one of the end positions. In order to move it manually
to an other position do the following:
Switch OFF the Printer
saml10044a
Fee
der
Loosen screw ($) but don’t
remove it fully.
PP
position Lift up the lever mounted to the
motor drive shaft.
Turn the feeder.
A
Printer
position
5HPRYLQJWKHGLVWULEXWRU
Switch OFF the printer.
Remove the front panel.
Service Manual 227

Paper path
saml10047a
Remove the knurled screws ($)
and (%) of the distributor cover.
Cover plate
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the nuts (') till ()) of the
Distributor Electronic distributor itself.
rack
C D
F E
Disconnect the cables.
Distributor
cover 1RWH 0DNHVXUHWKHGLVWULEXWRU
A B
Paper deck DQGWKHSODWHRQWRSRIWKH
GLVWULEXWRUGRQ¶WIDOOGRZQ
&KHFNLQJWKHGLVWULEXWRU
3RZHUVXSSO\
Connect a voltmeter to TP6 (+5V) and TP9 (GND) on the PBA Distributor,
DIST and check the supply (+5Vdc). If necessary adjust the voltage of the
electronic power supply.
saml10049a
Adr. LB End Track left

+ 24V Mem.
Pwr.Gnd Data
LB End Track right
+ 5V
LB Carriage
Log.Gnd Home Position
CPU
8031 Conveyor Motor
Paper Width > 4"
Start Distributor
Distr. Active
Distr. Busy Distributor Motor
Distr. Error
Reset Distr.
Clutch right
Distr. connected
Clutch left
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI',67
&KHFNLQJWKHOLJKWEDUULHUV
Check the physical alignment of both sensors at the top of the assembly.
Visually align each reflective light barrier in a way that it detects paper.
228 Service Manual

Paper path
saml10045a
light barrier
98.22.56 Edition 3
3 +/- 0.3mm
Insert a piece of paper an check
both light barriers if the detection
surface is parallel to the paper at a
distance of approx. 3mm.
0HFKDQLFDOFKHFNV
Check the mechanical operation of all moving parts. Pay particular atten-
tion to the lower carriage assembly and the free wheeling bearing on the
sleeve shaft. Ensure that the captive nut is mounted the right way. Smooth
movement of the lower carriage is essential.
saml10046a
Sleeve shaft
Free wheel
Captive nut
1RWH 1HYHUHYHURLORUJUHDVHWKHIUHHZKHHORWKHUZLVHLWVIUHHZKHHOLQJ
IXQFWLRQVXEVLGHV
Service Manual 229

Paper path
6FKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
PBA Backprinter 1 36.04.38 ES 1
PBA Backprinter 1 36.04.38 AZ 1
PBA Backprinter 2 36.04.58 ES 1
PBA Backprinter 2 36.04.58 AZ 1 only
PBA Distributor, DIST 34.24.05 ES 1
PBA Distributor, DIST 34.24.05 AZ 1
PBA Papermag. Ident., PAMID 34.75.21 ES 1
PBA Papermag. Ident., PAMID 34.75.21 AZ 1
PBA Pap. sens. Feeder, PAFE 34.78.85 ES 1
PBA Pap. sens. Feeder, PAFE 34.78.85 AZ 1
PBA Pap. sens. Feeder 2, PAFE2 36.43.01 ES 1
PBA Pap. sens. Feeder 2, PAFE2 36.43.01 AZ 1
Lichtschranke FEEDER 2 kpl. 36.43.22 AZ 1
230 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
)LOPSURFHVVRU 11
The film processor has a single track transport system using a short leader, a so
called leader card with lateral holes allowing to process 110, 126, 135, 120, 220
and APS film.
The film loading is based on a film cassette holding the film which is then fixed
to the leader card. After the loading procedure the film enters the wet part made
with 6 tanks. The tanks contain the following chemistry:
o Tank 1 = Developer
o Tank 2 = Bleach
o Tank 3 + 4 = Fixer
o Tank 5 + 6 = Stabilizer
Each tank has an agitation pump to stir the liquid. A multi head pump (1 pump
head for each tank) is used for replenishment. The liquid in each tank is brought
to operating temperature by electric heaters. The temperature is controlled by
temperature sensors. Level sensors monitor the liquid level in the tanks.
When the film leaves the wet part, it is transported to the dryer and then to the
film collecting bin.
Service Manual 231

Film processor
saml04009a
98.22.56 Edition 3
3
4
16
5
15
14 13 12 11 10 9
1 Exhaust fan 2 Dryer

3 Temperature sensor dryer 4 Dryer heating 220V / 700W
5 Dryer fan 6 Squeegee roller
9 Stabilizer 2 10 Stabilizer 1
11 Fixer 2 12 Fixer 1
13 Bleach 14 Developer
15 Transport safety switch 16 Film collecting bin
6SHFLILFDWLRQV Master Lab / Master Lab+
Transport system with short leader (leader card)

Film loading unit with cassette for one track
Transport speed 478mm / min.
Selectable temperature range 30.1 ... 50.0°C for the chemical liquids
40.1 ... 79.9°C for the dryer
Measurable temperature range 0.0 ... 102.3°C
Temperature accuracy +/- 0.05°C in the range of 0 ... 50°C
+/- 0.10°C in the range of 50 ... 102.3°C
Selectable transport speed 190 ... 200s developer time
Selectable replenishment rates developer 10 ... 100ml / m
bleach 1.0 ... 50ml / m
fixer 10 ... 100ml / m
stabilizer 10 ... 100ml / m
232 Service Manual

Film processor
Process specification for C-41 process:
5HSOUDWH 7DQN
7LPH 7HPS $ODUP 3XPSIORZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
%DWK >POP YRO

>VHF@ >&@ >&@ >OPLQ@
ILOP@ >O@
Developer 195 -1/+3 37.8 +/- 0.3 +/- 0.2 20.7 12 - 18.5 11.84
Bleach 48 38 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 4.6 1.35 - 2 2.60
Fixer 1 48 38 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 29.6 2 - 2.7 2.69
Fixer 2 48 38 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 29.6 1.35 - 2 2.58
Stabilizer 1 48 38 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 35.8 2.15 2.70
Stabilizer 2 45 38 +/- 3.0 +/- 3.0 35.8 2.15 2.58
Dryer 82 55 +/- 5.0 +/- 5.0 ---- ---- ----
1) Length of a 135-24 film is approx. 1.10m.
+HDWLQJV\VWHP
)LOPSURFHVVRUKHDWLQJV\VWHP
Bleach, fixer and stabilizer tanks have a heating element in each tank. Only the
developer has two heating elements. Each heating element is powered with
220V / 150W and is driven by the M802 board (for details refer to chapter 13.3).
+HDWLQJHOHPHQWV The heating element in the bleach and the fixer 1 is made of titanium where as
all the others are made of stainless steel AISI.
1RWH )L[HUKDVDWLWDQLXPKHDWLQJHOHPHQWEHFDXVHWKHFRQWDPLQDWLRQ
RIWKLVEDWKE\OLTXLGFDUULHGRYHUIURPWKHEOHDFKDQGWKHSRVVL
ELOLW\RIFRUURVLRQLVWKHUHIRUHPXFKKLJKHUWKHQLQIL[HU
The difference between the two heaters is visible at the lower end.
Bottom of a heater made of titanium bottom of a heater made of stainless

steel
Each heating element has a built-in thermal-lag switch switching the power OFF
at 50°C +/-5°C.
Service Manual 233

Film processor
saml11003a
4 5
98.22.56 Edition 3
3
1 Heating wire 360Ohm = 0.64A

2 2 Sand
3 Thermal-lag switch
4 220V / 0.64A connection
5 Ground connection
7HPSHUDWXUHOHYHOVHQVRU
Each tank has a combined liquid level and temperature sensor.The temperature
is not measured in every tank, only in:
o the developer
o the bleach
o the second fixer and
o the last stabilizer.
saml11004a
Heater / sensor
support
Float
Circlip
Temperature
sensor
234 Service Manual

Film processor
The processor board MCB compares the measured values of the temperature
sensors with the preset values and calculates the required heating.
The resistance of the temperature sensors is:

98.22.56 Edition 3
o at 20°C: 1.97kOhm
o at 35°C: 2.10kOhm
The level sensor in each tank monitors the liquid level. A reed contact is
switched by a float. If the liquid level is too low the auto top-off system is acti-
vated. In a Master Lab without automatic top-off system, the corresponding LED
under the film processor cover will light up and a warning appears on the display.
'U\HUVHFWLRQ
The heater in the dryer consists of a fan with a heater mounted directly to this
fan. The heater has a rating of 220V / 700W. A built-in protective bimetal thermal
switch cuts OFF the power if the temperature exceeds 85°C.
saml11005a
1 Fan
2 Heater
3 3 Temperature sensor
4 Dryer cover
2 5 Exhaust fan
1
The actual temperature is monitored by a sensor.

The film dryer temperature control is enabled as soon as the first film processing
cycle is started and is disabled when the work cycle is over.
The dryer fan is switched OFF 1 minute after the end of a work cycle. During the
heating-up period - start of the machine - the dryer is switched OFF.
+HDWLQJPDQDJHPHQW
A heating management is necessary to ensure that the temperatures raise as

fast as possible without exceeding the maximum rated line power and to keep
the temperatures stable when they have reached the setup values.
Service Manual 235

Film processor
The dryer is switched on after the temperatures in the different chemistry tanks
are at the setup values.
The different heaters are also switched ON and OFF in time slices with different
98.22.56 Edition 3
power.Three phases with different conditions are responsible for the heating
management:
1 Warm up phase
Definition: (actual temperature) = (setup temperature) - (warm up trigger
value)
2 Keep temperature phase

Definition:(actual temperature = (setup temperature - Thermostat trigger
value)
3 Cool down phase

Definition:(actual temperature > (setup temperature)
The different triggers are defined as follows:
ZDUPXS WKHUPRVWDW
&KHPLVWU\ DODUPWULJJHU
WULJJHU WULJJHU
Developer (setup) - 0.2°C (setup) - 0.1°C (setup) +/- 0.2°C
Bleach (setup) - 2.9°C (setup) - 1.5°C (setup) +/- 3.0°C
Fixer (setup) - 2.9°C (setup) - 1.5°C (setup) +/- 3.0°C
Stabilizer (setup) - 2.9°C (setup) - 1.5°C (setup) +/- 3.0°C
Dryer ----- (setup) - 0.5°C (setup) +/- 5.0°C
The heating power for each tank in the different phases is as follows:
PD[KHDWLQJ ZDUPXS NHHSWHPS &RROGRZQ

&KHPLVWU\
SRZHU SKDVH SKDVH SKDVH
Developer 300W 300W 75W 0W
Bleach 150W 75W 19W 0W
Fixer 1 150W 75W 10W 0W
Fixer 2 150W 75W 75W 0W
Stabilizer 1 150W 75W 10W 0W
Dryer 700W 0W 700W 0W
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP
To replenish a chemical bath means to regenerate it with fresh chemistry.
Four pumps are mounted on the same crank shaft driven by a 220V motor which
is controlled by the M802 board (for details refer to chapter 13.3)
For each type of chemistry bath is one pump.
For chemistry bathes with two tanks, the replenishment is always fed into the
second tank and the overflow is fed into the first tank.
236 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Drive circuit 220Vac
4 Fuse
resistor
+5V
Fuse
resistor
Stabilizer
Indicator
LED
Bleach
Input
to heater
Fixer
5 Dev.
6
2 M802
F3
GND
3 F4
Fuse F3: 4A fast blow (L2)
230V~ L2 Phase
230V~ L1 Phase
L17: Developer, Bleach, Fixer and

Stabilizer replenishment pumps
)LJ 3ULQFLSOHRIUHSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP
1 Replenishment pump assembly 2 Chemical filters (four)
3 Film replenishment tanks 4 Film processing tanks
5 Vacuum sensor 6 Microswitch
Each pump has a different flow rate per stroke and the tubes have different col-
ors for clear identification. For the C-41 process the following is valid:
7DQN )ORZUDWHSHUVWURNH 7XEHFRORU

Developer 2.45ml blue
Bleach 0.55ml red
Fixer 3.50ml green

Stabilizer 4.25ml yellow
)ORZVHQVRUYDFXXPVHQVRU
The flow of the replenishment one tank is checked with a flow or vacuum sensor.
If there is not enough flow, the message ‘Warning, change replenishment’
appears on the screen of a Master Lab+.
In Master Lab’s up to serial number 100749 the flow is checked in the stabilizer
chemistry with a float.
Service Manual 237

Film processor
In Master Lab+ from serial number 100750 the flow is checked in the developer
chemistry with a vacuum sensor.
98.22.56 Edition 3
5HSOHQLVKPHQWPDQDJHPHQW
Different phases are considered for the control of the replenishment pumps. The
phases are as follows:
1 The film processor pump is enabled when 1 meter of film has been entered
after the loading cassette has been unlocked.
2 The pumps make 20 strokes in the commands:

o maual replenishment and
o test cycle.
3 During start-up, when the machine is switched ON by the keyboard 21!

key, the machine makes 4 strokes to check the flow of replenishment. If no
flow of replenishment is detected by the vacuum sensor, the remaining
number of strokes is stored and executed after the vacuum sensor detects
replenisher again.
5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP
The recirculation pumps are required to ensure the stability of the chemicals.
Recirculation is done by a single centrifugal pump for each tank.
The pumps are located under the tanks and have an input filter.
saml11007a
1 Bleach aeration pump
2 3 4 2 Bleach recirculation pump
3 Fixer 1 recirculation pump
4 Fixer 2 recirculation pump
5 Developer spray pump
6 Developer recirculation pump
7 Stabilizer 2 recirculation pump
1 5 6 7 8
$HUDWLRQSXPS The bleach aeration pump adds air (oxygen) to the bleach chemistry to support
the oxidation.
6SUD\SXPS The developer has an additional spray pump.
238 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11008a
1 Developer tank spray bar assem-
4 bly
1
2 Recirculation and spray bar
98.22.56 Edition 3
pump
3 Recirculation pump
4 Chemical filter
5
5 Developer overflow tank
2 3
The developer spray pump sprays chemistry directly to the film surface accord-
ing to specifications of the film and chemistry manufacturer.
saml11009a
Fuse
resistor
+5V
Fuse
resistor
Indicator
LED
Dev. Bleach Fixer Stabilizer Input

to heater
GND
M802
2
F3
F4

230V~ L2 Phase
230V~ L1 Phase
L11: Bleach air pump

L12: Developer pump
L13: Bleach pump
L14: Fixer pump
L15: Stabilizer pump
1 Recirculation pumps 2 Bleach aeration pump
The developer spray pump is working like the dryer fan:

o during a work cycle the pump is ON
o without a work cycle the pump is OFF
5HFLUFXODWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
The pumps are enabled at the following conditions:
1 In the standby mode all pumps are OFF
2 In the warm up mode all pumps are ON.
3 In the normal mode are two conditions to be observed:

o During a work cycle the pumps are ON
o Without a work cycle the pumps are continousely switched ON for 10s
and switched OFF for 90s.
4 In the shutdown mode all pumps are OFF if any work cycle is finished.
Service Manual 239

Film processor
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP
The transport system is driven by a 24Vdc motor whose speed is controlled and
regulated by the M802 and the MCB boards
98.22.56 Edition 3
A toothed belt connects the motor to the main shaft. The worm gears on the
main shaft drive the gears of the different racks.
saml11010a
4 4 3 2
7 6 6 6 5
1 Motor 2 Toothed belt

3 Main shaft 4 Friction bearing
5 Ball bearing 6 Worm gears for racks
7 Worm gear for film loading station
3ULQFLSOHRIVSHHGFRQWURO
A slotted disk is connected to the shaft of the motor. When rotating, the slotted
disk interrupts a light barrier. The impulses of the light barrier are counted and
compared with the preset value. If the speed is different to the preset value, the
pulse-width of the energizing sequence will be either increased or decreased
depending on the direction of the difference.
saml11011a
4 5
2 3 1 Motor
1 2 Light barrier on M806 board
3 Slotted disk
4 Toothed belt
5 Main shaft
240 Service Manual

Film processor
%ORFNGLDJUDPRIVSHHGFRQWURO
saml13006a
M803 (Paper)
MCB or M
98.22.56 Edition 3
M802 (Film)
slotted disk
light barrier
0RWRUHQHUJL]LQJ
The transport motor is energized by a 24Vdc pulse-width modulated supply. The

pulses are repeated every 10ms and the pulse-width can vary between 0.8ms
and 9.2ms depending on the load.
saml11012a
t = 0.8 ... 9.2ms
24Vdc
0
t = fix 10ms
)LOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ
The film loading station is a molded plastic assembly, containing the cutter and
the transport section.
The transport section includes two pairs of rubber rollers. The rollers on the bot-
tom side are moved by gears. These gears are driven by the main shaft also
driving the gears of the racks. The free wheeling rollers on the upper side sit on
the bottom rollers held together with springs.
The cutter section includes the knife with its solenoid and the manual film cutter,
the film loading cassette release solenoid two micro-switches, two springs to
eject the film loading cassette, the M805a and M805b boards with the light bar-
riers to detect the film width and the film length.
After inserting a film loading cassette, the microswitch #2 is activated. This

switch enables the film cutting solenoid. As soon as the sensor boards M805a
(transmitter) and M805b (receiver) detect the leader card, the film transport
starts.
If the film loading cassette holds a 135 film, the film will be pulled out of the car-
tridge. At the end of the film, the cartridge is pulled forward and touches a roll
Service Manual 241

Film processor
bar activating microswitch #1. This microswitch activates the knife solenoid and
the film is cut.
If the knife is unable to cut the film the first time, it tries again for up to maximal
98.22.56 Edition 3
20 times. If the knife could not cut the film with three tries, the film transport stops
automatically and the knife tries another 17 times.
If it fails to cut the film, the error message µ),/0&877(5'2(61¶7&87¶ will appear
on the screen and a continuous acoustic alarm is activated. In such a case, the
operator must cut the film manually with the film cutting lever. If this doesn’t hap-
pen within two minutes, the knife tries it again for another 10 times. This proce-
dure would continue endless until the film is cut and microswitch #1 is released.
As soon as the film is cut, the transport starts automatically.
When the film has been cut successfully, the cassette is ejected after about 30
seconds and a new film can be loaded.
If a film other then 135 is loaded in the cassette, the end of the film is detected
by the sensors and the cassette is ejected after about 30 seconds.
saml11013a
1 Coupled rubber rollers

2 Spring to eject loading cassette
3 Knife
4 Solenoid to release loading cassette
5 Solenoid to activate the knife

6 Manual film cutting lever
7 Safety switch
242 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11014a
9 8
98.22.56 Edition 3
10
8 Microswitch #1, activates the knife

9 Microswitch #2, cassette present, enables the knife solenoid
10 PBA M805a board
saml11015a
11 Roll bar, activates microswitch #1

11
0ERDUG
2YHUYLHZ
Two different types of M805 boards are found in the loading station of the Master
Lab. Machines delivered after October 1992 are equipped with the new M805A
and M805B boards.
The M805 board reads the film size in the film loading station. The board con-
tains 4 optical infrared sensors (OP1 = track 1 to OP4 = track 4).
23 23 23 23 'HWHFWHGILOP

X X X 120 film, 220 film
X X 135 film, 126 film
X 110 film
X Leader card
The sensor activation time is used to recognize the difference between a 126
film and a 136 film as well as the difference between a 120 film and a 220 film.
Service Manual 243

Film processor
saml13020a
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Leader
98.22.56 Edition 3
16mm
17mm 17mm 26.5mm
110
135 / 126
120 / 220
)LJ 0VHQVRUV
2OGYHUVLRQ
The old version of the M805 board, installed in Master Lab delivered before
October 1992, is equipped with 4 reflective sensors, all on the same board.
1HZYHUVLRQ
The new version of the M805 Board is equipped with three transmission sensors
and 1 reflective sensor. The transmission sensors are used to detect the tracks
1 to 3 while the reflective sensor detects the leader card (track 4).
The reflective sensor and the transmitters of the transmission sensors are
mounted on one board, the M805A, while the receivers are mounted on the sec-
ond board, the M805B.
5DFNV
Each tank in the film processor contains a rack and an other rack is in the dryer.
The racks in the bleach, both fixers and the first stabilizer are the same. The rack
in the last stabilizer is equipped with four squeegee rollers at the outlet. Also the
rack in the developer is different, as it is longer then all the others.
The racks contain rollers with gears driven by the main shaft to move the leader
card. For correct operation, the racks must be synchronized and all gears must
be aligned properly.
244 Service Manual

Film processor
A light shield cover is mounted on top of the racks to protect the films. Light
entering the film processor would make the films foggy or even destroy all neg-
atives on it. Therefore never open the film processor while a film is processed!
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml11016a
2 2
1 Main gear
2 Squeegee roller
3 3 Upper roller
4 4
4 Guides
5 Plastic clip to fix the cross under
6 Lower roller
5 5 7 Cross under
6
All racks in the tanks are locked with a metal bracket and with plastic locker that
fixes the racks to the heater cover.
saml11017a
Metal bracket
Plastic locker
The dryer rack is screwed to the back wall
Service Manual 245

Film processor
+HDWLQJV\VWHP
98.22.56 Edition 3
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHKHDWHUV
Each heater in the film processor and the dryer can be switched ON or OFF.
:$51,1*
6ZLWFK2))WKHKHDWHUDIWHURQHPLQXWHWRDYRLGRYHUKHDWLQJ
WKHFKHPLVWU\
Use the menu:

0$,17!)352&7(03+($7(5
9LHZLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHV
Enter the menu:

&200!)352&',63703
The following display shows the temperatures

COMM F.PROC DISPTMP
[°C] DEV BLEACH FIX STAB DRYER
Nom : 37.8 38.0 38.0 38.0 55.0
Act : 37.5 37.8 37.6 38.0 36.4
1RWH 7KHGU\HUKHDWVRQO\ZKHQDOOFKHPLVWU\WDQNVKDYHWKHFRUUHFW
WHPSHUDWXUH
&KHFNLQJFDOLEUDWLQJWKHWDQNWHPSHUDWXUHV
:$51,1*
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
Display the temperatures as told before.
246 Service Manual

Film processor
Wait until the nominal and the actual values on the display don’t vary any
more than 0.2°C.
1RWH 'RQ¶WFKHFNWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUH,WKHDWVRQO\ZKHQDOOFKHPLV
98.22.56 Edition 3
WU\WDQNVKDYHWKHFRUUHFWWHPSHUDWXUH
saml02036a
processor.
1RWH 7KHWUDQVSRUWVWRSVDXWR
PDWLFDOO\ZKHQHYHUWKHOLGLV
UHPRYHGDQGWKHHUURUPHV
VDJHµ7UDQVSRUW$ODUPLQ
)LOP3URFHVVRU¶LVGLV
SOD\HG
saml11018a
Disable the safety stop by turning
the screw 90° counterclockwise
(service position).
Press (17(5! to clear the

error. If a work cycle was in
progress, the transport starts
again.
saml02037a

the tanks.
:$51,1*
:KHQHYHU\RXPHDVXUHWKHWHPSHUDWXUHLQGLIIHUHQWWDQNV
YHU\SURSHUO\FOHDQWKHWKHUPRPHWHU2WKHUZLVH\RXFRQWDP
LQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQRWKHUWDQNVDQGWKH\PD\HYHQEHXVH
OHVVDIWHUZDUGV
Service Manual 247

Film processor
Take a precision thermometer

(e..g. a mercury type).
saml02038a
98.22.56 Edition 3
vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv vvvv
vvvv vvv vvv
vvvvvvvv
Measure the temperature of each
vvv vvv vvv vvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvv vvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
bath close to the float of the level
vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvv
vvvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvvvvvvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvv
vvvv vv vvv vvv vvvv vvv vvv vvv
vvvv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvvv vvvv vvvvvvvv vvvvvvvv
sensor (the place closest to the

temperature sensor).
Write the measured value on a

piece of paper.
1RWH 7KHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHIL[HUDQGWKHVWDELOL]HUPXVWEHPHDVXUHG
LQWKHVHFRQGWDQNRIWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJEDWK
In a consecutive way enter the menus:

0$,17!)352&7(03&$/703'(9
0$,17!)352&7(03&$/703%/($&+
0$,17!)352&7(03&$/703),;
0$,17!)352&7(03&$/70367$%
to compare the measured values for every bath with the corresponding
value in the menu.
Correct any difference of more than 0.2°C by correcting the corresponding

value in brackets with the measured value
MAINT F.PROC TMP CALTMP DEV
Actual Temperature [°C]
[37.8]
Wait a few minutes for the liquid in the tank can change its temperature.
Repeat the measurement until the difference between the measured and
the displayed value is less than 0.2°C.
saml02039a

ment is finished, place the light
shield back over the tanks.
Lower the cover of the film dryer.
248 Service Manual

Film processor
saml02040a

98.22.56 Edition 3
processor.
&DOLEUDWLQJWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUH
1RWH 7RFDOLEUDWHWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUH\RXQHHGDQHOHFWURQLFWKHU
PRPHWHUWRPHDVXUHWKHDLUWHPSHUDWXUH$QRUGLQDU\PHUFXU\
WKHUPRPHWHUFDQQRWEHXVHGLWLVWRRVORZ
saml02036a

processor.
saml11019a
saml11020a
Wire clamp Place the sensor of your electronic

Temperature
thermometer close to the built-in

sensor
sensor and secure it.
Dryer rack
saml11021a
Close the dryer cover.
Service Manual 249

Film processor
saml02040a
98.22.56 Edition 3
processor.
Make sure, the chemistry bathes are at the right temperature and in the film
processor is a work cycle in progress otherwise the heater doesn’t heat up
correctly to its nominal value.
Enter the menu:

0$,17!)352&7(03&$/703'5<(5
Correct any difference of more than +/-5oC by correcting the corresponding

value in brackets with the measured value
MAINT F.PROC TEMP CALTMP DRYER
o
Actual Temperature [ C]
[56.3]
Repeat the measuring sequence until the value is within the tolerance.
&KDQJLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHVHWWLQJ
To change the nominal values of the temperatures:
Enter the menu:

6(7!)352&7(03
1RWH 7KHPHQX6(7!QHHGVDSDVVZRUGWREHFRPHDFWLYH
SET F.PROC TEMP

Temperature [°C]
[37.8] [38.0] [38.0] [38.0] [55.0]
DEV BLEACH FIX STAB DRYER
Change the value in brackets of the desired chemistry to the new value.
&KHFNLQJWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUVOHYHOVHQVRUV
Remove the side panel of the film processor
250 Service Manual

Film processor
Remove the cover of the cable duct.
Unplug the corresponding connector of the temperature / level sensor.

98.22.56 Edition 3
Take the sensor out of the tank as described in chapter .
1RWH %HYHU\FDUHIXOQRWWRVSLOOFKHPLVWU\LQWRRWKHUWDQNVRWKHUZLVH
\RXFRQWDPLQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHUWDQNPDNLQJLWXVH
OHVV
Connect a Ohmmeter to pin 3 and

pin 4 to check the temperature
sensor (red and white wire).
saml11022a
The resistance of the sensor (type
Siemens KTY 10) is
1.97kOhm at 20°C
2.10kOhm at 35°C
Heater / sensor

support
Connect the Ohmmeter to pin 1
and pin 2 to check the level sensor
Float (blue and green wire).
Keep the level sensor in a upright

Circlip
position.
Temperature
sensor
The Ohmmeter should read
blue almost 0Ohm because the reed
b
1
lu
g
re
e
e
n
green
red
2 contact should be closed with the
3
red white
4
float in the lower position.
white
black
5
t
The Ohmmeter reading should

show an infinite value when the
float is moved up because the
contact opens.
Remount the sensor in the tank.
After the check, connect the sensor again.

Close the cover of the cable duct.
Close the side panel of thefilm processor.
Service Manual 251

Film processor
saml11023a
Temperature
98.22.56 Edition 3
Level
Heater ON/OFF ->

<- Level data
M802 MCB
5HSODFLQJDWHPSHUDWXUHOHYHOVHQVRU
saml02036a

processor.
saml02037a

the tanks.
252 Service Manual

Film processor
saml14006a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the side panel of the film

processor
Remove the cover of the cable

Cable duct duct.
Unplug the connector of the tem-

perature / level sensor to be
replaced.
:$51,1*
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
Remove the chemistry filters

saml11024a
Remove both screws of the heater

/ sensor cover and lift it off.
Screws
Service Manual 253

Film processor
saml11004a
Remove the sensor by pushing it
98.22.56 Edition 3
toward the racks.
Heater / sensor
support
1RWH %HYHU\FDUHIXOQRWWRVSLOO
FKHPLVWU\LQWRRWKHUWDQNV
RWKHUZLVH\RXFRQWDPLQDWH
Float WKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHU
WDQNPDNLQJLWXVHOHVV
Circlip
Insert the new temperature / level
sensor as shown.
Temperature
sensor
Connect the new temperature / level sensor.
Close the cable duct.
Remount the cover of the heaters.
Insert the chemistry filters.
close the dryer cover.
Close the side panel.
Close the lid of the film processor.
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPSV
The replenishment pumps can be switched ON or OFF manually.
,03257$17
'RQ¶WOHWWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPSVUXQWRRORQJ\RXZLOORYHUUHSOHQLVK
WKHEDWKVDQGZDVWHJRRGFKHPLVWU\
Enter the menu

0$,17!)352&/,48,'380365(3/
254 Service Manual

Film processor
&KHFNLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHV
:$51,1*
98.22.56 Edition 3
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
saml02036a
Remove the lid over the film pro-

cessor.
saml02035a
Fix a graduated plastic cylinder to
each tank having a repleishment
tube.
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
100:1
in 20 °C
ml
100
Lift the replenishment tubes, turn
90
80
70
90
80
70
90
80
70
90
80
70
them and place them into the cyl-
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
inders.
,03257$17
$OZD\VXVHWKHVDPHJUDGXDWHGF\OLQGHUIRUWKHVDPHWDQNWRSUHYHQWGL
OXWLQJRUPL[LQJXSWKHFKHPLVWU\
Select the menu:

&200!)352&0$15(3/
COMM F.PROC MANREPL
Nominal Quantity per Test Cycle [ml]
41.4 9.2 59.2 71.6
DEV BLEACH FIX STAB TEST
Press the key below the word 7(67.
The Master Lab+ now delivers 20 pump strokes of replenisher per tank into the
graduated cylinders. If no liquid is detected after 6 or 7 strokes an alarm mes-
sage is displayed and the test is stopped.
Service Manual 255

Film processor
Check the quantity of replenisher in each graduated cylinder and compare

it with the values displayed on the screen.
Pour the replenisher into the charging hole of the corresponding tank.
98.22.56 Edition 3
1RWH %HYHU\FDUHIXOWRSRXUWKHUHSOHQLVKHULQWRWKHULJKWWDQN2WKHU
ZLVH\RXFRQWDPLQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHUWDQNPDNLQJLW
XVHOHVV
&KDQJLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHIRUDOOFKHPLVWULHVWRJHWKHU
If the replenishment rate has to be changed proportional for every tank, it can be
done by software because all pumps are mounted on one shaft.
Select the menu:

6(7!)352&5(35$7(
SET F.PROC REPRATE
Replenishment Rate [ml/m]
[20.7] 4.6 29.6 35.8
DEV BLEACH FIX STAB
Change the value for the developer (value in the brackets) to the desired
rate. The values for bleach, fixer and stabilizer will be calculated automati-
cally after confirming.
&KDQJLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHIRURQHWDQNRQO\
If the replenishment rate for a particular tank has to be changed, the pump vol-
ume per stroke of that pump requires manual adjustment.
Set the replenishment rate for the particular tank with the menu:
0$,17!)352&/,48,'&$/3803
MAINT F.PROC LIQUID CALPUMP

48.8 10.8 69.6 80.4 [ml]
21.7 [4.8] [31.0] [35.8] [ml/m]
DEV BLEACH FIX STAB TEST
The selectable range is for: bleach 1 ... 50ml/m

fixer 10 ... 100ml/m
stabilizer 10 ... 100ml/m
Always confirm with (17(5!.
1RWH )RUGHYHORSHUXVHWKHSURFHGXUHGHVFULEHGXQGHUµ&KDQJLQJWKH
UHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHIRUDOOFKHPLVWULHVWRJHWKHU¶%XWEHDZDUHDOO
256 Service Manual

Film processor
RWKHUUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHVPD\QHHGDFRUUHFWLRQLQWKHRSSRVLWH
GLUHFWLRQZLWKWKHSURFHGXUHMXVWEHLQJGHVFULEHG
Calculate the difference between the old and the new value in %.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Now, the calculated diviation has to be adjusted mechanically at the particular

replenishment pump.
saml11025a
Adjust the screw at the pump to

1 the desired replenishment rate.
Turn the screw () cw to increase
% OF STROKE
100 or ccw to decrease the ratio.The
2 75
50 stroke indicator () and the stroke
25
scale () guide you in the right
3 0
way.
graduated cylinders. If no liquid is detected after 6 or 7 strokes an alarm mes-
sage is displayed and the test is stopped.
If the delivered quantity deviates from the µ120,1$/48$17,7<3(57(67

&<&/(¶, adjust the pump again and repeat the calibration.
5HSODFLQJDEHOORZRIWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPS
1RWH 7KHEHOORZIRUWKHEOHDFKLVDLQFKEHOORZDQGDOOWKHRWKHUVLQ
WKHILOPSURFHVVRUDUH´EHOORZV
This procedure may be necessary if you have a defective bellow.

Remove the upper side panel of the film processor.
saml11047a
Remove both screws ($) holding

the film replenishment pump
assembly
A A
Service Manual 257

Film processor
Carefully pull the assembly toward you until you have good access to the
bellows.
98.22.56 Edition 3
:$51,1*
%HDZDUHWKDWFKHPLFDOOLTXLGLVLQWKHWXEHVDQGRULQWKHEHO
ORZ:KHQ\RXGRWKHQH[WVWHSVWKLVOLTXLGZLOOIORZRXWHL
WKHULQWRWKHPDFKLQHRURQWR\RXUFORWKHV,WLVDGYLVDEOHWR
KDYHDSLHFHRIJRRGDEVRUELQJFORWKDWKDQG
Remove both elbow connectors of the bellow to be replaced.
Remove both valves
1RWH 'RQ¶WORRVHWKHJDVNHWV2ULQJV

saml11026a
Elbow connector
Connector nut
O-ring
Valve assembly
(red = bleach)
(black = dev., fix., stab.)
1)
Displacer
Elbow
connector O-ring
Valve body
Valve assembly
(red = bleach)
(black = dev., fix., stab.)
1)The displacer is mounted in the 3/4inch bellow only with the red valve assem-
bly. All other valves have a black valve assembly
saml11048a
B Remove both screws (%) fixing the

B bellow to the pump.
Tilt down the bellow to be replaced.
Turn the white body counterclockwise to remove it from the connecting rod.
Screw the new bellow clockwise to the connecting rod.
Fasten the bellow with both screws (%) to the pump.
258 Service Manual

Film processor
Insert both valves with the gaskets.
1RWH 0DNHVXUH\RXUHDVVHPEOHWKHPWKHFRUUHFWZD\
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remount both elbows.
Reinstall the complete assembly.
Verify the proper function and adjsutment as described in chapter &KHFNLQJ

WKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHV, Page 255
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHPRWRU
The motor can manually be switched ON and OFF if no work cycle is in

progress. Otherwise the command is ignored.
Select the menu

0$,17!)352&75$163),/002725
&KHFNLQJWKHEHOWWHQVLRQRIWKHWUDQVSRUWPRWRU
The transport motor is located under the dryer and to get access, you must
remove the dryer rack first.
saml02036a

processor.
saml11019a
Service Manual 259

Film processor
saml11027a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Fixing screws rack
Remove the temperature sensor

from the wire clamp.
Wire clamp
Temperature sensor
Loosen both fixing screws.
Remove the dryer rack by moving

Dryer rack it upward.
saml04011a
5 mm
The correct belt tension gives a

displacement of less than 5mm
5N with a force of 5N (500gr).
saml11029a
If necessary adjust the belt tension

2 by loosening the four screws (item
3) and moving the motor in the
3
indicated direction.
1 = Main shaft
2 = Toothed belt
3 = Mounting screw
4 4 = Motor

5HPRYLQJWKHPDLQVKDIW
Switch OFF the machine with the keyboard first and then with the main
switch.
Remove the front panel of the Master Lab+.
Remove the cover of the printer electronics
Remove the film loading station as described in chapter 11.8.4
260 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11030a
1 2 1 3 1 5
98.22.56 Edition 3
Loosen the set screw (item 5) of the pulley at the end of the shaft.
Remove the pulley.
Loosen the screws holding the three bearings (item 1) of the main shaft
(item 3).
saml11031a
Worm gear
(front view)
Safety clip Remove the safety clips of the 8

worm gears driving the racks.
Groove
(1 of 3)
Pull out the main shaft from the front of the Master Lab+.
,QVWDOOLQJDQGDOLJQLQJWKHPDLQVKDIW
Insert the main shaft from the front of the Master Lab+.
Push the worm gears onto the shaft while inserting it.
Remount the pulley.
Fix the screw of the three bearings.

,03257$17
7KHIROORZLQJVWHSKDVWREHFDUULHGRXWDEVROXWHFRUUHFWO\,IWKHZRUP
JHDUVDUHQ¶WFRUUHFWO\DOLJQHGILOPVZLOOEHGHVWUR\HG
saml11032a
Make sure that on all worm gears
the grooves with the hole for the
safety clip are aligned.
Service Manual 261

Film processor
saml11031a
Worm gear
(front view)
Secure the worm gears with the
98.22.56 Edition 3
Safety clip
safety clip.
Groove
(1 of 3)
Mount the toothed belt and adjust it as already described.
If necessary, lubricate the bearings with TRI-FLOW.
Remount the film loading station.
Start the machine and check the film transport with a leader card only.
Remount all covers removed.
&KDQJLQJWKHWUDQVSRUWVSHHG
The transport speed can be changed in the range of 190s to 200s which is the
duration for the developing process. The nominal developing time is 195s.
1RWH )RUVWDQGDUGRSHUDWLRQLWLVYHU\PXFKDGYLVHGWROHDYHWKHGHYHO
RSHUWLPHDVLWLVVHW7KLVLVWKHUHFRPPHQGHGVSHHGIURPWKH
FKHPLVWU\PDQXIDFWXUHUIRU&SURFHVV
For what ever reason it is necessary to change the speed do:
Select the menu:

0$,17!)352&6<67(0'(97,0(
MAINT F.PROC SYSTEM DEVTIME
Developer time [s]
[195]
Press the key below the bracketed value and enter the new transport
speed.
)LOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ
5HPRYLQJWKHILOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ
Remove the front panel and the cover of the printer electronics.
262 Service Manual

Film processor
Unplug the connectors of the film loading station for:

o the knife solenoid
o the cassette locking solenoid
o the sensor board
98.22.56 Edition 3
o the two micro-switches
saml11033a
Remove both mounting screws at

the top front of the film loading sta-
tion.
Remove the film loading station.
Remount in reverse order.
5HSODFLQJWKHNQLIH
Remove the film loading station as already described.
saml11034a
Remove the screws $.
Remove the knife support.

&$87,21
%HYHU\FDUHIXOZKHQKDQGOLQJWKHNQLIHLWLVYHU\VKDUS
C A U T I O N
S H A R P
B L A D E
<RXPD\FXW\RXUILQJHUVLIQRWFDUHIXO
Service Manual 263

Film processor
saml11035a
1 Knife blade
2 Circlip and bushing
C A U T I O N
S H A R P
3 Knife pressure spring
98.22.56 Edition 3
B L A D E
1 2 4 Knife support
4
3 5 Knife solenoid
6 Manual film cutting lever
Carefully remove the circlips and

the bushings (2).
5
Remove the springs (3).

6
Carefully remove the knife support
assembly(4)
saml11036a
Film transport
When inserting the new knife sup-
Knife port assembly ensure that the
blade blade is positioned right as shown!
5HSODFLQJWKHUROOHUV
Remove the film loading station as described

saml11037a
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
Remove the twelve (12) screws marked (;) to open the film loading station
and access the rollers.
5HSODFLQJWKHVHQVRUERDUGV
1RWH 7KHVHQVRUERDUGV0DDQG0EDUHVXSSOLHGDVVHWRQO\
Remove the film loading station as described.
264 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11038a
Remove the four screws marked

(<) to access the sensor board
Sensor board
98.22.56 Edition 3
M805a.
M805
Y Y
Proceed the same way on the

lower side to access the M805b.
saml11039a
These two boards in the film loading
station read the film size in the loading
station and detect the film length.
Film
saml1140a
There are four transmitters (M805a)
OP4 and sensors (M805b) on the boards
M805A
OP1 = track 1 (transmissive sensor)
M805B OP4 = track 4 (reflective sensor)
OP1 OP2 OP3
saml13020b
OP1
120 / 220
135 / 126 OP2
110 OP3
OP4
The different film sizes are detected as follows:

OP4 detects the leader card
OP3 detects 110 film
OP2 + OP3 detects 126 and 135 film
OP1 + OP2 + OP3 detects 120 and 220 film
Service Manual 265

Film processor
saml11041a
M805A
98.22.56 Edition 3
M805B
M802
5DFNV
5DFNVLQWKHSURFHVVRU
&$87,21
WDQN
saml02036a

processor.
266 Service Manual

Film processor
saml02037a

98.22.56 Edition 3

the tanks.
9(5<,03257$17
%HYHU\FDUHIXOZKHQWDNLQJRXWWKHUDFNWKDW\RXGRQ¶WSRO
OXWHWKHRWKHUFKHPLVWU\ZLWKVSODVKHV2WKHUZLVHWKHFKHP
LVWU\PD\EHXVHOHVV
saml11017a
Metal bracket
Remove the three screws holding
the metal bracket.
Remove the metal bracket.
Press the plastic locker and care-

fully lift the rack out of the tank.
Plastic locker
Reinsert a rack in the reverse order.
'U\HUUDFN
saml02036a

processor.
Service Manual 267

Film processor
saml02037a
98.22.56 Edition 3
the tanks.
saml11027a
Fixing screws rack

Take the temperature sensor out
of the wire clamp.
Wire clamp
Temperature sensor
Remove both screws at the top of
the rack.
Dryer rack
Lift out the rack.
Reinsert in reverse order.
2SHQLQJDUDFN
1RWH 7KHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHLVDEVROXWHO\127UHFRPPHQGHGIRUUH
SDLUVLQWKHILHOG:HUHFRPPHQGWRH[FKDQJHDGHIHFWLYHUDFNLQ
WKHILHOG,WUHTXLUHVDYHU\VNLOOHGILHOGHQJLQHHUWRKDQGOHDOOWKH
UROOHUVDQGJHDUVZKHQWKHUDFNKDVWREHUHDVVHPEOHG
The following procedure is described at the example of the bleach rack.
Before you disassemble the rack, clean it thoroughly with water.

saml11042a
Remove both circlips on each axle

of the gears.
Remove the screw at the plastic

locker.
268 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11043a
To remove the cross under of the
rack press on the two plastic clips
with screw drivers and slightly
twist the cross under.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Turn the rack and repeat the same

at the other side.
Remove the cross under.

saml11044a
Remove both plastic guides at

each side by carefully pressing a
screw driver between the rack
frame and the guide.
Remove a side wall of the rack.
Remove the roller or rollers to be replaced.
The satellite gear (the gear without a roller) can easily be removed by
pressing a 6mm nut to the fixing point of the gear.
For detailed drawings of each rack please refer to the ‘Spare parts list Master
Lab+’ P/N 98.22.15
5HDVVHPEOLQJDUDFN
Place all the rollers at the correct position of one side wall.
Remount the second side wall of the rack.
Remount the cross under. There is only one way to mount it as it is coded
with four pins.
Make sure that the clips of the cross under did snap-in!
Remount both guides. There is only one way to mount them as they are
also coded.
To reinstall the gears, refer to the next chapter.
Service Manual 269

Film processor
$OLJQLQJWKHJHDUV
1RWH $OLJQLQJWKHJHDUVKDVWREHGRQHHYHU\WLPHDUDFNKDVEHHQ
RSHQHGDQGZKHQDJHDUZKHHOKDVEHHQUHSODFHG7KLVLVYDOLGIRU
98.22.56 Edition 3
HYHU\UDFNLQWKHILOPSURFHVVRUDVZHOODVIRUWKHGU\HUUDFN
saml11045a
To align the main gear with the

small gear below, the two marks
on the gear must match as shown.
saml11046a
The gears on the opposite side of

the rack have to be aligned as
shown.
Satellite gear
1RWH 7KHPDUNRQDOOJHDUVGULY
LQJDUROOHUKDVWRORRNWKH
VDPHZD\7KHPDUNRQWKH
VDWHOOLWHJHDUVGRHVQ¶WPDW
WHU
Secure all the gears with the circlips.
Manually turn the main gear in both directions and check if all rollers turn
smoothly. If necessary lubricate all bearings with:
o TRI-FLOW for racks in the tanks
o pure silicon oil for the dryer rack
Insert a leader card and manually transport it forward and backward by

turning the main gear. Ensure the leader card doesn’t jam or catch any-
where on its way through the rack.
Reinstall the rack.
In the processor, ensure that the plastic lockers did correctly snap-in.
In the processor, secure the racks with the metal bracket
Start the machine to check the film transport.
1RWH 7KHWUDQVSRUWVWRSVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ZKHQHYHUWKHOLGLVUHPRYHG
DQGWKHHUURUPHVVDJHµ7UDQVSRUW$ODUPLQ)LOP3URFHVVRU¶LVGLV
SOD\HG
270 Service Manual

Film processor
saml11018a
(service position).
98.22.56 Edition 3

again.
Feed a leader card only through the film processor to check the film trans-
port.
If the transport works ok, close all the covers removed.

Service Manual 271

Film processor
6FKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
Scheda M805A (circuit diagram) 17322.017.2 1
Scheda M805A (layout drawing) 15333.082.4 1
Scheda M805B (circuit diagram) 17322.018.0 1
Scheda M805B (layout drawing) 15333.083.1 1
Scheda M806 (circuit diagram) 17333.085.1 1
Scheda M806 (layout drawing) 15333.077.1 1
272 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
3DSHUSURFHVVRUDQG$76 12
Following the exposure in the printer, the prints are fed to the paper processor.
The paper processor has five tanks:
q the first tank is for the developer
q the second tank is for the bleachfix
q the remaining three tanks are for the stabilizer.
$JLWDWLRQSXPS Each tank has an agitation pump to stir the liquid while replenishment is done
by a multi-head pump (1 head for each type of chemistry). The liquid in the tanks
is heated by electrical heaters and temperature sensors monitor the tempera-
ture. The liquid level in each tank is monitored by a sensor.
6RUWHU When the prints leave the last stabilizer tank, they are transported to the dryer.
After drying, the prints are collected in the print collector. A sorter arm in the ML+
X40 collects and distributes the prints to a separate stacker.
Service Manual 273

Paper processor and ATS
saml12001a
98.22.56 Edition 3
2
3
15
4
14
5
16
9 10 11 12 13
1 Dryer 2 Temperature sensor of dryer

9 Stabilizer tank 3 10 Stabilizer tank 2
11 Stabilizer tank 1 12 Bleachfix tank
13 Developer tank 14 Transport switch
15 Print collector 16 Water tank (auto top-off system)
6SHFLILFDWLRQV
Transport system single sheet with rollers

Minimal format 9 x 9cm (3.5” x 3.5”)
Maximal format 21 x 30.5cm (8.25” x 12”)
Transport speed 635mm / min.
Selectable temperature range 30.1 ... 50.0oC for the chemistry

40.1 ... 79.9oC for the dryer

Measurable temperature range 0.0 ... 102.3oC
Temperature accuracy +/- 0.05oC in the range of 0 ... 50oC
+/- 0.10oC in the range of 50 ...
102.3oC
Selectable transport speed 40 ... 50s developer time
Selectable replenishment rates developer 70 ... 290ml / m2

bleachfix 100 ... 300ml / m2
stabilizer 100 ... 700ml / m2
274 Service Manual

The following two tables give specific process data for two types of processes:
o table 1 for RA-4 and
o table 2 for Prime
98.22.56 Edition 3
Values for RA-4
7LPH 7HPS $ODUP 5HSOUDWH 3XPSIORZ 7DQNV

%DWK
>VHF@ >o&@ >o&@ >POP2@ >OPLQ@ >O@
Developer 45 -1/+3 35 +/-0.3 +/- 0.3 162 2.4 - 3.6 5.49
Bleachfix 45 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 214 2.4 - 3.6 5.59
Stabilizer 1 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.47
Stabilizer 2 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.38
Stabilizer 3 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.38
Dryer 74 60 +/-5.0 +/- 5.0 --- --- ---
Values for Prime
7LPH 7HPS $ODUP 5HSOUDWH 3XPSIORZ 7DQNV

%DWK
>VHF@ >o&@ >o&@ >POP2@ >OPLQ@ >O@
Developer 45 -1/+3 38 +/-0.15 +/- 0.3 162 2.4 - 3.6 5.49
Bleachfix 45 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 108 2.4 - 3.6 5.59
Stabilizer 1 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.47
Stabilizer 2 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.38
Stabilizer 3 35 35 +/-3.0 +/- 3.0 360 2.5 - 3.7 4.38
Dryer 74 60 +/-5.0 +/- 5.0 --- --- ---
and the corresponding replenishment tanks are:

saml12002a
RA-4
Stabilizer Bleach Developer

110mm
200mm 122mm 90mm
Prime
110mm
Stabilizer Bleach Developer
250mm 80mm 120mm
&KHPLVWU\ 3ULPH>OLWHU@ 5$>OLWHU@

Developer 4.5 3.4
Bleachfix 3.0 4.4
Stabilizer 10.0 7.4
Service Manual 275

+HDWLQJV\VWHP
3DSHUSURFHVVRUKHDWLQJV\VWHP
98.22.56 Edition 3
+HDWLQJHOHPHQWV Each tank has a heating element made of stainless steel AISI. The heating ele-
ment is driven by the M803 board and is powered by 220V / 150W (for details
refer to chapter 13.4).
Each element has a built-in thermal-lag switch that switches the power OFF at
50°C +/-5°C.
saml12003a
Ground
220VAC
2 1 Heating wire 360kOhm

2 Sand
3 Thermal-lag switch
7HPSHUDWXUHDQGOHYHOVHQVRUV
Each tank has a combined liquid level and temperature sensor, but the temper-
atures are measured in three tanks only:
o the developer tank
o the bleachfix tank and
o the last stabilizer tank.
saml12004a
Heater / sensor
support
Float
Circlip
Temperature
sensor
276 Service Manual

The processor board MCB compares the measured values of the temperature
sensors with the preset values and calculates the required heating.
The resistance of the temperature sensors is at:

98.22.56 Edition 3
o 20°C = 1.97kOhm
o 35°C = 2.10kOhm
The level sensor part monitors the liquid level of each tank. A reed contact is
switched by the float. If the liquid level is too low the automatic top-off system is
activated. In Master Lab without automatic top-off system, the corresponding
LED under the paper processor cover is lighting up and a warning appears on
the display.
'U\HUVHFWLRQ
The heater in the dryer section consists of two fans with directly mounted heat-
ers. Each heater has a power of 450W at 220V. A built-in protective bimetal
thermal switch cuts OFF the power if the temperature exceeds 85°C.
.
saml12005a
1 Dryer cover
2 Temperature sensor
2
3 Heater 1
4 Fan 1
3 5 Heater 2
6 Fan 2
4
5
6
The actual temperature is monitored by a sensor.
If there is no work cycle in process, the dryer temperature is maintained at 40oC

standby temperature.
If a work cycle starts, the temperature is increased to the setup value. The dryer
fan is always switched on.
+HDWLQJPDQDJHPHQW
A heating management is necessary to ensure that the temperatures raise as

fast as possible without exceeding the maximum rated line power and to keep
the temperatures stable after reaching the setup values.
Service Manual 277

The dryer is switched on after all temperatures of the different baths are at the
setup values. The heater in the tanks are also switched ON and OFF in time
slices with different power.
98.22.56 Edition 3
The temperature management knows three phases to handle the temperature:
1 Warm up phase:
Definition: (actual temperature) = (setup temperature) - (warm up trigger
value).
2 Keep temperature phase:

Definition: (actual temperature) = (setup temperature) - (thermostat trigger
value).
3 Cool down phase:

Definition: (actual temperature) > (setup temperature)
The different triggers are defined as follows:
%DWK :DUPXS 7KHUPRVWDW $ODUP

Developer (setup) - 0.2oC (setup) - 0.15oC (setup) +/- 0.3oC
Bleachfix (setup) - 1.9oC (setup) - 1.0oC (setup) +/- 3.0oC
Stabilizer (setup) - 2.9oC (setup) - 1.5oC (setup) +/- 3.0oC
Dryer ---- (setup) - 0.5oC (setup) +/- 5.0oC
The heating power for each tank in the different phases is as follows;
0D[KHDWLQJ :DUPXS .HHSWHPS FRROGRZQ

%DWKV
SRZHU SKDVH SKDVH SKDVH
Developer 150W 112W 75W 0W
Bleachfix 150W 112W 84W 0W
Dryer 1 450W 0W 450W 0W
Dryer 2 450W 0W 450W 0W Master Lab / Master Lab+
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP
To replenish a chemical bath means to regenerate it with fresh chemicals.
Three pumps are mounted on one crank shaft driven by a 220V motor and con-
trolled by the M803 board (for details refer to chapter 13.4).
There is one pump for each type of chemistry bath.
The three stabilizer tanks have one replenishment pump only. The replenish-
ment is fed into tank 3 and then flows to the remaining two tanks as the three
tanks are cascaded. The overflow is in stabilizer tank 1.
278 Service Manual

A vacuum sensor monitors the chemical flow of the developer replenishment.

This sensor is used to detect an empty replenishment tank. As the machine
works with proportional replenishment tanks it is assumed that all other tanks
are empty at the same time as the developer is empty therefore only the devel-
98.22.56 Edition 3
oper is monitored.
saml12006a
230V~ L2 Phase
230V~ L1 Phase
Stabilizer
Bleach
Dev.
5 Fuse F3: 4A fast blow (L2)
F4
M803 F3
1
3
GND
220Vac
L14: Developer, Bleach and Drive circuit Fuse
resistor
Stabilizer replenishment pumps +5V
Fuse
resistor
Indicator
LED
Input
to heater
1 Replenishment pump assembly 2 Chemical filters (three)

3 Paper replenishment tanks 4 Working tanks
5 Vacuum sensors 6 Microswitch
)ORZUDWHVWURNH
%DWK 7XEHFRORU
RA-4 Prime
Developer 1.90ml 1.90ml blue
Bleachfix 2.55ml 1.28ml red
stabilizer 4.25ml 4.25ml yellow
)ORZVHQVRUYDFXXPVHQVRU
The flow of replenishment is checked in one tank with a flow sensor. If there is
not enough flow, the message ‘:$51,1*&+$1*(5(3/(1,6+0(17’ appears in
the display of the Master Lab.
In Master Lab’s (up to serial number 100749) the level is checked in the stabi-
lizer replenishment tank with a float.
In the Master Lab+ (as of serial number 100750) the flow is checked in the
developer tube with a vacuum sensor.
Service Manual 279

The Master Lab 120, 140, 220 and 240 have no vacuum sensor. Every replen-
ishment and recovery tank is equipped with a level sensor. If the level of one of
the tanks is too high a warning is displayed.
98.22.56 Edition 3
The level sensors are connected to the MCB board by the same RCB board that
is also used for the replenishment console (see chapter 14.4)
5HSOHQLVKPHQWPDQDJHPHQW
Different phases are considered for the control of the replenishment pumps. The
phases are as follows:
1 The paper processor pump is enabled when 0.1m2 of paper has been en-
tered.
2 The pumps make 20 strokes in the commands:

o manual replenishment and
o test cycle.
3 During start-up, when the machine is switched ON by the keyboard 21!

key, the machine makes 4 strokes to check the flow of replenishment. If no
flow of replenishment is detected by the vacuum sensor, the remaining
number of strokes is stored and executed after vacuum sensor detects re-
plenisher again.
5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP
The recirculation pumps are required to assure the stability of the chemicals in
the working tanks. Recirculation is done by a single centrifugal pump for each
working tank.The pumps are located under the tanks and have an input filter.
saml12007a
1 2 3 4 5
4 Bleachfix recirculation pump
5 Developer recirculation pump
The pumps are activated if a work cycle is in process or if any of the heaters is
powered.
If there is no work cycle in process, the pumps are periodically switched ON for
20s and OFF for 80s.
280 Service Manual

saml12008a
2
98.22.56 Edition 3
1 Recirculation pumps
2 Chemical filters
3 Developer overflow tank
3
1
saml12009a
230V~ L2 Phase
230V~ L1 Phase
Stabilizer 3 Stabilizer 2 Stabilizer 1 Bleachfix Developer Fuse F3: 4A fast blow (L2)
F4
M803 F3
GND
L9: Developer pump

L10: Bleach pump
L11: Stabilizer 1-2-3 pump
Fuse
resistor
+5V
Fuse
resistor
Indicator
LED
Input
to heater
5HFLUFXODWLRQPDQDJHPHQW
The pumps are enabled at the following conditions:
1 In the standby mode all pumps are OFF.

2 In the warm-up mode all pumps are ON
3 In the normal mode are two conditions to be observed:

o During a work cycle the pumps are ON.
o Without a work cycle the pumps are continuously switched ON for 10s
and switched OFF for 90s
4 In the shutdown mode all pumps are OFF if any work cycle is finished.
Service Manual 281

$XWRPDWLFWRSRIIV\VWHP
7RSRIIV\VWHP The automatic top-off system reduces the work load of the operator by automat-
ically refilling the tanks with water to compensate for evaporated water. It there-
98.22.56 Edition 3
fore reduces the risk of chemistry overconcentration. It also cleans the film
squeegee rollers.
saml12010a
ATS
On/Off button
green lamp
red lamp
All the automatic top-off functions are controlled by the ALMLPLUS board.
saml13016a
Electro Replenishment
Pump valves consol
J86
J87
J76
J85
Power supply 220VAC
Input J93 8 8 8
4
4
C
C
4
(not used) 0 0 0
SW1 SW2 SW3
J94 ATS
Output
(not used) ALMLPLUS Board
J89
J90
J84
Power supply 24VDC

J88 J75
Tank sensor
MCB
Board
The ALMLPLUS board acts as the direct interface between the MCB board and
the automatic top-off system elements (electro valves, pump and sensors). It
receives the status information of the tank level sensors and the machine work
cycle from the MCB. According to this information the ALMLPLUS board acti-
282 Service Manual

vates the pump and the electro valves for the quantities set with the rotary
switches SW2 and SW3.
The replenishment console interface is a completely independent section on the

98.22.56 Edition 3
board and acts as a level sensor interface.
$XWRPDWLFWRSRIIPDQDJHPHQW
With the manual switch ‘ON’ the automatic top-off system is activated. The
pump and the valves are switched according to the following phases:
1 Top-off phase (paper and film tanks together)

Activated when the machine is switched ON by the timer on the MCB board
or manually by the main switch (not more than once every 12 hours). The
added water quantity represents the average night evaporation. The nomi-
nal quantity may be adjusted by switch SW2 from 20% to 320%.
2 Evaporation phase (paper and film tanks)

Activated every two hours, if during this time no work cycle occurred. The
added water quantity represents the average evaporation in two hours. The
nominal quantity may be adjusted by switch SW3 from 20% to 320%.
3 Level phase (independent for every tank)

Activated if a tank level is low and there is no work cycle in progress. The
quantity inserted in a tank is the maximum quantity to be inserted before an
overflow occurs. The level phase can only be activated twice per tank. This
precaution is necessary to save the machine in case of a chemical loss due
to a leak (time-out for the level control is 1 minute). An alarm condition is
indicated if the red lamp is continuously ON accompanied by an audible
buzzer. The alarm can be reset by switching OFF the automatic top-off sys-
tem with the switch. If the alarm condition does not disappear after 5 min-
utes, the Printer displays the message µ/2:/(9(/$/$50’.
:DWHUTXDQWLW\
Default values for each tank

7RSRIISKDVH (YDSRUDWLRQSKDVH
7DQN /HYHOSKDVH
6:WR 6:WR
Developer 117 57 23
Bleachfix 117 27 12
Stabilizer 1 82 40 17
Service Manual 283

The water quantity is adjustable with selector SW2 and SW3
7RSRIISKDVH (YDSRUDWLRQSKDVH
3RVLWLRQ
VZLWFK6: VZLWFK6:
98.22.56 Edition 3
0 20% 20%
1 40% 40%
2 60% 60%
3 80% 80%
4 100% 100%
5 120% 120%
6 140% 140%
7 160% 160%
8 180% 180%
9 200% 200%
A 220% 220%
B 240% 240%
C 260% 260%
D 280% 280%
E 300% 300%
F 320% 320%
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP
The transport system is driven by a 24Vdc motor with speed control and regu-
lation done by the M803 board and the MCB board.
The motor drives the main shaft via a toothed belt. The worm gears on the main
shaft drive the gears of the different racks.
saml12011a
2 3 4 4 Master Lab / Master Lab+
5 6 6 6 7
1 Motor 2 Toothed belt

3 Main shaft 4 Friction bearing
5 Ball bearing 6 Worm gears driving the racks
7 Worm gear driving the distributor / conveyer
284 Service Manual

3ULQFLSOHRIVSHHGFRQWURO
6SHHGFRQWURO A slotted disk is mounted to the shaft of the motor. While turning, this disk inter-
rupts a light barrier. The pulses of the light barrier are counted and compared
98.22.56 Edition 3
with the preset value. If the speed is different to the preset value, the pulse-width
of the driving electronic is either increased or decreased depending on the direc-
tion of the difference
saml12012a
5 4
3 2
1 Motor
1 2 Light barrier on M806 board
3 Slotted disk
4 Toothed belt
5 Main shaft
%ORFNGLDJUDPRIVSHHGFRQWURO
saml13006a
M803 (Paper)
MCB or M
M802 (Film)
slotted disk
light barrier
0RWRUHQHUJL]LQJ
The motor is energized by 24Vdc by a pulse-width modulated supply. A pulse is

generated every 10ms with a pulse-width between 0.8ms and 9.2ms depending
on the load.
saml11012a
t = 0.8 ... 9.2ms

24Vdc
0
t = fix 10ms
Service Manual 285

5DFNV
Six racks are installed in the paper processor, 1 rack in each working tank and
1 rack in the dryer. These racks are of four different types:
98.22.56 Edition 3
o a rack type for developer and bleachfix
o a rack type for stabilizer 1 and 2
o a rack type for stabilizer 3
o a rack type for the dryer.
Every rack has several rollers driven by gears. The prints are transported
between the rollers.
saml12013a
2
3
1 Upper squeegee roller

2 Lower squeegee roller
3 Rollers (pressed against the
upper roller)
4 Lower roller
5 Crossunder
4
All racks in the tanks are locked with a metal bracket and two screws ($). The
dryer rack is screwed to the rear wall.
saml12014a
metal bracket Screws A

The crossover assembly is mounted on top of the racks and fixed with two plas-
tic screws.
286 Service Manual

saml12015a
98.22.56 Edition 3
6RUWHU
6RUWHU The sorter collects the prints leaving the dryer and moves them to the collecting
bin. The sorter is driven by a 24Vdc motor and a toothed belt. The different posi-
tions of the sorter arm are monitored by light barriers.
saml12016a
1 Switch for big prints

2 Sorter arm
3 Motor
4 Pulley
4 3 2 1
saml12017a
5 SQ5 = Sorter in right position
(home)
6 SQ6 = Sorter position for large
prints (not in Master Lab+)
7 SQ7 = Sorter in final position
8 SQ8 = Sorter in left position (order
separation)
5 6 7 8
5HSODFHPHQWVDQGDGMXVWPHQWV
+HDWLQJV\VWHP
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHKHDWHUV
Each heater in the paper processor and the dryer can be switched ON or OFF.
Service Manual 287

:$51,1*
6ZLWFK2))WKHKHDWHUDIWHURQHPLQXWHWRDYRLGRYHUKHDWLQJ
98.22.56 Edition 3
WKHFKHPLVWU\
For the various heaters use the menu:

0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(5'(9
0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(5%/($&+
0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(567$%
0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(567$%
0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(567$%
0$,17!3352&7(03+($7(5'5<(5
1RWH 7KHKHDWHUFRPPDQGVIRUWKHGU\HULVLJQRUHGLIDZRUNF\FOHLVLQ
SURJUHVV
9LHZLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHV
Enter the menu:

&200!3352&',63703
The following display shows the temperatures

COMM P.PROC DISPTMP
°
[ C] DEV. BLEACH STAB DRYER
Nom : 35.0 35.0 35.0 60.0
Act : 35.0 34.9 35.1 36.4
1RWH 7KHGU\HUKHDWVRQO\ZKHQDZRUNF\FOHLVLQSURJUHVV
&KHFNLQJFDOLEUDWLQJWKHWDQNWHPSHUDWXUH
:$51,1*
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
Display the temperatures as told before.
Wait until the nominal and the actual values on the display don’t vary more
than 0.2°C.
288 Service Manual

1RWH 'RQ¶WFKHFNWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUHEHFDXVHWKHGU\HUKHDWVRQO\
ZKHQDZRUNF\FOHLVLQSURFHVV2WKHUZLVHWKHKHDWHUVWD\VSUH
KHDWHGDWo&
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml02042a
cessor.
1RWH :KHQHYHUWKHOLGLVUH
PRYHGWKHWUDQVSRUWVWRSV
DXWRPDWLFDOO\DQGWKHHUURU
PHVVDJHµ75$163257$/$50
,13$3(5352&(6625¶DS
SHDUVLQWKHGLVSOD\
saml12018a

the screw in the dryer 90o counter-
clockwise (service position).

error. If a work cycle was in pro-
cess, the transport starts again.
saml02043a
saml02044a
Turn the two fasteners on the

crossover and remove it.
saml02045a
Unlock the lower part of the paper

dryer and tip it up.
Service Manual 289

:$51,1*
:KHQHYHU\RXPHDVXUHWKHWHPSHUDWXUHLQGLIIHUHQWWDQNV
98.22.56 Edition 3
YHU\SURSHUO\FOHDQWKHWKHUPRPHWHU2WKHUZLVH\RXFRQWDP
LQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQRWKHUWDQNVDQGWKH\PD\HYHQEHXVH
OHVVDIWHUZDUGV
Take a precision thermometer

(e.g. a mercury type).
saml02046a
Measure the temperature of each

bath close to the float of the level
sensor (the place closest to the
temperature sensor).
Write the measured value on a

piece of paper.
1RWH 7KHWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUWRPHDVXUHWKHWHPSHUDWXUHRIDOOVWDELOL]
HUVLVORFDWHGLQVWDELOL]HUWDQN7KHVHQVRUVLQWDQNDQGDUH
QRWFRQQHFWHG
In a consecutive way enter the menus:

0$,17!3352&7(03&$/703'(9
0$,17!3352&7(03&$/703%/($&+
0$,17!3352&7(03&$/70367$%
to compare the measured values for every bath with the corresponding val-
ues in the menu.
Correct any difference of more than 0.2°C by correcting the corresponding

value in brackets with the measured value.
MAINT P.PROC TEMP CALTMP DEV
°C]
Actual Temperature [
[34.9]

Wait a few minutes to allow the bath to adapt the temperature
Repeat the whole procedure again until the difference is less than 0.2°C
between the measured and the displayed values.
290 Service Manual

saml02047a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Tip the lower part of the paper

dryer down and lock it.
saml02048a
Remount the crossover and turn

both fasteners.
saml02049a
Lower the cover of the paper

dryer.
saml02050a
Close the lid of the paper proces-

sor.
&DOLEUDWLQJWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUH
1RWH 7RFDOLEUDWHWKHGU\HUWHPSHUDWXUH\RXQHHGDQHOHFWURQLFWKHU
PRPHWHUWRPHDVXUHWKHDLUWHPSHUDWXUH$QRUGLQDU\PHUFXU\
WKHUPRPHWHUFDQQRWEHXVHGLWLVWRRVORZ
Remove the lid of the paper processor.
Open the cover of the dryer.
Place the sensor of your (electronic) thermometer near the temperature

sensor and fix it.
Service Manual 291

Close the cover of the dryer.
Ensure that the temperature in the chemistry tanks is correct.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Make sure a working cycle is in progress. Otherwise the heater will not heat
correctly to its nominal value.
If the reading of the thermometer is beyond the tolerance of +/-5°C select

the menu:
0$,17!3352&7(03&$/703'5<(5
Correct any difference of more than +/-5°C by correcting the corresponding

value in brackets with the measured value.
MAINT P.PROC TEMP CALTMP DRYER
Actual Temperature [°C]
[58.3]
Repeat the measuring sequence until the value is within the tolerance.
&KDQJLQJWKHVHWWLQJRIWKHWHPSHUDWXUH
To change the nominal value of the temperature proceed as follows:
Select the menu:

6(7!3352&7(03
1RWH 7KHPHQX6(7!QHHGVDSDVVZRUGWREHFRPHDFWLYH
SET P.PROC TEMP

°
Temperature [ C]
[35.0] [35.0] [35.0] [60.0]
DEV BLEACH STAB DRYER
Change the value in brackets of the desired chemistry to the new value.
&KHFNLQJWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUOHYHOVHQVRUV
Remove the side panel of the paper processor.
Disconnect the connector of the temperature / level sensor to be checked.
292 Service Manual

Take the sensor out of the tank as described in chapter ‘Replacing the tem-
perature / level sensor, page 294’.
1RWH %HYHU\FDUHIXOQRWWRVSLOOFKHPLVWU\LQWRRWKHUWDQNVRWKHUZLVH
98.22.56 Edition 3
\RXFRQWDPLQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHUWDQNPDNLQJLWXVH
OHVV
Connect an Ohm-Meter to pin 3

and pin 4 (red and white wire) to
check the temperature sensor.
saml12019a
Measure the resistance of the sen-

sor (type Siemens KTY). It should
Heater / sensor read
at 20°C: 1.97kOhm
support
at 35°C: 2.10kOhm
Float Now connect the Ohm-Meter to

pin 1 and pin 2 (blue and green
wire) to check the level sensor.
Circlip
Keep the level sensor in an upright

Temperature
sensor
position.
blue
b
1
lu

re
e
e
n
green
red
2 The reed contact has to be closed
3
red white
4
when the float is in the lower posi-
white
t
black
5 tion.
The reed contact has to be open

when the float is moved to the
upper position.
Remount the sensor in the tank.
After the check, connect the sensor again.
Close the cover of the cable duct.
Close the side panel of the paper processor.

Service Manual 293

Temperature
98.22.56 Edition 3
Level
M803
MCB
<- Heater ON/OFF
Level data ->
5HSODFLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHOHYHOVHQVRU
Remove the lid of the paper processor
Tilt up the cover of the dryer.
Remove the side panel of the paper processor.
Disconnect the temperature / level sensor to be replaced.
:$51,1*
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
Remove the chemistry filters.
294 Service Manual

saml12021a
Remove both screws $ of the

98.22.56 Edition 3
heater / sensor cover
Remove the cover %.
Screws A B
saml12004a
Remove the sensor by pushing it

Heater / sensor
toward the racks.
support
1RWH %HYHU\FDUHIXOQRWWRVSLOO
FKHPLVWU\LQWRRWKHUWDQNV
Float
RWKHUZLVH\RXFRQWDPLQDWH
WKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHU
WDQNPDNLQJLWXVHOHVV
Circlip
Insert the new sensor as shown.

Temperature
sensor
5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPSV
The replenishment pumps can be switched ON and OFF manually.
,03257$17
'RQ¶WOHWWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPSVUXQWRRORQJ\RXZLOORYHUUHSOHQLVK
WKHEDWKVDQGZDVWHJRRGFKHPLVWU\
Enter the menu:

0$,17!3352&/,48,'380365(3/
Service Manual 295

&KHFNLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHV
:$51,1*
98.22.56 Edition 3
ORVVRIH\HVLJKW
Remove the lid over the paper processor.
saml02041a
Fix a graduated cylinder to each

tank having a replenishment tube.
100:1

100:1 100:1
in 20 °C in 20 °C in 20 °C
ml
Lift the replenishment tube of each

ml ml
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
tank, turn it and place it into the

70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30
20
10
30
20
10
30
20
10
corresponding cylinder.
,03257$17
$OZD\VXVHWKHVDPHJUDGXDWHGF\OLQGHUIRUWKHVDPHWDQNWRDYRLGFRQ
WDPLQDWLRQRIRWKHUWDQNFRQWHQW
Select the menu

&200!3352&0$15(3/
COMM P.PROC MANREPL
Nominal Quantity per Test Cycle [ml]
38.2 50.4 84.8
DEV BLEACH STAB TEST
graduated cylinders. If no liquid is detected after 6 or 7 strokes, an alarm mes-
sage is displayed and the test stops.
Check the quantity of replenisher in each graduated cylinder, compare it

with the values displayed on the screen.
Pour the replenisher back into the charging hole of the corresponding tank.
296 Service Manual

1RWH %HFDUHIXOWRSRXUWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWEDFNLQWRWKHULJKWWDQN
2WKHUZLVH\RXFRQWDPLQDWHWKHFKHPLVWU\LQWKHRWKHUWDQN
PDNLQJLWXVHOHVV
98.22.56 Edition 3
&KDQJLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKLQJUDWHIRUDOOFKHPLVWULHVWRJHWKHU
If the replenishing rate has to be changed proportional for every tank it can be
done by software because all pumps are mounted on the same shaft.
Select the menu:

6(7!3352&5(35$7(
SET P.PROC REPRATE
2
Replenishment Rate [ml/m ]
[162] 215 360
DEV BLEACH STAB
Change the value for the developer (value in brackets) to the desired
rate.The values for bleachfix and stabilizer are calculated automatically
after confirming.
&KDQJLQJWKHUHSOHQLVKLQJUDWHIRURQHWDQNRQO\
If the replenishment rate for a particular tank has to be changed, the pump vol-
ume per stroke of that pump requires manual adjustment.
Set the replenishment rate for the particular tank with the menu:
0$,17!3352&/,48,'&$/3803
MAINT P.PROC LIQUID CALPUMP
38.2 50.4 84.8 [ml]
162 [215] [360]
2
[ml/m ]
DEV BLEACH STAB TEST
The selectable range is: for bleachfix 100 ... 300ml/m2

for stabilizer 100 ... 700ml/m2
Always confirm with (17(5!.
1RWH )RUGHYHORSHUXVHWKHSURFHGXUHGHVFULEHGXQGHUµ&KDQJLQJWKH
UHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHIRUDOOFKHPLVWULHVWRJHWKHU¶%XWEHDZDUHDOO
RWKHUUHSOHQLVKPHQWUDWHVPD\QHHGDFRUUHFWLRQLQWKHRSSRVLWH
GLUHFWLRQZLWKWKHSURFHGXUHMXVWEHLQJGHVFULEHG
Calculate the difference between the old and the new value in %.
Service Manual 297

Now, the calculated deviation has to be adjusted mechanically at the particular

replenishment pump.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml11025a
Adjust the screw to the desired

1 replenisher rate.
Turn the screw cw to increase
% OF STROKE
100 or ccw to decrease the rate.
2 75
50 The stroke indicator and the
25
stroke scale guide you in the
3 0
right way.
graduated cylinders. If no liquid is detected after 6 or 7 strokes, an alarm mes-
sage is displayed and the test stops.
If the delivered quantity deviates from the µ120,1$/48$17,7<3(57(67

&<&/(¶, adjust the pump again and repeat the calibration.
5HSODFLQJDEHOORZRIWKHUHSOHQLVKPHQWSXPS
This procedure may be necessary if you need to change the paper processor
from RA-4 chemistry to Prime chemistry or when you have a defective bellow.
Remove the upper side panel of the paper processor.
saml12022a
Remove both screws $ holding

the paper replenishment pump
assembly.
A A
Carefully pull the assembly toward you until you have good access to the
bellows.
298 Service Manual

:$51,1*
98.22.56 Edition 3
%HDZDUHWKDWFKHPLFDOOLTXLGLVLQWKHWXEHVDQGRULQWKHEHO
ORZ:KHQ\RXGRWKHQH[WVWHSVWKLVOLTXLGZLOOIORZRXW
HLWKHULQWRWKHPDFKLQHRURQWR\RXUFORWKHV,WLVDGYLVDEOH
WRWDNHDSLHFHRIJRRGDEVRUELQJFORWK
Remove both elbow connectors of the bellow to be replaced.
saml12023a
Remove both valves
1RWH 'RQ¶WORRVHWKHJDVNHWV2
ULQJV
saml12024a
B
Remove both screws (%) fixing the
B bellow to the pump.
Tilt down the bellow to be replaced.
Turn the white body counterclockwise to remove it from the connecting rod.
Take the new bellow and remove it as well from the connecting rod.
Screw the new bellow clockwise to the old connecting rod.

Fasten the bellow with both screws (%) to the pump.
Service Manual 299

saml12025a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Insert both valves together with
the gaskets.
1RWH 0DNHVXUHWRUHDVVHPEOHLW
FRUUHFWO\DVVKRZQ
Remount both elbow connectors.
Reinstall the complete assembly.
Verify the proper function and adjustment as described in chapter 12.9.2
7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP
0DQXDOO\VZLWFKLQJWKHPRWRU
The motor can manually be switched ON or OFF if no work cycle is in progress.

Otherwise the command is ignored.
Select the menu

0$,17!3352&75$1633$3(502725
&KHFNLQJDGMXVLQJWKHEHOWWHQVLRQRIWKHWUDQVSRUWPRWRU
Remove the lid of the paper processor.
saml12026a
Open the dryer cover.

A B from the cable clamp.
Remove the dryer rack as shown.

Lift it first ($), then move the top to
the front (%).
300 Service Manual

The transport motor is located below the dryer.
saml04017a
98.22.56 Edition 3
5 mm
The correct belt tension gives a
displacement of less than 5mm
5N with a force of 5N (500gr).
saml11029a
If necessary, adjust the belt ten-

2 sion by loosening the four screws
(item 3) and moving the motor in
3
the indicated direction.
1 = Main shaft
2 = Toothed belt
3 = Mounting screw
4 4 = Motor
5HPRYLQJWKHPDLQVKDIW
Switch OFF the machine with the keyboard first and then with the main
switch.
Remove the front panel of the Master Lab+.
Remove the left side panel.
Remove the distributor / conveyer as described in chapter 10.3.17

saml12027a
1 3 4 3 5 3 6
1 Set screw M4 x 10 2 Pulley

3 Bearing 4 Main shaft
5 Worm gear 6 Worm gear driving the distributor/
conveyer.
Loosen the set screw (item 1) of the pulley at the end of the shaft.
Remove the pulley (item 2).
Service Manual 301

Loosen the screws holding the three bearings (item 3) of the main shaft
(item 4).
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml11031a
Worm gear
(front view)
Safety clip Remove the safety clips of the six

worm gears driving the racks.
Groove
(1 of 3)
Pull out the main shaft from the front of the Master Lab+
,QVWDOOLQJDQGDOLJQLQJWKHPDLQVKDIW
1RWH 2SSRVLWHWRWKHILOPSURFHVVRUWKHZRUPJHDUVLQWKHSDSHUSUR
FHVVRUWUDQVSRUWGRQ¶WQHHGDQ\DOLJQPHQWV
Insert the main shaft from the front of the Master Lab+.
Mount the worm gears to the main shaft while inserting the shaft.
Remount the pulley.
Fix the screws of the three bearing.
saml11031a
Worm gear
(front view)
Safety clip Secure the worm gears with the

safety clips.
Groove
(1 of 3)
Mount the toothed belt and adjust it as described in chapter .

Lubricate the bearings with TRI-FLOW.
Start the Master Lab+ and check the paper transport.
&KDQJLQJWKHWUDQVSRUWVSHHG
The transport speed can be changed between 40s and 50s as the duration for
the developing process. The nominal development time is 45s. To change the
speed proceed as follows:
302 Service Manual

Select the menu:

0$,17!3352&6<67(0'(97,0
MAINT P.PROC SYSTEM DEVTIM
Developer time [s]
98.22.56 Edition 3
[45]
Press the key below the value in brackets and enter the new transport
speed.
1RWH )RUVWDQGDUGRSHUDWLRQOHDYHWKHGHYHORSHUWLPHDVLWLVVHW,WLVD
UHFRPPHQGHGVSHHGIURPWKHFKHPLVWU\PDQXIDFWXUHUIRU5$
SURFHVV
5DFNV
5DFNVLQWKHSURFHVVRU
&$87,21
WDQN
saml02042a

cessor.
saml02043a
Lift the cover of the dryer.
Service Manual 303

saml02044a

98.22.56 Edition 3
remove it.
saml02045a

tip it up.
saml12014a
metal bracket Screws A
Remove both screws ($) holding

the metal bracket.
Remove the metal bracket.
9(5<,03257$17
%HYHU\FDUHIXOZKHQWDNLQJRXWWKHUDFNWKDW\RXGRQ¶WSRO
OXWHWKHRWKHUFKHPLVWU\ZLWKVSODVKHV2WKHUZLVHWKHFKHP
LVWU\PD\EHXVHOHVV
Carefully lift the rack out of the tank.
Reinsert the rack in reverse order.

'U\HUUDFN
saml02042a

cessor.
304 Service Manual

saml02043a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Lift the cover of the dryer.
saml02044a

remove it.
saml02045a

tip it up.
saml12026a

from the cable clamp.
A B
Remove the dryer rack as shown.

Lift it first ($), then move the top to
the front (%).
Reinsert in reverse order.
2SHQLQJDUDFN
1RWH 7KHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUHLVDEVROXWHO\127UHFRPPHQGHGIRUUH
SDLUVLQWKHILHOG:HUHFRPPHQGWRH[FKDQJHDGHIHFWLYHUDFNLQ
WKHILHOG,WUHTXLUHVDYHU\VNLOOHGILHOGHQJLQHHUWRKDQGOHDOOWKH
UROOHUVDQGJHDUVZKHQWKHUDFNKDVWREHUHDVVHPEOHG
The following procedure is described at the example of the stabilizer rack.
Service Manual 305

Before you disassemble the rack, clean it thoroughly with water.
saml12028a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the circlip from the axles
of the gears and pull out the axle.
saml12029a
1 Remove the bracket of the rack by

pressing a screw driver between
the bracket () and the rack at the
places shown.
Remove the bracket on the other side of the rack.
Remove one side of the rack and take out the rollers to be replaced.
For detailed drawings of each rack please refer to the ‘Spare parts list Master
Lab+’ P/N 98.22.15.
5HDVVHPEOLQJWKHUDFN
Place all rollers into the correct position of one side wall.
saml12030a
4 1
4
Mount the other side () of the
2
rack.
Remount the bracket ().

3
1 Bracket
2 Main gear 1RWH 0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHFOLSV
3 Side of the rack GLGVQDSLQ
4 Clips
Reinsert the axle and secure the main gear with the circlip.
1RWH 7KHUHLVQRDOLJQPHQWQHFHVVDU\IRUWKHUDFNVLQWKHSDSHUSURFHV
VRU
Manually turn the main gear to check if all rollers turn smoothly in both
directions. If necessary lubricate the bearings with:
o TRI-FLOW for the racks in the tanks
o pure silicon oil for the dryer rack.
306 Service Manual

Insert a print by manually turning the main gear and check for correct trans-
port of the print.
Carefully reinsert the rack in the tank.

98.22.56 Edition 3
Secure the rack with the metal bracket.
Remount the crossover and the dryer.
Start the machine to check the paper transport.
1RWH 7KHWUDQVSRUWVWRSVDXWRPDWLFDOO\ZKHQHYHUWKHOLGLVUHPRYHG
DQGWKHHUURUPHVVDJHµ7UDQVSRUW$ODUPLQ3DSHUSURFHVVRU¶LV
GLVSOD\HG
saml12018a

(service position).

again.
6RUWHU
&KHFNLQJWKHEHOWWHQVLRQ
Open the cover of the paper dryer.
Remove the cover under the sorter.
saml04018a
The correct tension gives a dis-

placement of less than 8mm
under a force of 2.5N (250gr).
8 mm
2.5 N
Service Manual 307

6FKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
308 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
:HWSDUWFRPSXWHUV\VWHP 13
2YHUYLHZ
The film and paper processor are controlled by the same CPU board. Each pro-
cessor has its own driver board for pumps, heaters and so on. The film proces-
sor drivers are on the M802 and the paper processor drivers are on the M803
board. Most wet part computer system boards are located in the drawer under
the film processor dryer.
saml13001a
SCSB Film Sensor

Sorter M805
Speed control
M802 M806
Film Paper proc.
MCB
Wet section CPU
Speed control
M803 M806
Paper Film proc.
Console
RCB*
Main switch
Line filter
Power
Top-off system
supply
ALMLPLUS
Printer
Battery
)LJ :HWSDUWHOHFWURQLFVEORFNGLDJUDP
* The optional console RCB board is used to control an external replenish-
ment console. This option is for Master Lab only!
In he Master Lab+, the place is used for the ALMLPLUS board. This board
controls the top-off system and an optional external replenishment con-
sole.
Service Manual 309

Wet part computer system
saml13002a
98.22.56 Edition 3
M803 ALMLPLUS
M802
)LJ %RDUGORFDWLRQLQWKHGUDZHU
Not in the drawer are the two speed control boards M806 and the SCSB board.
The control boards M806 are found in the transport systems of each processor.
The SCSB board is found in the sorter. The M805 boards (a and b) are located
in the film loading station.
0&%ERDUG
2YHUYLHZ
The MCB board is a general purpose microcontroller board designed around the
HD6303 microcontroller from Hitachi.
This board consists of

o a 32kB EPROM
o a 8kB RAM
o a 16 channel analog / digital converter
o a real time clock
o a buzzer for acoustic alarm and
o a BCD rotary switch for different machine and software versions.
A nickel-cadmium battery powers a circuit responsible to retain the data in the

microcontroller RAM.
310 Service Manual

saml13003a
Voltage
Input circuit
reference
98.22.56 Edition 3
Serial A/D
Printer
interface converter
Timers Real time

interface clock
CPU
Power and Code

reset logic memory
Data
memory
Backup supply
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI0&%ERDUG
The MCB board receives the power failure and battery low signals from the
power supply on one side. On the other side it sends commands to the power
supply to change to battery operation, to supply the printer with dc current and
to test the transport battery.
This board also receives analog signals from the temperature sensors, pulses
from both M806 to determine the paper and film transport speed.
The driver boards M802 and M803 are controlled by the MCB and the dialogue
with the printer part is made via a serial interface.
)XQFWLRQDOXQLWV
3URFHVVRU
Processor type Hitachi HD63B03Y microcontroller, 8 bit

Clock rate 4.9152 MHz
Address range 64kBytes
&RGHPHPRU\
The code memory – a EPROM – stores the machine program. The storage
capacity is 32kBytes. This EPROM is plugged in socket U10.
Service Manual 311

'DWDPHPRU\
The data memory stores the setup parameters of the wet part. It is a static RAM
with a capacity of 8kBytes. It is plugged in socket U3.
98.22.56 Edition 3
A battery backup supply holds the data when the power of the machine is
switched off.
%DFNXSVXSSO\
The responsibility of this unit is to maintain a certain voltage level (S +5V) after
shutdown of the regular power to the data memory to prevent the loss of stored
information. This buffering is limited to the +5V supply of the storage memory.
saml13004a
+5V
S + 5V
Testpoint
+VBat
3.6V
100mAh
)LJ %DWWHU\FRQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP
1LFNHO&DGPLXP The source of the backup voltage is a rechargeable battery. It is of the nickel-
cadmium type with a capacity of 100mAh. The charging current is ~2.5mA.
The battery has an average lifetime of 5 years but it may fall down to a minimum
of 11 month, depending on tolerances of the used components.
If you encounter the error message µ%DWWHU\ORZ¶ , immediately save your data
on a memory card and replace the battery (see chapter 13.7.2).
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
The serial interface is the communication link to the printer part. It is integrated
into the microcontroller.
The transfer rate is 19200 bits / second (Baud).
$QDORJWRGLJLWDOFRQYHUWHU
This converter is used to make sensor data understandable for the microcontrol-
ler. The analog data from the sensors in the film and paper processor are con-
verted into digital data for the microcontroller.
312 Service Manual

saml13005a
Data bus
F-Sensors
Temperature
Low pass
sensor
filter Address bus
(5)
98.22.56 Edition 3
Film
Film processor
Control bus
Ref.
Voltage A/D MCU
Circuitry HD46508PA HD6303Y
P-Sensors
Temperature
Low pass
sensor
filter
(4)
Paper
Paper processor
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRI$'FRQYHUWHU
It is a 10 bit converter with 16 inputs. Each of the inputs has a low pass noise
filter between the sensor and the converter. The reference voltage for the con-
verter is +5V.
7LPHUVLQWHUIDFH
This circuit controls the transport speed of the film and paper processor. The
input information are the pulses generated by the slotted disk on the transport
motor and the light barrier on the M806 board.
saml13006a
M803 (Paper)
MCB or M
M802 (Film)
slotted disk
light barrier
)LJ 3ULQFLSOHRIVSHHGFRQWURO
3RZHUDQGUHVHWORJLF
This circuit is used to initialize the hardware and to check the different supply
voltages such as the battery voltage (low battery) and the 19.5Vac (power fail).
The reset signal is triggered either by hardware or by software.
Service Manual 313

5RWDU\VZLWFKSRVLWLRQVDQGMXPSHUV
saml13007a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Rotary
MCB switch Reset
button
1 0
U2 Microcontroller
Buzzer
J2
Battery
+
J1
)LJ 0&%MXPSHUDQGVZLWFKHSRVLWLRQV
5RWDU\VZLWFKSRVLWLRQV
Position 0: without sorter

Position 1: with sorter (also for single track machines)
Position 2: 1 track machine with ext. replenishment console (ML+120 and
ML+220)
Position 3: 2 track machine with ext. replenishment console (ML+140 and
ML+240)
Position 4 to 9: not used
-XPSHUV
Jumper Default setting Option

- Closed Battery on Open Battery off
closed Serial interface in normal Open Serial interface in test
-
mode mode
314 Service Manual

7HVWSRLQWVDQGLQGLFDWRUV
saml13008a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Rotary
MCB switch Reset
button
1 0
U2 Microcontroller
GND
TP1
+5V
GND
Buzzer L2 L1
TP2
+24V
J2
Battery TP3
VBATT
+
J1
)LJ 0&%WHVWSRLQWDQGLQGLFDWRUSRVLWLRQ
7HVWSRLQWV
Test point GND: Ground

Test point 1: +5V
Test point 2: +24V
Test point 3: Battery voltage (nominal 3.6Vdc)
,QGLFDWRUV
/(' :KHQ21
/ Board receives +5Vdc
/ Board receives +24Vdc
Service Manual 315

0ERDUG
1RWH 7KLVGULYHUERDUGLVXVHGLQPDFKLQHVZLWKILOPSURFHVVRURQO\
98.22.56 Edition 3
2YHUYLHZ
The M802 board drives all components of the film processor. It is controlled by
the MCB board.
saml13009a
From/to From
MCB sensors
Low pass filter
Buffers / logic
Solenoid drivers Heater drivers
24Vdc 220V ac
T ransport motor driver Motor drivers
24Vdc 220V ac
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH0ERDUG
It receives data from the sensors of the film processor and sends these signals
to the MCB board. Commands from the MCB board activate the various loads
in the film processor with the drivers on the M802 board.
The drivers are for:

o bath and dryer heaters
o dryer fan
o agitation and aeration pumps
o replenishment pumps
o film cutting knife solenoid
o film cassette locking solenoid
o film transport motor
Received sensor data are:

o replenishment pump microswitch and developer vacuum sensor
o optical reader in the film loading station (M805) detecting the presence
of different film types
o cassette present microswitch and film end microswitch in the film load-
ing station to activate the film cutting knife
o tank level sensors checking low level in the tanks.
316 Service Manual

)XQFWLRQDOXQLWV
,QSXWFLUFXLWU\
98.22.56 Edition 3
All signals coming from the MCB are passing a low pass filter and are buffered
to reduce noise.
6ROHQRLGGULYHUV
The solenoid drivers are power transistors switching 24Vdc. Each driver input
has an indicator LED showing the status (see 13.3.4).
+HDWHUGULYHUV9DF
The 220Vac heaters are switched on and off by triacs. These switching ele-
ments are protected by two fuse resistors each. During an overload of a fuse
resistor, it changes its resistive value to R = ∞
:$51,1*
8QGHU12FLUFXPVWDQFHVUHSODFHHGHIHFWLYHIXVHUHVLVWRU
ZLWKDQRUPDOUHVLVWRU<RXORVHWKHSURWHFWLRQRIWKHGULYHU
saml13010a
220V ac
Fuse
resistor
+5V
Fuse
resistor
Indicator
LED
Input
to heater
)LJ &LUFXLWGLDJUDPRIKHDWHUGULYHU
The signal driving the triac is isolated by an opto isolator. Each driver input has
an indicator LED showing the status (see 13.3.4).
0RWRUGULYHUV9DF
These drivers are exactly the same as the drivers for the heaters.
7UDQVSRUWPRWRUGULYHU9
The driver for the transport motor is a power FET.
Service Manual 317

)XVHVRQWKH0ERDUG
saml13011a
98.22.56 Edition 3
M802
F3
F2 F1
F4
)LJ )XVHVRQ0
9DOXH 'LPHQVLRQ
)XVH 7\SH 3DUWQXPEHU 3URWHFWHGSDUWV
>$@ >PP@
F1 8 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-85 220Vac phase
F2 8 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-85 220Vac neutral
Used for:
Heater developer, film
Heater bleach, film
Heater fixer, film
Heater stabilizer, film
Heater dryer, film
F3 4 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-81 220Vac phase
F4 4 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-81 220Vac neutral
Used for:
Bleach aeration pump, film
Dryer fan, film
Replenishment pump, film
Spray pump developer, film
Recirculation pump dev., film
Recirculation pump bleach, film
Recirculation pump fixer, film

Recirculation pump stabi., film
1) F = quick acting fuse (fast blow)

T = surge resisting fuse (slow blow)
318 Service Manual

,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH0ERDUG
saml13012a
98.22.56 Edition 3
L 23
L 20
L 15
L 10
L1
L5
M802
)LJ ,QGLFDWRUVRQ0
/(' :KHQ21
L1 Developer heater powered
L2 Bleach heater powered
L3 Fixer first heater powered
L4 Second fixer heater powered
L5 First stabilizer heater powered
L6 Second stabilizer heater powered
L7 Dryer heater powered
L8 Dryer fan powered
L9 not used
L10 not used
L11 Bleach aeration pump powered
L12 Developer recirculation and spray pump powered
L13 Bleach recirculation pump powered
L14 Fixer recirculation pump powered
L15 Stabilizer recirculation pump powered
L16 not used
L17 Developer, bleach, fixer and stabilizer multiple replenishment pump powered
L18 not used

L19 not used
L20 not used
L21 not used
L22 Film cutter solenoid powered
L23 Cassette locking solenoid powered
Service Manual 319

0ERDUG
This board is used for the paper processor. Therefore it is found in every
machine.
98.22.56 Edition 3
2YHUYLHZ
The M803 board drives all components of the paper processor. In addition it
drives all fans in the entire wet part of the machine. It also switches the power
for the printer part.
saml13013a
From/to From
MCB sensors
Low pass filter
Buf fers / logic
Sorter drivers Heater drivers
24Vdc 220V ac
Transport motor driver Motor drivers Supply printer part
24Vdc 220V ac 220V ac
)LJ %ORFNGLDJUDPRIWKH0ERDUG
It receives data from the sensors of the paper processor and sends these sig-
nals to the MCB board. Commands from the MCB board activate the various
loads in the paper processor with the drivers on the M803 board.
The drivers are for:

o bath and dryer heaters
o agitation pumps
o replenishment pumps
o pump cooling fan

o exhaust fan
o printer part power (220Vac)
o two way sorter motor
o paper transport motor
Received sensor data are:

o replenishment pump microswitch and developer vacuum sensor
o tank level sensors checking low level in the tanks
o lost liquid sensor
o optical reader indicating the sorter position
o microswitch indicating large format prints
o sensor on the SCSB indicating prints coming out of the dryer.
320 Service Manual

)XQFWLRQDOXQLWV
,QSXWFLUFXLWU\
98.22.56 Edition 3
All signals coming from the MCB are passing a low pass filter and are buffered
to reduce noise.
6RUWHUGULYHU
The sorter driver is capable to change the polarity of the 24Vdc to move the
sorter in both directions
+HDWHUGULYHUV9DF
The 220Vac heaters are switched on and off by triacs. These switching ele-
ments are protected by two fuse resistors each. During an overload of a fuse
resistor, it changes its resistive value to R = ∞
:$51,1*
8QGHU12FLUFXPVWDQFHVUHSODFHHGHIHFWLYHIXVHUHVLVWRU
saml13010a
220V ac
Fuse
resistor
+5V
Fuse
resistor
Indicator
LED
Input
to heater
)LJ &LUFXLWGLDJUDPRIKHDWHUGULYHU
0RWRUGULYHUV9DF
These drivers are exactly the same as the drivers for the heaters with one
exception:
The driver for the exhaust fan has a different fuse resistor. The fuse resistor R63
is 120Ohm / 1W instead of 68Ohm / 0.5W as for all the others.
Service Manual 321

3ULQWHUVXSSO\9DF
This driver is the same as the driver for the exhaust fan. The fuse resistor R67
is 120Ohm / 1W.
98.22.56 Edition 3
7UDQVSRUWPRWRUGULYHU9
The driver for the transport motor is a power FET.
)XVHVRQWKH0ERDUG
saml13014a
F2 F4
F1
M803 F3
)LJ )XVHVRQ0
9DOXH 'LPHQVLRQ
>$@ >PP@
F1 8 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-85 220Vac phase
F2 8 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-85 220Vac neutral
Used for:
Heater developer, paper
Heater bleach, paper
Heater stabilizer, paper
Heater dryer, paper
F3 4 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-81 220Vac phase
F4 4 F 6.3 x 32 0028-759-81 220Vac neutral
Used for:
Exhaust fan
Dryer fan, paper
Replenishment pump, paper
Cooling fan pump
Recirculation pump dev., paper
Recirculation pump bleach, paper
Recirculation pump stabi., paper
Main power for the printer part

322 Service Manual

,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH0ERDUG
saml13015a
L19
L10
L15
98.22.56 Edition 3
L1
L5
M803
)LJ ,QGLFDWRUVRQ0
/(' :KHQ21
L1 Developer heater powered
L2 Bleach heater powered
L3 First stabilizer heater powered
L4 Second stabilizer heater powered
L5 Third stabilizer heater powered
L6 First dryer heater powered
L7 Second dryer heater powered
L8 Dryer fan powered
L9 Developer recirculation pump powered
L10 Bleach recirculation pump powered
L11 Stabilizer recirculation pump powered
L12 not used
L13 not used
L14 Developer, bleach and stabilizer multiple replenishment pump powered
L15 Pump cooling fan powered
L16 Bath exhaust fan powered
L17 220Vac power line feeds printer part

L18 Not used
L19 not used
Service Manual 323

$/0/3/86ERDUG
2YHUYLHZ
98.22.56 Edition 3
This board controls the automatic top-off system of the Master Lab+. This sys-
tem adds water to the different tanks in the film as well as in the paper processor
to compensate for evaporated liquid during the night.
saml13016a
Electro Replenishment
Pump valves consol
J86
J87
J76
J85
Power supply 220VAC
Input J93 8 8 8
4
4
C
C
4
(not used) 0 0 0
SW1 SW2 SW3
J94 ATS
Output
(not used) ALMLPLUS Board
J89
J90
J84
Power supply 24VDC
J88 J75
Tank sensor
MCB
Board
)LJ &RQQHFWLRQGUDZLQJ
It also adds water in case a tank level is too low during production but just as
much as is necessary before an overflow occurs. Finally it cleans the squeegees
of the film stabilizer 2 in a standby mode of the film processor.
3XPSGULYHU
The 220Vac pump is switched on and off by a triac. This switching element is
protected by two fuse resistors. During an overload of a fuse resistor, it changes
its resistive value to R = ∞
324 Service Manual

:$51,1*
8QGHU12FLUFXPVWDQFHVUHSODFHDGHIHFWLYHIXVHUHVLVWRU
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml13017a
Fuse Fuse
resistor 2A
+5V
to pump
Fuse
resistor
220V ac
Input 0V
)LJ &LUFXLWGLDJUDPRISXPSGULYHU
)XVHVRQWKH$/0/3/86ERDUG
saml13018a
F2 F1
8 8 8
C
C
4
0 0 0
)LJ )XVHVRQWKH$/0/3/86
9DOXH 'LPHQVLRQ
>$@ >PP@
F1 1.25 F 5 x 20 +24V
F2 2 F 5 x 20 Auto level pump (220Vac)

Service Manual 325

,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH$/0/3/86ERDUG
saml13019a
98.22.56 Edition 3
EV1 ➩ Electro valve film developer
EV2 ➩ Electro valve film bleach

EV7 ➩ Electro valve paper developer
EV8 ➩ Electro valve paper bleach
EV1 1 ➩ Electro valve paper stabilizer 3
8 8 8
ALAR ➩ Level phase alarm
4
C
C
0 0 0
ACT ➩ The board is running (flashing with 1Hz)
PUMP ➩ Top-Of f pump
MAIN ➩ Maintenance mode
ON ➩ Manual switch activated (green lamp)
TANK ➩ Level empty (red lamp)
BUZZ. ➩ Buzzer
)LJ ,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH$/0/3/86ERDUG
6&6%ERDUG
This board has to detect prints coming out of the dryer and to determine the cor-
rect sorter position.
saml13023a
)LJ /D\RXWRI6&6%
The detection is made by two IR light barriers. Each light barrier consists of a
transmitter and a receiver on the other side. The signals are sent to the MCB.
326 Service Manual

$FFHVVLQJ$GMXVWLQJUHSODFLQJWKHZHWSDUWHOHFWURQLFERDUGV
7KH0&%005&%RU$/0/3/86ERDUGV
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml01001a
POWER
Switch OFF the Master Lab+ with

ATS
the main circuit breaker.
saml113021a

POWER
Loosen the cap socket screw in

ATS
the drawer.
saml13002a
M803 ALMLPLUS
Pull out the drawer and you have

M802
access to the MCB, M802, M803,
RCB or ALMLPLUS
To close the drawer proceed in reverse order.

5HSODFLQJWKHEDWWHU\RQWKH0&%
To replace the battery on the MCB proceed as follows:
If not already done, make a backup of the data.
Switch OFF the machine and open the drawer as described in chapter
13.7.1
Unplug all connectors.
Remove the MCB Board.
Service Manual 327

saml13027a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Desolder the battery
Solder the new battery.

Battery
1RWH :DWFKWKHSRODULW\
&$87,21
VSHFLDOUHIXVH
Switch ON the machine
Restore the previously written backup with the machine data from the mem-
ory card to the printer as described in chapter 6.8.2.
Set the internal clock as described in chapter 2.5.6.
Set the timer as described in chapter 2.5.5
7KH6&6%ERDUG
To adjust or replace the board proceed as follows: Master Lab / Master Lab+
saml02043a

Make sure the cover locks on both
sides.
328 Service Manual

saml13024a
98.22.56 Edition 3
The SCSB board is located inside

the cover of the dryer.
saml13025a
Measure the voltage across R2
D1 Q1 D2 Q2
respectively R4 without any paper
R1 R2 R3 R4
present between the sensors.
Use a digital voltmeter with a min-
imal impedance of 1MOhm / Volt.
The voltage has to be higher than

35mV
saml13026a
D1 D2
If the voltage is less, adjust the
sensors mechanically until you
have the highest voltage (35mV to
R4 R1 Q1 R3 Q2 200mV)
R2
To close the cover of the dryer, proceed in reverse order.

Service Manual 329

6FKHPDWLFV
98.22.56 Edition 3
Overview schematics 17519.021.0 1 to 25
Schema a blocci MCB (block diagram MCB) 17433.004.0 1

Scheda MCB (circuit diagram MCB) 17319.013.3 1 to 5
Scheda MCB/N (layout drawing) 14074.207.1 1
Scheda MCB 4S (layout drawing) 15356.099.7 1
Scheda ALMLPLUS (circuit diagram) 17344.252.2 1 to 4
Scheda ALMLPLUS 4S (layout drawing) 15356.149.5 1
Scheda SCSB (circuit diagram) 17333.095.1 1
Scheda SCSB (layout drawing) 15335.004.2 1
Drawer, layout overview 14064.682.8 1

Drawer, internal wiring 18720.230.8 1
Wiring 220V 18720.231.9 1
Wiring 220V, pumps 17233.270.1 1
Wiring 230V, dryer 15399.283.5 1
Wiring 24V / 45V 15399.288.5 1
Fuseboard, schematics 17322.016.0 1
Fuseboard, layout 15311.016.0 1
Wiring signal level 15399.289.6 1

Wiring signal level, dryer 15399.274.7 1
Wiring signal level, replenishment console 15399.302.1 1
330 Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
2SWLRQV 14
&XVWRPL]HU
The Customizer provides an attractive possibility of customizing products using
existing conventional equipment. Complex prints are exposed onto regular pho-
tographic paper in a short time.
For further details refer to:

o Service Manual ‘Customizer Master Lab+’ P/N 98.29.02 and
o Spare parts list ‘Customizer Master Lab+’ P/N 98.29.14 and
o Operating Manual ‘Customizer Master Lab+’ P/N 98.29.15
)LOPFOHDQHU
*HQHUDO
The film cleaner discharges any static electricity by means of ionized air and
cleans the film with brushes.
Service Manual 331

Options
,QVWDOODWLRQ
98.22.56 Edition 3
,03257$17
7KHIROORZLQJGHVFULSWLRQDERXWWKHLQVWDOODWLRQLVIRU9DFILOPFOHDQ
HUVRQO\
9DFW\SHVPXVWKDYHDORFDOFRQQHFWLRQDQGVKDOO127EHFRQQHFWHG
WRWKH32',6,IFRQQHFWHGWRWKH32',6WKH\ZLOOEXUQRXW
Switch OFF the machine first at the keyboard followed by the main switch.
saml14032a
Remove the light shaft and the film

deck.
Remove the four screws holding

the black cover of the lamp house.
Remove the black aluminum

cover.
Remove the side panel of the printer electronics.
Tilt down the electronic unit (CPU / CBO).
Remove the aluminum plate behind the electronic unit to access to the
PODIS.
Position the film cleaner under the keyboard and lead the power cable into
the lamp house, through the hole in the table into the cable duct and finally
to the PODIS.
saml14033a
P/S
Film Cleaner N

PE
Connect the cable to the corre-

Power
Distributor
sponding terminal on the PODIS.
PODIS
Remount the aluminum plate behind the electronic unit.
Tilt up the electronic unit (CPU / CBO).
332 Service Manual

Options
Remount the side panel of the printer electronics.
Remount the black aluminum plate to the lamp house.

98.22.56 Edition 3
Insert the light shaft and the film deck.
Switch ON the machine again.

Service Manual 333

Options
98.22.56 Edition 3
*HQHUDO
The remote interface and the corresponding software package (SW 1.xx R on
CBO2, position U71) in the Master Lab+ allows you or read via modem the setup
data, production statistics and quality control data from a remote location. On
the other side you may transmit setup data to a remote Master Lab+. It is also
possible to perform certain maintenance and tests with the <MAINT> menu from
a remote position.
1RWH )RUVDIHW\UHDVRQWKHUHPRWHIXQFWLRQVZLWKWKHPHQX0$,17!
GRQ¶WDOORZDQ\RSHUDWLRQVZKLFKPRYHSDUWVVXFKDVWXUQLQJWKH
IHHGHUPRYLQJWKHNQLIHDQGVRRQ7KHVRIWNH\DQGWKH(17(5!
NH\DUHEORFNHGIRUVXFKRSHUDWLRQVDQGDQHUURUPHVVDJHLVGLV
SOD\HG
The modem is connected between the phone line and the Master Lab+. At the
other end of the phone line is a computer (PC) with a software supplied by
GRETAG IMAGING AG. Communication is always started by the computer and
never by the Master Lab+.
saml14001a
Setup
MEMORYCARD
Modem SETUP
Language
MEMORY CARD
Setup Data
Phone Line
Quality Control LAN-
Production Statistics GUAGE

Modem
Quality Control
Production
Statistics
Setup Data
Spreadsheet or Database Program
334 Service Manual

Options
,QVWDOODWLRQ
For detailed information about installation and use of the remote control inter-
face refer to the Operating Manual ‘MASTER CONTROL Program 1.60’, P/N
98.22.56 Edition 3
98.27.40 and for ‘MASTER CONTROL Program 2.4x’ P/N 98.29.56.
0DVWHU/DEGLUHFWO\FRQQHFWHGWRD3&
saml14002a
RS 232
Master Lab
+ PC
+
Master Lab labeling: PC labeling
Modem e.g. COM 1
TXD 2 2 TD
RXD 3 3 RD
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
GND 7 7 GND
DTR 20 20 DTR
Connect the PC with a standard 1 to 1 (25 line) cable to the Master Lab+. Should
the COM port on your PC be a 9 pin Sub-D connector, you need a gender
changer from 25 pin to 9 pin.
0DVWHU/DEFRQQHFWLRQYLDPRGHP
saml14003a
+
RS 232 RS 232
Master Lab Modem Modem PC
Auto
+
answer
Master Lab labeling: mode PC labeling
Modem Modem Modem e.g. COM 1

2 2 2 2 TD
TXD TD TD
3 3 RD 3 RD
RXD RD 3
4 4 4
RTS RTS RTS 4 RTS
5 5 CTS 5 5 CTS
CTS CTS
GND 7 7 GND DSR 6 6 DSR
9 20 7
+12V DTR GND 7 GND
20 6 8
DTR DSR CD 8 CD
DTR 20 20 DTR
22
RI 22 RI
Connect your PC to the modem with a standard 1 to 1 (25 line) cable. Should
your COM port on your PC be a 9 pin Sub-D connector, you need a gender
changer from 25 pin to 9 pin. The cable between Master Lab+ and modem
requires special wiring.
Service Manual 335

Options
5HSOHQLVKPHQWFRQVROH
98.22.56 Edition 3
*HQHUDO
1RWH 7KHUHSOHQLVKPHQWFRQVROHLVQRWDYDLODEOHIRU0DVWHU/DE0/[[
DQG0/[[
The replenishment console replaces the small internal replenishment tanks with
larger units placed in an external console providing all the necessary hydraulic
and electrical connections. This kit is suitable for all Master Lab models with a
film processor, increasing their working autonomy. The installation kit contains
a small electronic board called RCB required in older Master Lab’s to manage
the level sensors in the tanks of the console.
The dimensions of the console are:

Width: 78cm (30.7”)
Height: 118cm (46.5”)
Depth: 43cm (17”)
The system is made of an external console placed on feet that can be placed
just behind the Master Lab+. The console contains 14 tanks:
o 7 for replenishment and
o 7 for recovery.
The capacity of each tank is 13 liters. Pipes to connect the tanks to the Master
Lab+ are provided.
Another collecting tray at the bottom of the Master Lab is necessary to feed the
pipes from the console to the replenishment pumps and to the tanks.
Two systems are possible to monitor the levels in the tanks of the console:
o An electronic board (called RCB), part of the kit for older Master Lab’s
to be installed in the electrical panel of the wet part
o Function included in the ALMLPLUS board in Master Lab+
,QVWDOODWLRQ
For the installation proceed as follows:
Switch OFF the machine first at the keyboard followed by the main switch.
Remove the replenishment and recovery tanks for the film and the paper
processor.
Open the bottom side panels.
336 Service Manual

Options
)LOPVLGH 3DSHUVLGH
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the upper covers
Remove the draw-off units
Service Manual 337

Options
Remove the replenishment tanks from the machine.
)LOPVLGH 3DSHUVLGH
98.22.56 Edition 3
Close and remove the recovery tanks from the machine.
saml14012a
Remove the tank tray and support

for the recovery tanks (4 screws)
Remove the overflow connection pipes at the working tanks.
Disconnect the replenishment pipes at the filters coming from the draw-off
unit.
338 Service Manual

Options
,03257$17
/LIWWKHORVWOLTXLGVHQVRUEHIRUH\RXSXOORXWWKHROGWDQNWUD\RULQVHUW
98.22.56 Edition 3
WKHQHZWDQNWUD\RWKHUZLVHWKHVHQVRUZLOOEUHDNRII
saml14013a
Lost liquid sensor Remove the lower tank tray. Lift it

on the opposite side of the lost liq-
uid sensor and carefully pull it out
while lifting the lost liquid sensor.
Remount the new tank tray (with holes).
,03257$17
:KLOHFRQQHFWLQJWKHSLSHVPDNHVXUHWKDWWKHULJKWSLSHLVFRQQHFWHG
WRWKHULJKWILOWHURUWDQNDQGGRQ¶WEXFNOHWKHSLSHV
Connect the replenishment pipes from the console to the filters.
Connect the overflow pipes to the working tanks. Secure them with the new
clamps supplied in the kit.
Pull out the drawer at the rear of the Master Lab/Master Lab+ carrying the
wet part electronics.
2OGHU0DVWHU/DE¶V 0DVWHU/DE
Cable duct Cable duct


J76
J76
RCB Board
ard
ALMLPLUS bo
Cable duct
Cable duct
Cable duct
Cable duct
J75
MCB Board MCB Board
Service Manual 339

Options
Mount the RCB board to the elec-

trical panel using the lock spacers
(6 pieces).
98.22.56 Edition 3
Connect J75 of the RCB board to
J74 on the MCB board (cable is
included).
Connect the replenisher console D Connect the replenisher console

to J76 on the RCB board (cable is to J76 on the ALMLPLUS board
included). (cable is included).
saml14016a
2 3
1 4 Set the BCD-switch on the MCB
0 5 board to the following positions:
9 6 o Pos. 2 for ML without sorter
8 7
but with replenisher console.
o Pos. 3 for ML with sorter and
MCB
replenisher console
)LOPVLGH 3DSHUVLGH
Open the cable ducts and unplug connector J32 (film side) and J33 (paper
side).
If a vacuum-switch is installed, disconnect it at the microswitch on the

replenishment pump.
340 Service Manual

Options
saml14019a
Connect the replenishment pump
1
2
98.22.56 Edition 3
with cable P/N 15399.332.0 to the

J32 /J33
respective connector J32 (film
side) and J33 (paper side).
P/N 15339.332.0
1RWH 7KHIORZPHWHURUYDFXXP
Repl. pump microswitch
VZLWFKHVUHPDLQGLVFRQ
QHFWHG
Close the cable ducts and all covers you have removed.
Service Manual 341

Options
/LQHSULQWHU
98.22.56 Edition 3
9(5<,03257$17
7KHOLQHSULQWHUGRHVQ¶WZRUNDQ\PRUHDVRIPDLQVRIWZDUH
YHUVLRQ[[
*HQHUDO
Depending on the Master Lab (Master Lab or Master Lab+), the kind of informa-
tion to be printed with the line printer is different:
o With a Master Lab, all setup parameters, production statistics, photo-
graphic statistics, scanner values and results of exposure time calcula-
tions can be printer with the line printer.
o With a Master Lab+, only the scanner values of a negative can be print-
ed with the line printer.
The reason is the remaining memory capacity.
The information to be printed is selected with the menu &200!/,67

;;;;
The line printer is connected to the Master Lab/Master Lab+ at the serial inter-
face which is located at the lower left rear corner of the machine. The connector
is marked with µ/LQH3ULQWHU¶
Be aware, the line printer interface at the Master Lab/Master Lab+ is a serial
interface, unlike most line printers which are for parallel interface only. For this
reason, the line printer supplied by GRETAG IMAGING is equipped with an
external serial/parallel converter.
6HWWLQJXSWKHOLQHSULQWHU
Two DIP switches on the control circuit board in the line printer allow the selec-
tion of certain functions. The following configuration has to be set:
o 9600 Baud
o 8 Data Bit
o 1 Stop Bit
o No parity
To set the configuration proceed as follows:
Turn OFF the main switch of the line printer.
342 Service Manual

Options
saml14020a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Remove the cover on the rear of

the line printer.
saml14021a
ON ON
DS1
ON
DS2
The DIP switches are now visible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
OFF
The DIP switches have the following setting possibilities:
',3VZLWFK'6
This is a 8 switch unit.
6ZLWFK1R )XQFWLRQ 21 2))

1 Print mode Compressed Pica
2 Zero character 0
3 Character table Graphics Italics
4 Printer commands IBM Mode EPSON Mode
5 Printer quality NLQ Draft
6
International charac-
7
ter set
8
,QWHUQDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHUVHW
&RXQWU\ 6ZLWFK1R 6ZLWFK1R 6ZLWFK1R
USA ON ON ON
France ON ON OFF
Germany ON OFF ON
England ON OFF OFF
Denmark OFF ON ON
Sweden OFF ON OFF
Italy OFF OFF ON
Spain OFF OFF OFF
',3VZLWFK'6
This is a 10 switch unit
Service Manual 343

Options
6ZLWFK1R )XQFWLRQ 21 2))

1 Paper select Active Inactive
2 Paper length 12” 11”
98.22.56 Edition 3
3 Skip perforation ON OFF
4 Automatic line feed CR + LF CR only
5 Code unit 7 units 8 units
6 C.G. font select ATARI / IBM2 ATARI / IBM1
7 Paper-end detector Inactive Active
8 Print mode Emphasized Standard
9
Bidirectional Factory set 'RQ¶WFKDQJH
10
5HFRPPHQGHGVZLWFKVHWWLQJ
The recommended DIP switch setting should look as follows:

saml14022a
DS 1 DS 2
ON ON
OFF OFF
6HWWLQJWKHVHULDOSDUDOOHOFRQYHUWHU
The serial to parallel converter receives serial data from the Master Lab and
converts them to parallel data for the line printer.
The converter has a DIP switch and jumpers for a correct configuration.
saml14023a
OFF
ON
1 2345 6
Jumpers
DIP-Switch
The right settings to connect the Riteman line printer is as follows:

',3VZLWFK
1 ON 9600 Baud
2 OFF 9600 Baud
3 ON 9600 Baud
4 ON 8 Data Bits
5 OFF Parity: none
6 OFF Parity: none
344 Service Manual

Options
-XPSHUV'7(VHOHFWLRQ
saml14024a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Front view
&RQQHFWLRQFDEOHOLQHSULQWHU0DVWHU/DE0DVWHU/DE
The interconnecting cable is a serial cable with a 25 pin male Sub-D connector
on both sides. The cable is available under P/N 36.13.64.
saml14025a
Master Lab/Master Lab+ Line printer

25 Pin male, Sub D 25 Pin male, Sub D
DTR - DSR
20 20
TxD - RxD
3 3
GND
7 7
CTS - RTS
4 4
Service Manual 345

Options
3DVVSRUWOHQV:DOOHWOHQV
98.22.56 Edition 3
*HQHUDO
With the optional passport lens (lens code 9) you have the possibility to print
from a 135 film negative four equal images with the size of 40mm x 60mm (~1.6”
x ~2.4”) on 3.5” paper. The passport lens can be ordered under P/N 34.85.42.
With the optional wallet lens (lens code 10) you have the possibility to print from
a 135 film negative two equal images with the size 63mm x 89mm (~2.5” x 3.5”)
on 5” paper. The wallet lens can be ordered under P/N 34.85.40.
,QVWDOODWLRQ
The installation of the passport lens or wallet lens is similar to the installation of
a regular lens (see chapter 2).
A special self-adhesive shielding bracket (P/N 36.12.34) included in the pass-

port lens kit only, has to be fixed to the optic box below the 135 film deck to avoid
reflections. Proceed as follows:
Remove the film deck from the machine.
Remove the protective foil from the adhesive tape on the shielding bracket.
saml14026a
Stick the bracket to the recess on

Filmdeck
the optic box as shown. Press it
Optic box
Shielding bracket
well to the optic box.
P/N 36.12.34
Set up a corresponding format channel. Master Lab / Master Lab+
$GMXVWPHQW
1RWH 7KHDGMXVWPHQWLVGHVFULEHGIRUWKHSDVVSRUWOHQVEXWLWLVLGHQWL
FDOIRUWKHZDOOHWOHQV
$OLJQLQJWKHOHQV
Select the menu

&200!35,17(56(7/(166(7=220
Open the front cover.
346 Service Manual

Options
saml14027a
98.22.56 Edition 3
Check the alignment of the four

prints on the paper.
saml14028a
Loosen the set screw at the lower

end of the lens.
Set screw
saml14029a
Turn the insert carrying the four
lenses until the prints are correctly
aligned.
1RWH 7KHSULQWVPD\EHRIIFHQ
WHUUHIHUWRWKHQH[WFKDS
WHU
Tighten the set screw again.

Service Manual 347

Options
&HQWHULQJWKHSULQWVRQWKHSDSHU
Remove the light shaft and the film deck.
98.22.56 Edition 3
saml14030a
Turn the screws in the flange ring

of the lens in the desired direction.
Reinsert the film deck and the light shaft.
Check the position with the menu:

&200!35,17(56(7/(166(7=220.
saml14031a
Ensure that the position of the

prints is as much in the center as
possible. Otherwise repeat step 1
to 5.
348 Service Manual

Options
98.22.56 Edition 3
*HQHUDO
The greeting card option allows you to print an additional subject to the regular
print size of 3.5” and 4”. This option only works as of main software version 2.00.
,QVWDOODWLRQ
For the installation and setup procedure refer to the corresponding description
36.16.60 BV supplied with the greeting card attachment and is also found at the
end of this chapter.
&RQYHUVLRQDQGXSJUDGHNLWV
Several upgrade kits allow an improvement of productivity and/or possibilities.
(QODUJHPHQWNLW(
*HQHUDO
This enlargement kit (P/N 34.65.07 for Master Lab and Master Lab+) converts a
single format machine into a multi format machine. It converts:
o a Master Lab+ 120 to a Master Lab+ 220
o a Master Lab+140 to a Master Lab+ 240
o a Master Lab / Master Lab+ 320 to a Master Lab / Master Lab+ 520
,QVWDOODWLRQ
34.65.07 BV supplied with the upgrade kit.
6SHHGXSNLW,
*HQHUDO
There are two speedup kits available:

o with P/N 34.65.08 for Master Lab
o with P/N 36.46.76 for Master Lab+
Service Manual 349

Options
This upgrade kit converts a machine with 200 prints/hour to a machine with 400
prints/hour. It also contains a sorter. It converts:
o a Master Lab+ 120 to a Master Lab+ 140
98.22.56 Edition 3
,QVWDOODWLRQ
34.65.08 BV / 36.46.76 BV respectively supplied with the upgrade kit.
6SHHGXSNLW,,
*HQHUDO
The speedup kit II (P/N 34.28.79) does the same as the speedup kit I but is with-
out sorter. It converts:
,QVWDOODWLRQ
'LJLWDOXSNLW
*HQHUDO
This upgrade (P/N 36.43.56 for Master Lab+ only!) allows printing of electronic
images on photographic paper. The kit contains a CRT, the optics for prints up
to 4”, the necessary electronics and a plug-in for the ‘Photo Shop’ software to
calibrate it to the CRT. This upkit can be installed into any multi format machine
(Master Lab+ 220 / 240 / 520 or 740)
,QVWDOODWLRQ
Further information are also found in:

o Service Manual ‘Master Lab Digital’ P/N 98.27.15 and
o Spare parts list addendum ‘Master Lab Digital’ P/N 98.27.16
350 Service Manual

Options
)LOPSURFHVVRUXSJUDGH
*HQHUDO
98.22.56 Edition 3
The film processor upgrade kit P/N 18988.243.0 is for every Master Lab / Master
Lab+ without the possibility to develop film. This upgrade converts:
,QVWDOODWLRQ
supplied with the upgrade kit
8SJUDGLQJWKHSURFHVVRUWR.2'$.60
The Master Lab SM wet part uses Kodak patented LVTT (/ow-9olume 7hin
7ank) technology with direct replenishment chemicals delivered from Kodak SM
Processing Units (cartridges). The Kodak Processing Units contain the concen-
trated chemicals which are mixed with water directly in the working tanks of the
machine. Two SM Processing Units (P1, P2) are used for the paper processor
and two SM Processing Units (F1, F2) are used for the film processor. A built-in
water tank delivers water for the mixing of the replenishment and for the auto-
matic top-off system. For operation the SM Processing Units (cartridges) are
inserted by the operator into the appropriate support and are easily exchanged
when empty. The water tank has to be filled up separately. Finally 4 multi-head
pumps (one for each Processing Unit) are used to bring the concentrated
replenishment chemicals and the water into the working tanks.
Further information is also found in:

o Service Manual ‘Master Lab+ SM’ P/N 98.27.91 and
o Spare parts list addendum ‘Master Lab+ SM’ P/N 98.27.86
$XWRPDWLF'HQVLWRPHWHU$'0
*HQHUDO
The automatic Densitometer P/N 34.90.98 upgrades a Master Lab+ which was
originally delivered with Densitometer D188.
This densitometer allows automatic reading of film and paper test strips by sim-
ply inserting them into the entry slot.
This is an optional component within the concept to upgrade a Master Lab to a

Master Lab+
Service Manual 351

Options
Handling, maintaining and servicing the automatic Densitometer is described in

the Operating Manual and the Service Manual supplied with the equipment.
,QVWDOODWLRQ
98.22.56 Edition 3
/DPSKRXVHXSJUDGHNLW
*HQHUDO
The lamp house upgrade kit P/N 34.29.66 simplifies the setup procedure by
means of a testfilter installed in the lamp house of a Master Lab+ operating with
main software 3.00 or higher. In addition, the power supply for the cooling fan is
now taken directly from the 24Vdc.
,QVWDOODWLRQ
$36,QGH[NLW
General
This upgrade is intended for Master Lab+ which are of the multi format type,
such as ML+ 520 / 740 or 220 / 240. Such upgraded machines allow printing and
processing normal negatives (135 film) in the conventional printing mode, as
well as formats (C-, H- and P-formats) of APS film. It also allows the production
of index prints from APS film and 135 film. As an option, all other film formats
may be printed and processed too.
Several kits are available to upgrade the different Master Lab+:

o upgrade kit P/N 37.06.40, upgrading Master Lab+ 220 for APS and In-
dex print
dex print
dex print
dex print
An optional 135 film deck allows you to produce index prints from 135 film. This
optional film deck is available for all the above mentioned Master Lab+.
352 Service Manual

Options
,QVWDOODWLRQ
37.06.40 IA supplied with the upgrade kit.
98.22.56 Edition 3
Further information are also found in:

o Operating Manual Addendum ‘Master Lab+ Advanced Photo System’
P/N 98.27.43 and
o Service Manual Addendum ‘Master Lab+ Advanced Photo System’
P/N 98.27.42 and
o Spare parts list Addendum ‘Master Lab+ Advanced Photo System’
P/N 98.27.41
.LWGHVFULSWLRQV
7LWOH .LW 3DJHVVKHHWV

Greeting card 36.16.60 BV 1 to 6
Service Manual 353

354
Options
Service Manual

98.22.56 Edition 3
%LEOLRJUDSK\JORVVDU\DQGLQGH[ 15
%LEOLRJUDSK\
D 6DIHKDQGOLQJRI3KRWRJUDSKLF3URFHVVLQJ&KHPLFDOV
Kodak Catalog # CAT 832 1713) Pub. # J-98A
Learn how to safely handle photoprocessing chemicals and to recognize
and avoid potential hazards
E ,QGRRU$LU4XDOLW\ 9HQWLODWLRQLQ3KRWRJUDSKLF3URFHVVLQJ)DFLOLWLHV
Kodak Catalog # CAT 184 9298) Pub. # J-314
Learn about the rol and proper use of ventilation systems in the workplace
to help minimize employee exposure to photographic processing chemi-
cals.
*ORVVDU\
$36
Abbreviation for $dvanced 3hoto 6ystem. A new film format developped by

Kodak. This film format has several advantages compared with the former film
formats such as easier handling, several negative formats on the same film and
the possibility to strore special information with every negative.
$'0
Abbreviation for $utomatic 'ensito0eter. Built-in equipment for automatic mea-

surement of the colors on a test strip or test negative,
$76
Abbreviation for $utomatic 7op-off 6ystem. A system in the wet part of the
machine responsible to compensate the los of liquide due to evaporation.
Service Manual 355

Bibliography, glossary and index
%&'
Abbreviation for %inary &oded 'ecimal. Methode to use decimal figures in a

computer based system.
98.22.56 Edition 3
(3520
Device containing a software program which is resident on a PBA to control and

/or monitor the function of a particular sub-unit.
,QGH[SULQW
This is an overview print containing all negatives of the film as little thumbnail
pictures marked with the frame number. This allows the customer to reorder
prints withoput handling the negatives.
/&'
Abbreviation for /iquid &ristal 'isplay. Type of man-machine interface.
/('
Abbreviation for /ight (mitting 'iode. A semiconductor device emitting light

when current is passed through the element.
06'6
Abbreviation for 0aterial 6afety 'ata 6heet. An informative paper provided by

the supplyer of chemicals explaining the characteristics, possible risks under
defined conditions, protection and first aid measures
3%$
Abbreviation for 3rinted %oard $ssembly. Indicating a printed circuit board

which has components mounted on it. PCB would be the bare printed circuit
itself.
5$0
Abbreviation for 5andom $cess 0emory. An electronic storage chip allowing

the access of an individual position ion the storage area.
356 Service Manual

,QGH[
98.22.56 Edition 3
A
Adjusting
Belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 221, 300
Exposure position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Home position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Paper cassette to different paper widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Paper position in X-axis on paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Paper position in Y-axis on paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Sensors on panorama feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Aeration pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Agitation pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Aligning the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Analog/Digital converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Automatic top-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 324
B
Battery
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 106, 114
Disposing old batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 143, 146, 328
Lithium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 141
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Nickel-Cadmium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Rechargeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Replacing on MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Belt
Adjusting tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 221, 300
Checking tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 300, 307
Bridges (see jumpers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
C
Cable
Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Calculate
Focal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Calibrating
Film dryer temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Paper dryer temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tank temperatures in film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tank temperatures in paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Calibration strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Service Manual 357

Checking
Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 300, 307
Distributor power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
98.22.56 Edition 3
DX-Code diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Knife sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Light barriers on distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Replenishment rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 296
Sensors of paper extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Sensors on feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Tank temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 288
Temperature sensors / level sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 292
Chemistry types in paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cleaning
Lamp house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Recommended liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Code
Film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
For film insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Color dots to identify chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49, 50, 51
Compensate temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Conversion kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Customizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
D
Densitometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 351
Detection
DX-Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 190
Documentation / Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Drivers
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 321
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Dryer heater
In film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
In paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
DX-Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
358 Service Manual

E
Electrical Programmable Logic Device (EPLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Electronic power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Environmental guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 115, 143, 146, 328
98.22.56 Edition 3
Exhaust fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
F
Fan
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Lamp cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 150
Pump cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fibre optic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Film cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Film cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Replacing the knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Film deck code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Film density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Film loading station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Filter wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 151, 171
First aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Floor
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Flow sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 279
Focal length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Focus test film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 164
Frame scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 112, 318, 322, 325
G
Graduated cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Grain finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 163
Greeting card attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
H
Hazardous vapors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Heating
Elements in film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Elements in paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Home position
On universal film deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Service Manual 359

I
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 315, 319, 323, 326
Installation
Film cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
98.22.56 Edition 3
Passort lens / Wallet lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Remote control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Replenishment console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Interface
Man-machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 140, 312
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
J
Jumpers
CPU configutation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Machines without lens turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
On MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Voltage selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
K
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
L
Labels in the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lamp power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Leader card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
LED (Light emitting diode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 317
Lens
Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Passport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Wallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Lens code reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Level sensor
Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Light attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 152
Light shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Line printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
360 Service Manual

M
Main shaft film processor side
Installing/aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
98.22.56 Edition 3
Main shaft paper processor side

Installing/aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Mains
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Supplies of various types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Manuals / Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Master Lab family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Measuring box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 175, 177
Microswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
O
Optic box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
P
Paper cassette
Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Different paper width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Paper transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Passport lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Phases of automatic top-off management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Phases of heating management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Position
Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 197
Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Paper in X-axis on paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Paper in Y-axis on paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Power supply
for electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
for lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
for stepper motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power supply for distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Prime chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Pump bellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 298
Service Manual 361

Pumps
Aeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Agitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Automatic top-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
98.22.56 Edition 3
Manually switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 280
Replenishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
R
RA-4 chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Racks
Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 303
Reading
Lens code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Replenishment console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Replenishment pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 278
Replenishment rate
Changing for all chemistries together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 297
Changing for one tank only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 297
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 296
Reset logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Room
Aeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rotary switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
S
Safe handling of chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safe operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 30
Safety stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 289, 307
Scanning the frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Sensors
Automatic top-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Film detection in film loading station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Flow or vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 276
Lost liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Measuring the resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview of paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Panorama feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Paper extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 276
Shipping kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
362 Service Manual

Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Signs and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Site
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
98.22.56 Edition 3
Transport to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Sorter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 287
Specification
Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Wet part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Spray pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
T
Temperature
Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 234
Viewing values in film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Viewing values in paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Test points on MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Tools
Required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 178
Spirit level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Top-off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 324
Transport
Belts on paper deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
In film processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
In paper processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 285
Triac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
U
Upgrade kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
V
Vacuum cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Vacuum sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 279
Vapors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Voltage regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Service Manual 363

W
Wallet lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
98.22.56 Edition 3
Z
Zoom drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Zoom home position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
364 Service Manual

Althardstrasse 70, CH-8105 Regensdorf, Switzerland, Telephone ++41 1 842 11 11, Telefax ++41 1 842 21 00
GRETAG IMAGING AG 98.22.56 SA en 2000/11 Printed in Switzerland

SA Master Lab+

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SA Master Lab+

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6HUYLFH0DQXDO

 ,QWURGXFWLRQ  

 (TXLSPHQWRYHUYLHZ  

1.3.3 Labels on the Master Lab+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

 ,QWURGXFWLRQ  

2.3.3 Tools required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

 ,QVWDOODWLRQ  

 &KHFNLQJWKHV\VWHP  

2.5.1 Check the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

 0DLQWHQDQFH0HQXIRUWKH3ULQWHU  

 *HQHUDO3URFHGXUHV  

 3ULQWHUSDUW  

 3RZHUVXSSO\  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

 3RZHUVXSSO\ZHWSDUW  

 3RZHUVXSSO\SULQWHUSDUW 

 6HUYLFLQJ  

5.4.3 Printer part power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

 6FKHPDWLFV  

 2YHUYLHZ  

 0DLQSURFHVVRUERDUG&38  

 ,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&38ERDUG 

 /LVWRI',3VZLWFKHVDQGMXPSHUV  

 3LQDVVLJQPHQWRQSRZHUVXSSO\SOXJ- 

 &RQWURO%RDUG &%2DQG&%2  

6.6.3 Block diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

 0HPRU\FDUG  

 $GMXVWPHQWVUHSODFHPHQWV  

 6FKHPDWLFV  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

7.1.1 Lamp house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

7.2.3 Adjusting filter wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

 6FKHPDWLFV  

 0HDVXULQJV\VWHP  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

 5HSODFLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP  

 &KHFNLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP  

8.3.2 120 film. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

 6FDQQHUFDOLEUDWLRQIRUVWDWXVµ0¶ 

 6HWWLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ 

 6FKHPDWLFV  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

 )LOPGHFNFRGLQJ  

 %ORFNGLDJUDPVRIILOPGHFNV 

 7KHDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFNV  

 7KHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN 

 &KHFNVDGMXVWPHQWVIRUDQGILOPGHFNV 

 $GMXVWPHQWVRQWKHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN  

9.7.1 Adjusting home position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

 /LVWRIVFKHPDWLFV  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

10.1.1 Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

 6HQVRURYHUYLHZ 

 5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWVDQGFKHFNV  

10.3.16 Manually moving the feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

 6FKHPDWLFV  

 2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ  

 +HDWLQJV\VWHP 

 5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP  

 5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP  

 7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP  

 )LOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ  

,QWURGXFWLRQ

(TXLSPHQWRYHUYLHZ

,QWURGXFWLRQ

,QVWDOODWLRQ

&KHFNLQJWKHV\VWHP

0DLQWHQDQFH0HQXIRUWKH3ULQWHU

*HQHUDO3URFHGXUHV

3ULQWHUSDUW

3RZHUVXSSO\

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

3RZHUVXSSO\ZHWSDUW

3RZHUVXSSO\SULQWHUSDUW

6HUYLFLQJ

6FKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZ

0DLQSURFHVVRUERDUG&38

,QGLFDWRUVRQWKH&38ERDUG

/LVWRI',3VZLWFKHVDQGMXPSHUV

3LQDVVLJQPHQWRQSRZHUVXSSO\SOXJ-

&RQWURO%RDUG&%2DQG&%2

0HPRU\FDUG

$GMXVWPHQWVUHSODFHPHQWV

6FKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

6FKHPDWLFV

0HDVXULQJV\VWHP

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

5HSODFLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP

&KHFNLQJWKHPHDVXULQJV\VWHP

6FDQQHUFDOLEUDWLRQIRUVWDWXVµ0¶

6HWWLQJWKHWHPSHUDWXUHFRPSHQVDWLRQ

6FKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

)LOPGHFNFRGLQJ

%ORFNGLDJUDPVRIILOPGHFNV

7KHDXWRPDWLFILOPGHFNV

7KHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN

&KHFNVDGMXVWPHQWVIRUDQGILOPGHFNV

$GMXVWPHQWVRQWKHXQLYHUVDOILOPGHFN

/LVWRIVFKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

6HQVRURYHUYLHZ

5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWVDQGFKHFNV

6FKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

+HDWLQJV\VWHP

5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP

5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP

7UDQVSRUWV\VWHP

)LOPORDGLQJVWDWLRQ

5DFNV

5HSODFHPHQWVDGMXVWPHQWV

6FKHPDWLFV

3DSHUSURFHVVRUDQG$76

2YHUYLHZDQGIXQFWLRQDOGHVFULSWLRQ

+HDWLQJV\VWHP

5HSOHQLVKPHQWV\VWHP

5HFLUFXODWLRQV\VWHP

5DFNV

6RUWHU

5HSODFHPHQWVDQGDGMXVWPHQWV

6FKHPDWLFV

2YHUYLHZ

0&%ERDUG

0ERDUG

0ERDUG

6&6%ERDUG

$FFHVVLQJ$GMXVWLQJUHSODFLQJWKHZHWSDUWHOHFWURQLFERDUGV

6FKHPDWLFV

2SWLRQV

&XVWRPL]HU

)LOPFOHDQHU

5HPRWHFRQWUROLQWHUIDFH

5HSOHQLVKPHQWFRQVROH

/LQHSULQWHU

3DVVSRUWOHQV:DOOHWOHQV

*UHHWLQJFDUGDWWDFKPHQW

&RQYHUVLRQDQGXSJUDGHNLWV

.LWGHVFULSWLRQV

%LEOLRJUDSK\